Home

Paradise P300 User's Manual

1. 113 6 12 8 Change BUC LNB Rx LNB LNB Type 113 6 12 9 Change BUC LNB Rx LNB DC amp REFERENCES Menu 114 6 12 10 Change BUC LNB Rx LNB SHF FREQUENCIES Menu 114 6 12 11 Change BUC LNB Tune Ref Menu 115 6 13 MONITOR 116 6 13 1 Monitor DEMOD PERFORMANCE Menu 116 6 13 2 Monitor TERRESTRIAL BER 116 6 13 3 Monitor CARRIER ID s 117 6 13 4 Monitor DISTANT Eb No amp BER Menu 117 6 13 5 Monitor AUPGC MENU essed vane Oe dese Oo ede Oa ee 118 6 13 6 Monitor BUG Men zii ebore te E ii 118 6 14 INFO MENU 2c nem o ec daca ne cce Beer E oc Naas Ek ec Pere 119 misa LOG MENU ONAT 120 6 15 1 Log AUTOLOG Meriu ne re ee E 120 6 16 TEST MENU v Fa eet Edom aia dude abd uds ed 122 6 16 1 Test LOOPBACKS Menu sr eee 122 6 16 2 Test fda ed aida PIN nba CDL 124 6 16 3 Test PSU S TEMPMenu sesee RR RR RR RR RR IR n 124 6 16 4 Test INT BERT Menu Sis os os Ra hie e s rece Nes reci er OR apu E Ra c a 125 6 1
2. IDR BASED ON 7 OVERHEAD IDR OVERHEAD 16k Low rate format UE Normal 96k 2x16k Audio 32k High rate format T2 E2 1 x Audio 64k 64k 2 16 Audio only No Audio 32k 16k ADPCM modes 2048K IBS MODE CHANNEL ASSOC Normal 67 overhead 9 SIG CAS IN TS16 TIMESLOT RE ORDER 6732 0 overhead Norma No CAS Normal 1 End of Dialogue IBS TIMESLOT RE ORDER Service type Interactive timeslot re order Custom IDR entry CONTINUOUS DATA Interactive entry of dala rale mile 2048K IDR MODE 2048K IDR MODE Normal Align frame for Rx TS re order Re order Rx TS if Tx TS Tx TS re order frame aligned End of Dialogue DROP TIMESLOTS G 732 CHAN ASSOCIATED SIG Interactive selection of Option Extended D I N Timesiots 972 ignore 4B TS IDENTITY MAINTAINED Transfer Via overhead ey BY TS32 MULTIFRAME BASEBAND DROP BEARER Bearer Yes to acknowledge del Option Dropiinsert type Other function Cea DROPEED TS 1 D4 or TS IDENTITY OVER SAT TI ESF Option Extended D I Replace with idle code T1 RBS OVER SATELLITE Normal maintain Option Extended Don t care OICE DATA MUX Normal or no RBS Option IDR K 1 Maniar ROS TS IDENTITY MAINTAINED BY Audio 2 x 32k ADPCM TS32 CAS RBS MULTIFRAME CLOCKING Audio 64k data implied by CAS RBS not displayed Tx clock in Internal exte 909 FREQUENCY Entry
3. 74 6 6 24 Change Tx Modulator AUPC CARRIER LOST ACTION Menu 75 6 6 25 Change Tx Rx ESC AUX BA Menu 76 6 6 26 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA DEFINE IDR Menu 77 6 6 27 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA DEFINE IBS Menu 78 6 6 28 Custom IBS Overhead Allocation 80 6 6 29 Change TX Rx ESC AuxBA ASYNC ESC 81 6 6 30 Change Tx Rx ESC AuxBA Config Async BAUD RATE Menu 82 6 6 31 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Config Async FORMAT Menu 82 6 6 32 Change TX Rx ESC Aux BA Config Async SET AS REMM amp C 82 6 6 88 Change TX Rx ESC AuxBA INTERFACES Menu 83 6 6 34 Change TX Rx ESC AuxBA AUDIO LEVELS Menu 84 6 6 35 Change TX Rx ESC Aux BA BACKWARD ALARMS Menu 85 CHANGE RX MENU itid eee dates iste odes 86 NOTE ON RX TX FUNCTION ssssssee es 86 6 7 1 Change Rx SERVICE Menu ssssssselssl rn 87 6 7 2 Change Rx BASEBAND Menu 0 0 87 6 7 3 Change Rx BUFFER CLOCKING Menu 89 6 7 4 Change Rx Buffer Clocking STATION CLOCK Menu 89 6 7 5 Change Rx Buffer Clocking RX CLOCK Menu 90 6 7 6 Change Rx Bu
4. new nee mE Sig Valid In RS23 new RS23 jk v Clock Out RS232 IE pM Data Out RS232 Sig Valid Out RS232 Signal Ground 19 20 21 IE Shield Protective ground SHIELD EE Device DTE Reagy In 12 Groun Device DCE Ready Out 11 RS23 Local Loop In 10 RS232 Remote Loop In uo 23 9232 in h The maximum data rate is 100kbps over good quality screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 50kbps to 20m 25kbps to 40m etc NOTE this is a synchronous RS232 interface if you need an asynchronous interface please contact the factory The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to 7x Clock Inthe Data signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to Internal or Rx the Data signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal Note that although there are both 25 pin EIA530 pinout and 37 pin RS449 pinout connectors on
5. SION SION 2 1 7 jo ones o eyes joquiAs ON passaidxa esiou S3 y loquiAs eyes uioJ4 SION osieueo 9SION 9SION JOWIED O J s jeuy uingoeds 10jeuejdx3 oN d3 tv ZV8 8 12 5 Tables to Convert C N N to Eb No Adjust for Adjust for modulation FEC Rate Adjust for RS Codec QPSK 3 0dB 34 Rate 1 25dB 126 112 7 0 51dB OQPSK 3 0dB 7 Rate 0 58dB 219 201 9 0 37dB 8PSK 4 77dB 25 Rate 1 76dB 225 205 10 0 40dB gt 20 C N error lt 0 04dB Example 8SPK with Rate TCM FEC amp RS 219 2009 9 N C N 8PSK so 2 3 Rate FEC so RS Code 219 201 9 so 8 408 7 BS pur 4 77dB add 76dB 0 37dB Measure Lookup up Calculate Eb No z C N 2 2648 BPSK 0dB Ve Rate 3 0dB n k t P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 162 9 1 9 2 1 FOR 1 OPERATION THEORY Any two Modem s will operate as a 1 FOR 1 redundant pair with no other equipment except for a single interconnecting lead two power splitter combiners and cable forms to parallel up the interfaces of both units Both Modem s of the pair operate continuously performing their function on the incoming data a
6. 159 8 12 1 Introduction it oe E bs niu Rr ates t 159 8 12 2 Derivation of Eb No from C N N 159 8 12 3 Practical Implications of Displayed Eb No 160 8 12 4 Eb No Explanatory Diagram 161 8 12 5 Tables to Convert C N N to Eb No 162 1 FOR T OPEBATION x 3 ended recedere 163 91 THEORY mter reet edd ec RUE Hp dcl eben uan thao deem 163 9 2 SWITCHING PHILOSOPHY a rs 163 9 3 PRACTICAL 1 FOR 1 IMPLEMENTATION 0000 cece eee eee n 164 BOOT CODE OPERATION oca acetate a a 165 10 1 FLASH SOFTWARE UPDATE 9999 de dA E as 165 10 2 OTHER BOOT CODE OPTIONS sse Rene Ree Ro Ran ce Roe RR RD SA DR ia 166 APPENDIX A DATA INTERFACE INFORMATION 167 GENERA x elu Lui E P cee ut cu a 167 P1440 IN RS422 MODE ea freta dex dagtecn aus rg aa deg dtr aa reped 168 P1440 IN V 35 0 ey oben eO E Cp E EROR EI ERO D Deb d PE A 169 P1440 IN RS282 MODE sube sve nre rhe d ne ads 170 P1440 IN G 703 MODE sssssssseee lm n 171 P1440 IN X 24 MODE sussessseeeess ehm rr hn 173 MIE STD 188 114A INTEREAGE e NER N uk 175 P1451 EUROCOM D 1 D amp G PLUS MULTI STANDARD INTERFACE 176 APPENDIX B MO
7. 19120 ou S yod xne ou syJou S 9JIM y jeng 19150 2u S lNHOd S3 ou sy ou S VLVG ONE O SVIA l6vvSu Page 21 P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook P300H gt Ad HOLVIN LONI 29 LYSANO9 dd ddd MVS MNVE G3HOLIMS pod ovd TOYULNOO T3 31 H3MOd XL HOLVI 1ndlno XNV8 S3 1l GAHOLIMS 8 391 SNISVIIV LLNV syst dls 1 IH OAS WOL LIA gt 1 gt 095 WOL LIA 0 gt OL lt q UJOJJ Page 22 P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook P300H 4 SUMMARY OF SPECIFICATIONS Common Main Specifications Optional features are shown in square brackets Modulation BPSK QPSK OQPSK 8PSK Frequency Resolution P300 50 MHz 90 MHz 100Hz resolution 50 MHz 180 MHz Wideband IF feature P310 950MHz 1750MHz 100Hz resolution 950 MHz 2150 MHz Wideband IF feature Traffic Interface Electrical RS422 V 35 and RS232 software selectable clocking can provide X 21 DCE or DTE mode Mechanical Both EIA530 DCE and RS449 DCE connectors 25 pin 37 pin D female respectively Options T1 or E1 G 703 in addition to RS422 V 35 am
8. Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial Menu PCM BEARER CRC This option is only applicable when the unit is configured for Drop Insert operation with a PCM bearer which supports CRC T1 ESF or G 732 When appropriate this accesses a sub menu which is discussed in the following section TX DROP BER The source for the estimate of the terrestrial BER at the Drop Mux may be selected Auto The selection is made automatically from the most appropriate source FAW The input BER is estimated from the Frame Alignment Words FAW of the PCM bearer CRC The input BER is estimated from the number of CRC errors T1 ESF amp G 732 only E Bits The output BER is determined by counting the E Bits on the incoming G 732 signal On a G 732 link an E Bit is returned by the distant equipment when it receives an errored CRC ie the incoming E Bits represent the error rate at the far end of this modems outgoing G 732 link Effectively the error rate on the outgoing link at the far end Default Auto RX INSERT BER The source for the estimate of the BER from the terrestrial port at the input to the insert mux may be selected as described above for the Tx Drop BER Default Auto 6 10 5 Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial PCM BEARER CRC Menu PCM Bearer 1 Bearer CRC 2 E Bits 3 CRC Frame Acq Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial PCM Bearer CRC Menu BEARER CRC This option only applicable to G 732 Drop Insert bearers selects if th
9. 11 RemoteLCDRd TBD from unit 9 110 RemoteKbdWr Display either all no key presses or single Main keypress initiates first RemoteLCDRd 11 Reset VO 61 to unit 4 0 ack Command TimeDateQry VO 88 to unit 10 0 TimeDateRd Query The time amp date of the internal real time clock The timeDateWr will probably be 11 TimeDateRd V0 88 from unit 6 TimeDateQry Status used in broadcast mode address 0 and the TimeDateRd probably used on 6 11 TimeDateWr V0 88 lto unit 11 ack Change status screens to display the current unit time to compare log entries to etc P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 199 Ge First Direction Instr Body Partner Function ee sd 11 CommsPing vi37 37 to unit unit sd laey Used to test comms integrity and general acknowledge for many commands Ack original V0 61__ from unit E Acknowledge which do not directly request a response E 11 extended 0 61 from unit 1 many messages Note Instruction codes used for SA bus messages are as specified above 30H SA bus instructions 70 7F are not used Note on First Available column marked have been available since the version specified but only in specific builds there are different builds of the code as follows Build Name Name Filename Marked available Comments P440 build P440Vxxx Build applicable only t
10. There was only intended to be one V 35 scrambler but the CCITT who made the original specification were the first of many organisations to get it wrong To ensure there was no ambiguity they printed a written description together with an example schematic However the schematic they supplied behaved differently from the written description well done boys and there immediately grew two opposing camps those who had worked to the schematic and those who had worked to the written description The difference between the two implementations was only in the action to take when the adverse state is detected ie what to do if a long string of zeroes has been output In such a case a counter injected an opposing bit to generate a transition and break the cycle of all zeroes with a counter in the corresponding descrambler cancelling out this injected opposing bit The difference between the two implementations is in the count length of this adverse state detector counter one is 30 counts and the other 31 The net result of inter operating equipment from the two differing V 35 camps schematic written description was a background pattern dependent error rate in the order of 1 x 10 Note that as the background error rate is pattern dependent there is no guarantee you will see it with regular test equipment such as Firebirds etc which generate repeated fixed patterns In most satellite communications such a background error rate might be masked by
11. v Signal Ground 7 19 20 21 Ground IE v Shield Protective ground 1 1 Screen EE Device DTE Reagy In 20 23 12 30 RS422 Device DCE Ready Out 6 22 11 29 20 RS422 Local Loop In NEM 18 10 5232 The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to Tx Clock In the Data signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to Internal or Rx the Data signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal Note that although there are both 25 pin 530 pinout and 37 RS449 pinout connectors on the rear panel these are simply connected in parallel Do not use both connectors at the same time By selecting Change Terr Inffc Control Lines it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid line RS or Device DT
12. 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 This is less than ideal and so a few further values are accommodated by mapping them into two frames 2 Frames ie 120 available data timeslots N 8 24 Finally to support one further rate four frame are used 4 Frames ie 240 available data timeslots N 16 The remaining values of N cannot have Timeslot ID Maintained by groups of 1 2 or 4 frames these are collectively know as the Odd values of N Odd values of N N 7 9 11 13 14 17 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 31 Most previous equipment could not provide timeslot ID maintenance for these odd values of N however the P300 when equipped with the Extended D I feature uses a derivative of the IBS CAS Multiframe see later section CAS Multiframe to provide timeslot ID maintenance for even these remaining values of N P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 209 Signalling Systems Introduction CCS CAS amp RBS Signalling systems are used to convey call status on PCM systems call status is information such as Busy Idle Ring tone Dialling etc Common Channel Signalling CCS Some PCM systems us a Common Channel Signalling CCS where a whole timeslot is allocated to carry the signalling function between the ends of the link with protocols such as Signalling system No 7 etc running within that 64kbps channel Common Channel Signalling is used on both 1544kbps T1 and 2048kbps
13. 1 1 CONNECTOR Ground Line in Line out Fail in FE Serial In Out Fail out Serial in unused Serial out unused Not used Not used This is an uncommitted and currently unused RS232 serial port Line In Out amp Fail In Out A suitable four way lead 4 Screen 1 1 redundancy lead is as follows Unit 1 Unit 2 Pin 1 Screen Pin 1 Pili 2 Pin 3 Pill 2 PINO 2x hs Pin 7 Pill sisi Pin 6 circuit ground On Line signal 2 1 On Line signal 1 2 Fail signal 2 1 Fail signal 1 2 Keep this lead as short as practical and ensure it is screened to prevent spurious changeovers by noise induced in these high impedance signal leads Refer to the earlier section on 1 FOR 1 switching for details of 1 FOR 1 operation Astandard 1 FOR 1 lead is available from Paradise Datacom part number P1391 The lead is 10cm long and is designed for use when two Modem are mounted vertically adjacent to each other in the rack P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 181 ALARMS amp AGC CONNECTOR Connector type 15 pin D male ALARMS CONNECTOR 12 Fault Relay Common Prompt Unit fault N O 1 Prompt Unit fault N C Prompt Traffic fault prompt N O c o pair a js 10 Prompt Traffic fault prompt N C c o pair a Prompt Traffic fault prompt N O c o pair b 13 Prompt Traffic fault prompt N C c o pair b 1 Deferred al
14. 1 Normal linear 2 Re order Change Tx Rx Baseband Cont 2048k IBS G 732 TS Menu The Modem can re order the timeslot data in the G 732 frame prior to transmission along with the CAS signalling if CAS was selected although this feature is only available if the Extended feature is available standard on P300 TCM This is for services where the equipment at the other end of the link may require subsets of data in particular timeslot groupings In some applications this feature can remove the need for separate Digital Access Cross Connect DACCs equipment used simply to re arrange timeslots Typical applications might be with multiple LRE equipments which may place data in alternate timeslots or for multidestinational carriers where the receive equipment needs data for each location in contiguous timeslots If Re order is selected a timeslot edit screen is displayed as follows TS order 0 17 31 16 15 1 Toggle YES t Help Change Tx Rx Baseband Cont 2048k IBS G 732 Re order Menu This screen allows the operator to change the order of the transmitted timeslots The screen above shows groups of timeslots 1 15 and 17 31 swopped in location with 1 15 also reversed 15 1 although any combination is possible The selection system works by toggling timeslots or groups of timeslots into or out of the selection Timeslots already in the selection are toggled out from any position of the selection when the
15. 1 Off 2 On 3 Muted after pwr brk 4 Intfc RTS Controlled Change Tx Modulator Carrier Menu The state of the Transmit Carrier is selected as follows OFF The carrier is off ON The carrier will remain on and after a power break it will automatically return to on POWER BREAK MUTE The carrier is switched on BUT after a power cut the carrier will be switched off and a deferred alarm generated until either from the front panel or remotely the unit is instructed to return the carrier to the on state RTS CONTROLLED The carrier will be dynamically controlled by the Sig Valid In the RTS line ona V 35 DCE interface see interface card details in appendix A for line names for other interfaces No alarm is raised when the Tx carrier is muted by the RTS line going to the off state unless the RTS line itself is set to raise an alarm if it goes to the off state Change Terr Inffc Control Lines The operator is warned if the carrier is set to POWER BREAK MUTE when SETUP CHECK is requested Change Tx Modulator POWER LEVEL Menu This is the normal menu for the P300 and P310 L Band modem An alternative menu is displayed when operating in Terminal mode with a Paradise BUC Set Tx Power 15 3dBm enter value YES or t to change Change Tx Modulator Power Menu Normal This menu allows control of the Transmit output power This may be varied from OdBm to 25dBm 5dBm to 30dBm for the P310 in O 1dB s
16. 8 7 8 7 1 CLOSED NETWORK PLUS ESC Overhead Rates The following table shows example overhead rates for different async ESC Baud rates at a variety of main channel data rates The table was generated using a modem with the async character format set for 8 bits no parity the overhead percentages will vary slightly for async character formats different from this Figures Overhead rate with backward alarm Overhead rate without backward alarm if different Main data channel rates ESC rates 9 6kbps 16kbps 64kbps 256kbps 512kbps 1024kbps 2048kbps 2400 Baud 33 3 20 5 4 8 1 2596 1 19 0 62 0 59 0 39 0 39 4800 Baud 100 50 10 2 5 2 38 1 25 1 19 0 62 0 59 0 39 9600 Baud n a 10096 2096 5 476 2 5 2 38 1 25 1 19 0 62 0 59 19200 Baud n a n a 5096 1096 5 4 76 2 5 2 38 1 25 1 19 38400 Baud n a n a 10096 2096 1096 5 4 76 see notes on absolute minimum overhead in para 8 7 3 on page 148 The formula for deriving the overhead rate is moderately complex and relies on many different parameters For other mixes of data rate and async settings the simplest way to determine the overhead is to enter the parameters into a modem and then select Info View Config Tx A screen such as the one shown below is displayed as the second or third screen accessed by Down Arrow This screen shows the exact overhead percentage as well as the Framed data rate Frm the data rat
17. AUTOLOG This is described below Log AUTOLOG Menu Auto log period 60 mins 0 Off 22 mins Yes Log Autolog Menu This first screen sets the period between automatic log entries Entering a figure of zero disables the automatic logging of any data When YES is pressed with a non zero value for the Autolog period the following screen is accessed Autolog Y N 1 Buffer Y 2 Eb No Y 3 Rx User BER N More Log Autolog Measurements Menu 1 This screen allows the operator to toggle each of the first three loggable events on and off N indicates No the data will not be logged Y indicates Yes the data will be logged Pressing the key corresponding to each data type toggles between Y and N More options are available on subsequent screens Autolog Y N 1 BERT BER N t Back 2 Tx Terr BER 3 Rx Terr BER N Log Autolog Measurements Menu 2 Finally if AUPC is active see AUPC in section 8 11 1 on page 154 another subsequent screen is offered Autolog Y N 1 AUPC Delta Power Y 2 Distant end Eb No t Back Log Autolog Measurements Menu 3 AUPC P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 120 Each option is as follows BUFFER Eb No USER BER BERT BER TX TERR BER RX TERR BER AUPC DELTA POWER DISTANT END EB NO The buffer fill state is logged every period this allows fill trends to be monitored The average AND worst
18. In the FEC Decoder the bit rate is reduced as the data is decoded to provide corrected data at a lower rate Because the data rate reduces through the FEC Decoder E is higher than E as the same power is referenced to a lower bit rate Allowing for the change in bit rate in the FEC decoder gives Dec _ E ian 10log FEC Code Rate 0 0 Following the FEC Decoder the inner FEC ie Turbo Viterbi Sequential or TCM comes the Reed Solomon Outer FEC Decoder if active This Outer FEC RS Decoder operates similarly to the Inner FEC Decoder reducing the bit rate as it corrects errors and finally generating the Composite Information Bit Rate at its output The Carrier Noise expressed at this Composite Information Bit Rate is referred to as the E N or E N or E N with and b referring to Information and Bit respectively Again because the data rate reduces through the RS Decoder E is higher than Ebe as the same power is referenced to a lower bit rate Allowing for the change in bit rate in the RS Decoder gives P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 159 8 12 3 E E EE m 10log RS Code Rate A n It is this E N that is typically displayed on the front panel of Modem equipment Finally after the RS Decoder comes Deframing and baseband processing such as Drop Insert IBS SMS or IDR deframing does decrease the bandwidth but
19. P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 197 or of All Remote M amp C Messages 1 TxBBWr V0 61 to unit 19 TxModQry V0 61 unit 22 1 1 RxBBRd RxBBWr RxModQry RxModRd RxModWr TxBBQry TxBBRd V0 61 from unit 70 V0 61 to unit 17 70 0 61 unit 20 0 61 from unit VO 61 unit 21 14 0 61 unit 18 0 61 from unit 58 TxModRd v0 61 fromunit 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 UnitTestWr V0 61__ to unit TxModWr UnitCfgQry UnitCfgRd UnitCfgWr AUPCQry AUPCRd AUPCWr TestResQry TestResRd UnitResRd UnitStatQry UnitStatRd QFaultQry QFaultRd UnitTestQry UnitTestRd P300H V2 09 V1 37 12 UnitResQry VO 61 unit 39 0 58 V0 61 unit 23 14 V0 61 unit 24 V0 61 from unit 0 61 to unit 25 26 V2 09 unit 44 V2 09 from unit to unit 45 V1 37 unit 38 from unit V0 61 from unit VO 61 to unit 42 V0 61 from unit VO 61 unit 1 VO 61 from unit V0 61 unit 40 V0 61 from unit 16 0 A o O P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Function Bi V0 61 unit 16 gt RxBBRd Query Configuration ol the Rx Basebandisection e Insert Clocking of the Rx Baseband section ie Insert Mux Deframer Clocking RxBBQry Config gt ack Change gt RxModRd Query
20. Software gt V2 14 A combination of Fault Mode 13 ISDN backup AND Fault Mode 12 OQPSK Compatibility 2 Telenor Receive fail Transmit Inhibit RTI This additional feature allows the guaranteed shutdown of transmission from a remote unmanned site even in the event that all M amp C is lost When enabled this remote shutdown is accomplished by muting the signal to the remote destination which will then mute its transmit carrier whenever the receive input signal is lost for more than 10 seconds continuously Specifically The definition of receive input signal is lost includes demod unlocked FEC sync lost RS sync lost frame sync lost if applicable and Multiframe sync lost if applicable The remote transmit will unmute when all the above alarms have been clear for 5 seconds 3 Max Sequential decoder gain In normal operation at data rates of 128kbps and below to reduce the delay through the sequential decoder if selected as the FEC in operation the decoder processing memory is shortened at the cost of slightly reduced decoder gain This option disables the shortening of the memory and leaves the maximum memory in circuit maximising the Sequential decoder gain at the cost of increased processing delay In the normal mode when this function is not active the decoder memory is 4096 bits but at receive rates of 128kbps and below this is reduced to 2048 bits 64kbps and below 1024 bits and 32kbps and below 512bits This means th
21. for example RG223 U Installations which ignore these requirements will invalidate the compliancy to EMC specifications SAFETY To ensure operator safety the P300 Modems have been designed to comply with the following safety standard EN 60950 Safety of Information Technology Equipment including electrical business machines Prior to installation and operation please ensure that the following points are observed P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 7 Environmental The equipment is designed to operate in a static 19 inch rack system conforming to IEC 297 2 Operation of the equipment in transportable installations and vehicles equipped with the means of providing a stable environment is permissible Operation of the equipment on vehicles ships or aircraft without means of environmental conditioning may invalidate the safety compliancy Please contact the factory for further advice Operation of the equipment in an environment other than that stated in the specifications will also invalidate the safety compliancy The equipment must not be operated in an environment in which the unit is exposed to Un pressurised altitudes greater than 2000 metres Extremes of temperature outside the stated operating range Excessive dust Moisture or humid atmospheres above 95 RH Excessive vibration Flammable gases Corrosive or explosive atmospheres Installation The equipment is classified in EN 60950 a
22. pressing YESafter entering all significant digits fills the rest of the entry with zeroes pressing YES again enters this value When the user is requested to select a configuration parameter the last setting is always displayed in square brackets To select the same option again just press the YESKey ie you don t have to reselect the same option to get past the menu just press YES Options displayed with a colon eg 1 Status switch to another screen or subsequent menu but do not affect operation Options displayed with a equals sign eg 1 Off change the configuration and may if changing a relevant parameter affect the traffic Reselecting a current option or pressing YES to select the current option will never cause a traffic interruption When a unit is shipped or if the non volatile memory is cleared it will have an blank configuration and require the operator to use SETUP INITIAL CONFIG prior to allowing STATUS to be selected This prompts for all parameters required for a complete configuration Wherever possible menus state normal after the most common option If in doubt select the normal option if there is one it works every time After SETUP INITIAL CONFIG has been performed once minor changes to the configuration may be made with the CHANGE option from the main menu CHANGE allows parameters such as Tx amp Rx service data rates clocking IF frequencies and miscellaneous parameters to be set without going thro
23. 24 TS 32 CAS 32 CAS 24 CAS 48 25 CAS 40 CAS 40 26 CAS 104 CAS 104 27 CAS 72 CAS 72 28 CAS 56 CAS 112 T1 only provides a maximum of 24 timeslots to 29 CAS 232 CAS 232 Drop Insert 30 TS 328 CAS 8 3i CAS 248 CAS 248 32 CAS 8 CAS 128 These are the Odd values of N for which the Timeslot ID cannot be maintained by the TS 32 Multiframe N232 is a special case normally handled as unframed 2048kbps ie no Drop Insert or 1920 1984kbps D I with N 30 31 P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 212 IDR FRAMING IDR Service Features The INTELSAT definition of IDR framing is in IESS 308 Eutelsat have a similar system defined in EESS 203 Intermediate Rate Digital Carriers IDC Earth Station Standard which simply cross refers back to the INTELSAT IESS 308 standard for the Channel Unit Characteristics and so the Modem equipment required for these services is identical From here on we will refer to IDR framing but the text applies equally to Eutelsats IDC framing Standard Features specified in IDR definitions The addition of standard IDR framing increases the data rate by exactly 96kbps IDR framing is added to provide the following extra features compared to closed network links gt gt gt Two Audio ESC channels encoded as 32kbps ADPCM As IDR is intended to replace all links these Audio ESCs replace the analog audio engineer
24. 25 v Shield Protective Shield Protective ground dwqno wo O lo m Links All links settings are Centre tap grounded 1 2 link with the PCB legend the right way up Centre tap floating 2 3 link down with the PCB legend the right way up The typical configuration would normally be to ground the outputs and leave the inputs floating ie Links 4 5 and 7 in pos 1 2 up and links 1 and 2 in pos 2 3 down This provides protection by ensuring the signal levels remain close to ground potential as might happen if both inputs and outputs were floating but avoid any ground currents between distant locations as might happen if both inputs and outputs were grounded The modem will detect and display the Data Marginal warning if the Tx input clock and data phase is incorrect and will automatically flip the clock phase to correct this If repeated Data Marginal alarms occur then it is likely the Tx clock and data are not from the same clock course and are slipping past each other P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 177 Eurocom 0 1 interface G operation The Eurocom interface uses transformer coupled differential combined clock and data signal which is diphase coded The amplitude is 1 0V ie 2 0 V peak to peak The lines are of 1300 impedance and the centre tap of the line coupling transformers may either be grounded or left floating The Eurocom G interfac
25. 6 2 1 Menu Structure Sheet 1 7 Main Status Change 42 6 2 2 Full Menu Structure Sheet 2 7 Main Monitor Info 43 6 2 3 Full Menu Structure Sheet 3 7 Main Log Test Setup Action Help 44 6 2 4 Full Menu Structure Sheet 4 7 Main Change User Opt Operation 45 6 2 5 Full Menu Structure Sheet 5 7 Change TX 46 6 2 6 Full Menu Structure Sheet 6 6 Change 47 6 2 7 Full Menu Structure Sheet 7 7 Change BUC LNB 48 6 3 Status SCREEN DISPLAY pi ieai ik 49 6 4 SETUP INITIAL CONFIGURATION MENU 00 0000 eee eee 53 6 5 lt CHANGE MENW sauce i Pi be i dep oe dete i OR Ra Pages 53 6 6 GHANGE TX MENU dra eed d teen dea ee ed Rte e ep AR 54 6 6 1 Change TX Rx SERVICE Menu sssssssssslses rs 54 6 6 2 Change TX Rx Service CLOSED NETWORK 55 6 6 3 Change TX Rx BASEBAND Menu 57 6 6 4 Change Tx Rx Baseband CONTINUOUS Menu 57 6 6 5 Change Tx Rx Baseband DROP INSERT Menu 58 6 6 6 Change Tx Rx Baseband OTHER Menu 62 6 6 7 Change Tx CLOCKING Menu 000000 e cece rn 63 6 6 8 Change Tx MODULATO
26. 6 3dB all rates 1 x10 10 4dB 8PSK TCM Reed 1x10 6 1dB Solomon all rates 1x10 7 P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 25 BER performance with concatenated RS Monitor Functions Clocking and Buffering Clock Loops Tx Clocking Rx Clocking Internal Reference Station References inputs Buffer Size BER improvement depends on n and k values chosen but a typical increase in coding gain of 3dB is possible over basic Viterbi mode Measured FEC input BER raw channel not TCM Estimated FEC output BER not TCM Measured Reed Solomon input BER Estimated Reed Solomon output BER Measured deframer FAW BER Measured Eb No not based on channel BER range 3 0 15 0dB accuracy 0 2dB Measured frequency offset 100 Hz resolution Frequency locked loops give phase hit immune operation even with poor clock sources such as routers etc Internal Reference see Internal Reference below for stability External tracking range 100 ppm min Rx Timing slaves Tx internally generated timing from Rx clocking whatever Rx clocking mode is selected eg with Rx Satellite for loop timing with full asymmetric rate capability or with Rx Station for both Tx amp Rx clocking slaved to Station Clock again with full asymmetric rate capability Clock from satellite Buffer disable Transmit input clock plesiochronous includes full asymmetric rate operation Internal Reference
27. E1 systems although different signalling systems run on the common channel of course Channel Associated Signalling Some E1 POM systems use Channel Associated Signalling CAS where a low rate data signalling channel is provided uniquely for each timeslot ITU G 704 defines these signalling channels as comprising of four bits named which are sent every 16th frame resulting in a channel of 2kbps There is an individual 2kbps signalling channel for each of the 30 PCM channels timeslots 1 15 and 16 31 and these are carried sequentially in pairs in TS16 there is no signalling channel for TSO nor TS16 as TSO is reserved for the Frame Alignment Word and TS16 carries the signalling for the other timeslots Robbed Bit Signalling RBS Robbed bit signalling is a technique used on T1 PCM bearers whereby signalling is conveyed by stealing the signalling bandwidth from the 64kbps timeslot to which it relates Once every 6 frames one bit the least significant bit of the 8 bits per timeslot is stolen and used to convey signalling In T1 D4 which has a 12 frame terrestrial multiframe this gives two signalling bits ab and in T1 ESF which has a 24 frame terrestrial multiframe this gives four signalling bits abcd The frames in which the bit is robbed are synchronised to the terrestrial multiframe as follows T1 D4 6th amp 12th T1 ESF 6th 12th 18th 24th Stealing the LSB every sixth frame was acceptable when PCM signals co
28. Eb No 10798 gt FEC 3E 4 gt RS 6E 7 Target Eb No Local ENG FAW lt 1E 6 FINAL BER lt 1E 12 Rx Eb No maintained through Tx amp Rx atmospheric variations Monitor Distant end Display of Distant end Eb No 8 3dB DISTANT Distant end final BER lt 3E 10 Eb No amp BER Change User Opt Alarm threshold Dist Eb No Local alarm Deferred alarm when DISTANT Eb No lt 9 6 dB ae 0 1 to 25 0dB 0 off YES o Deferred alarm be used indicate distant Eb No falling below target if Tx max power limit reached In Maint Eb No mode the Target Eb No has to be set as well as a Tolerance window Only when the target Eb No tolerance is exceeded is the Tx power adjusted to bring the distant Eb No back to the target value The Tx power will only continue to be adjusted automatically until the Eb No settles on the target value This prevents continual Tx power variations under normal minor thermal noise variations Once settled on the target Eb No the Tx power adjustment will only be automatically reactivated when the Eb No tolerance is again exceeded Separate upper and lower Tx power limits are set along with a slew rate limit if it is felt that additional limits to prevent rapid power variations are required By manipulating the upper and lower power limits one of three scenarios can be achieved Limits Constant performance Always uses the power required to maintain the E
29. I I I 1 ACK NAK The fixed character 06H or 15H Address As Master to Slave Instruction Echo of the instruction to the Slave Body NAK One character an echo of the instruction sent ACK Where no response is expected ie a write message one character an echo of the instruction sent Where a response is called for ie a query message resulting in a read response the body is as defined for that response ETX As Master to Slave Checksum As Master to Slave Message Categories The remote M amp C messages break down into the following categories Messages to read the configuration amp reconfigure the unit Messages to read the fault operating status performance of the equipment Messages to read the current test mode amp change the test status Messages to request internally calculated values eg data rates including overhead etc Messages relating to the remote M amp C status Messages relating to queries on the device itself or option cards fitted Messages relating to the capabilities of the devices and remote upgrading Message to perform an action eg buffer centre Messages to change Tx power carrier in an abbreviated form 0 Messages to read the traffic log 1 Administrative messages zi nm 409 NO UL doo NS The following table summarises all messages including the message categories listed above A detailed list of the content of each message is available on request from Paradise Datacom
30. IDR Service Features in Appendix F on page 213 for a full description of IDR features P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 54 6 6 2 Custom This allows the operator to select a framing format based on the standard IBS SMS or IDR definitions but with non standard or extra features such as Minimum overhead framing or Multidestinational IBS A description of the features and menus which follow this choice are in section 7 1 1 Change Tx Rx Service Custom Menu on page 133 Change Tx Rx Service CLOSED NETWORK These screens are only shown if the Async ESC feature is available standard on the P300 IBS and above Note Closed Net Plus ESC is available with the P400 series modems refer to Closed Network Plus ESC via the Custom Service menu in section 8 7 2 on page 148 When Closed Net is selected the following screen is shown to allow the selection of normal Closed Network operation or Closed Net Plus ESC NO ESC PLUS ESC P300H Closed Network mode 2 1 No ESC normal 2 Plus ESC min o h Change Tx Rx Service Closed Net ESC Menu The modem operates without adding any overhead to the data this is normal Closed Network mode Normal Closed Network adds no overhead to the data and is compatible with other closed network equipment such as the Paradise P200 and closed network equipment from other vendors The modem adds the minimum possible overhead to the satellite dat
31. P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 116 6 13 3 6 13 4 Monitor CARRIER ID s Menu This screen is only available if the receive service supports the transmission of the three identity bytes in the TS32 Multiframe This includes IBS SMS modes Closed Net Plus ESC modes above 32kbps and Custom IBS modes with a TS32 multiframe Rx ID s carried in IBS MF word TS32bit4 Channel 173 Stationz041 Spare 255 Monitor Carrier ID s Menu The earlier versions of the Eutelsat SMS specification defined these 3 eight bit identities to be transmitted once per satellite TS32 multiframe to identify the carrier and the earth station These were named Sfation ID Carrier ID amp Spare ID More recent issues just say reserved for uses such as If the demod is receiving a suitable carrier then the ID s from the received carrier are displayed on this screen These may be manually set at the Tx end of the link by Change User Opt Operation Satellite Carrier ID s Monitor DISTANT Eb No amp BER Menu This screen is only available when the AUPC feature is set to Maintain Eb No or Monitor Distant refer to AUPC in section 8 11 1 on page 154 In these modes the Eb No and BER from the distant modem are brought across the satellite link by the AUPC and are available for display on the local modem and automatic timed entries to the traffic log if required Distant end Eb No 9 7dB Distant end final BER lt 1
32. Terr Int Control Lines The Modem can be set to mute the Tx carrier if this line is off Change Tx Mod Carrier If carrier is set to mute when this line is off but this line is set to ignore then there is no alarm when this line mutes the carrier See note 5 Tx Fault No clock from interface The modem is set to use the Tx Clock In Change Tx Clocking but no clock is being provided T TB SA SC TF The clock generation will use the internal clock as a backup to maintain the carrier and any framing ESC integrity Check the data connector is attached and for activity on the clock input lines Tx Fault Data input is all ones AIS The data supplied to the modem is all ones AIS This is normally used to indicate an upstream TBoot SAopv equipment fault it is not a modem fault See note 4 SCos Tx Fault No Incoming Octet Timing This message is only displayed if a 64kbps G 703 card is fitted It indicates the card has detected Top that there is no incoming octet timing on the G 703 signal The monitoring of this octet timing may be enabled and disabled with Change Terr Int Card Specific Tx Fault Frame sync lost on Tx input The modem only detects frame sync when the Drop mux is active or 2048k IBS G 732 0 overhead T TB SA SC mode is enabled Check the bearer type is specified correctly Change Tx Baseband Drop This normally only occurs if either there are significant errors on the terrestrial link or if it is supplied with A
33. alarms 2 4 are available for external patching Use when this station is transmitting a multidestinational carrier where the carrier we are receiving corresponds to the destination allocated backward alarm channel 1 The Rx fail signals from the other modems receiving the carriers from all the other destinations must be externally patched into the corresponding external backward alarm inputs 2 4 If the external inputs 2 4 are open circuit then this is the same as AOOO below Alarm 1 is internally connected to the Rx Fail signal alarms 2 4 always send the OK state Used in non multidestinational working external backward alarm inputs are ignored All four alarms represent the internal Rx Fail signal Used in non multidestinational working external backward alarm inputs are ignored In non multidestinational operation the choice between the third and fourth options is down to operator preference or station policy P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 85 6 7 CHANGE RX MENU Many of the Change Rx Menus are identical to the Change Tx menus and a reference is made back to the Change Tx description rather than repeat the text unnecessarily NOTE ON RX TX FUNCTION The Change Rx Menu has an extra feature over the Change Tx namely the ability for the Rx path to track the majority of the Tx configuration parameters Rx Tx to simplify the configuration in symmetrical links ie the majority If Rx Tx is ac
34. and Minimum Overhead modes a more configurable version of Closed Net Plus ESC where the overhead varies from the standard 16 15 6 796 In minimum overhead mode the user sets the required ESC Baud rate and the overhead is scaled to the minimum value to provide the service required For example 2048kbps with 9600 Baud ESC in overhead of 195 or 64kbps data with ESC rates up to 38 4kBaud With respect to the ESC Channels Full user allocation of the overhead between ESC and Aux channels in IBS SMS modes providing user control over the relative rates of the async ESC channel and the sync Aux channel Turbo Product Code Forward Error Correction TPC FEC v v v v v Turbo codec for bandwidth and power efficiency Software can support up to 31 preset code rates initial rates includes rate V5 34 76 amp 0 789 34 Rate for compatibility with industry De Facto Turbo Ya 34 amp Rate allow switch to Turbo amp better margin quality of service than Viterbi in same space segment eg fixed capacity on long lease 0 789 rate provides optimised performance near 3 4 rate for newer circuits Monitor AGC Option v v v Monitor and display of Rx carrier level Rear panel PSK constellation monitor point An uncommitted 0 10V DC analogue output set from the front panel to output AGC Signal level for antenna pointing tracking Eb No user BER or any other parameter available internally Auto Uplink Power Control A
35. facility is usually used to provide extended customer evaluation 30 days of specific features All available features can be user enabled for evaluation Test features A user activated feature test enables every feature the modem hardware can provide for a period of 5 days Each modem provide 3 such user test periods after which the facility is no longer available unless reset by the entry of a valid feature code issued by Paradise Again features on test can be displayed see Features Test below The feature menu is as follows Features 1 In use 2 Standard 3 Temp 4 Hardware 5 Upgrades 6 Test Help Info Features P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 190 FEATURES IN USE The letters shown represent the features that are actually in use with the current configuration see following table for a description of what each letter means This is the minimum feature set you need to operate as currently configured An example screen follows Features in use by current config L N P S WX 1READ Info Features In Use In the example above you can see by checking against the following table that the Tx amp Rx paths Drop Insert IBS framing INTELSAT Reed Solomon Viterbi FEC Variable data rate and the 70MHz IF are in use Letters W and X are for features not yet defined Pressing down arrow from this screen 1 shown only if relevant shows features which are in use with the curre
36. ie terrestrial TS16 contains the 16 frame Multiframe sequence See note 9 The modem only seeks Cyclic Redundancy Code CRC sync when the Rx baseband is set to use T the Insert mux in G 732 mode and when set by the user to process CRC s Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial PCM Bearer CRC Process If CRC sync is permanently lost check if a CRC is present on the PCM signal The PLL which generates the Rx output clock or backup Rx clock has failed to lock to the specified T TA TC RF reference Check the reference specified as source is the correct frequency If a station clock is specified as available the modem will use this to generate the backup Rx output clock even if Station not specified as the primary source on the Rx Clock Mode screens Check that the Station clock is still connected as it is a common mistake to change the Rx Clock Mode to something other than Station then disconnect the station clock assuming the modem will not use it whereas the modem will always use it to generate the backup clock in preference to the internal 1PPM clock if it is has been told a station clock is available Change Rx Clock Buff Station Clock Input P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 223 Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Other RX WARNINGS Bottom line of display Rx Warn Reconfiguring Rx path Rx Traffic warnings Deferred alarm relay only The modem is reconfi
37. lt lt lt lt Base Modem 70MHz IF interface IF frequencies in the range 50 90MHz provides 50 180MHz if feature T also U 100Hz IF synth steps 2 5KHz if not enabled Misc ASIC functions Terrestrial CRC support amp BER monitoring N Viterbi FEC to IESS 308 309 rate 3 4 amp in BPSK QPSK and OQPSK Viterbi FEC Sequential FEC M Sequential FEC to IESS 312 rate 1 2 34 amp in BPSK QPSK OQPSK Reed Solomon outer FEC to IESS 308 310 with n k t 126 112 7 switches to 225 205 10 or 219 201 9 with 4 8 deep interleaving as required for IDR amp TCMIIDR if options are available INTELSAT Reed Solomon Wideband IF 4 140MHz IF interface IF frequencies in the range 100 180 MHz provides 50 180MHz if feature S also available If data rate is Variable by feature P then data rate range is 4 8kbps to 5 0Mbps if this feature enabled otherwise limited to rates between Low Rate and High Rate see bottom of table No effect if feature P disables variable rate High Data rates Variable rate ESC channel for Closed Net plus ESC operation backward alarms Aux IBS variable rate synchronous Aux channel IDR 32 64kbps in place of one both audio ADPCM ESC channels Async ESC High rate IBS SMS ESC with IBS SMS feature Async ESC access to IDR 8k sync ESC channel with IDR option IBS SMS E IBS SMS framing to IESS 309 with low rate INTELSAT ESC to IESS 403 Dro
38. male not both at the other end as follows X 21 DCE P Min 15 pin D female Signal RS422 Circuit 25 37 pin Electrical Req Description Name Number Levels Name A B A B A B DATA CIRCUIT TOWARDS MODEM TX v 2 9 Data In 103 3 Sig Valid In Clocking IMPORTANT The interface will not work as X 21 unless you set the clocking correctly The Rx Clock Menu is used to set the source of the single clock from the modem as either Satellite Internal or Station Clock Do not select Tx In as this does not exist in X 21 The Tx Clocking should simply be set to Rx as the Tx data is clocked by the same clock as the Rx data The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors Check the phase of the Data In with respect to the Clock Out line By selecting Change Terr Intfc Control Lines it is possible to configure the modem
39. serial port are in square brackets the following connections are required Modem pin 12 to PC pin 2 3 Modem pin 5 to PC pin 3 2 and Modem pin 13 to PC pin 7 5 See STANDARD LEAD below STANDARD LEAD A constellation monitor serial lead is available from Paradise Datacom part number M1479 This lead provides the required connections to a 25 pin D type for a PC connection for printing capturing a log or updating the modems embedded software and three BNC s for connecting to a scope for the constellation monitor P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 184 ESC AUX amp BACKWARD ALARMS CONNECTOR This connector is fitted as part of the IDR option standard on P300 IDR and above Note that when this option is fitted the ESC and Aux ports on this connector replace the shared ESC Aux port on the Async ESC connector Connector type 50 pin D female ESC Port Pin sync EP Rs485 RS422 485 RS422 RS 232 usage usage Tx ESC Clock out A TxESC Clock out TxESC Clock out Clock out Tx ESC Clock out B Tx ESC Data in A Tx ESC Data in Tx ESC Data in B Rx ESC Clock out A Rx ESC Clock out Rx ESC Clock out B Rx ESC Data out A Rx ESC Data out Rx ESC Data out B Tx ESC Octet out A Tx ESC Octet out Tx ESC Octet out B n c Rx ESC Octet out A Rx ESC Octet out Pot Rx ESC Octet out B ue j v Ground Duct ETT v indicates lines are optional lt
40. so if the station reference is in use check the it is present and has clean enough phase noise for its intended use Unit Fault Tx carrier generation The power detector on the generated Tx carrier indicates a carrier generation failure The unit has CM TF failure Tx carrier muted muted the Tx IF output to prevent transmitting an incorrect signal See note 8 TT Unit Fault Rx PLL internal The internal backup reference to the Rx PLL has itself failed This is only actually used when the TA TC backup reference has failed external reference sources have failed however it s failure is very significant as the same signal is used in many places within the modem See note 8 Unit Fault Rx PLL Clock The internal backup clock generated by the Rx PLL has itself failed This is only actually used when TA TC RF generation failure lt source gt int the external primary clocks sources have failed however it s failure is very significant as it should never fail as it is internally generated See note 8 Modem BUC Fault FSK Comms with BUC The Modem is configured to operate with a Paradise BUC and FSK communications between the U TF failed searching BUC address xx modem and BUC have failed The modem will sequentially search the available range of BUC addresses in case a replacement BUC set for a different address has been installed BUC Fault Outside operating temperature The Modem is configured to operate with a Paradise BUC When t
41. the FEC will not lock correctly This information is used to step the Demod directly onto the true carrier lock this all happens in the background without the operator being aware of the process If the Demod is operated without FEC ie uncoded then frame alignment is used to determine if the lock is a false one and to push the Demod into acquiring the correct lock HOWEVER if the Demod is operated without FEC AND without framing it cannot distinguish a between a true lock and false lock False locks occur either side of the carrier at offsets of 12 4 amp vsth the symbol rate for BPSK QPSK and 8PSK respectively In such a case the Normal sweep width is automatically narrowed to within these limits to make the sweeping Demod avoid any false locks assuming the Rx carrier is exactly on frequency When operating in this unusual situation without FEC AND without Framing if the Rx carrier is not exactly on frequency then it is possible for the Demod to lock onto a false lock and not be able to detect it as false as there is no FEC or framing In this situation you can either P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 94 6 7 15 6 7 16 6 7 17 1 Use Custom Sweep to narrow the sweep range to avoid the false lock but be careful not to narrow it too much so it avoids the true carrier lock as well DO NOT increase the sweep range as this will guarantee to bring false locks within the Demod
42. x Tx Clock Mode Internal TO DISPLAY STATUS 3 2 1 Tx clock in 2 Internal 3 Rx clock z 7 Current value displayed in square brackets gt 1 Status 2 Change 3 Monitor Press 1 2or3asre 3 x ae quired YES to leave unchanged Main Menu 4 Info 5 Log 6 Test 7 Setup 8 Action NO PREV to go back one menu or MAIN for main menu gt Tx path OK for 3 7days 1 1 Status Rx path OK for 2 1days BER lt 1E 12 1 When the configuration is complete select STATUS from the main menu check the LED status indicators and read the message on the LCD The messages are carefully worded to convey as much information as possible about any faults If you have configured the unit but it will not operate as expected try SETUP CHECK this takes approximately 10 seconds to run and checks the configuration for unusual settings eg IBS with 7 8 rate FEC If anything is found a warning is displayed and can be masked by pressing YES These are only warnings and after you mask each displayed warning you may continue to operate in that mode if required Use the INFO VIEW CONFIG TX RX COMMON screens to display the summarised configuration Then if need be read the rest of this handbook If that fails when you are sure you have the unit configured correctly and you have checked the status on the LCD call us for technical support We will do our best to remotely diagnose the problem MENU STRUCTURE DIAGRAMS The full modem menu structure
43. 1 IBS Off 2 RS N A 3 V 35 On 4 Turbo N A Change Tx Rx Mod Demod Scrambler Custom Menu Pressing 1 2 3 or 4 toggles each available scrambler between On and Off Scramblers which are not available are shown as N A Not Available as they are out of circuit eg Reed Solomon scrambler when RS is Off This screen specifically allows you to enable more than one scrambler in order that you might match the mis configuration of other equipment which allows the operator to accidentally switch multiple scramblers on When the V 35 style scrambler is enabled a subsequent menu is displayed V 35 Style Scrambler 1 CCITT 2 INTELSAT V 35 Normal 3 FDC 4 Linkabit Change Tx Rx Mod Demod Scrambler Custom V 35 Menu This screen then allows selection between CCITT V 35 INTELSAT V 35 FDC Fairchild and Linkabit types These are all different interpretations of the poorly defined V 35 scrambler specified by the CCITT Unless you are trying to inter operate with another manufacturers equipment known to have an incorrect scrambler select INTELSAT mode as this is the most common Refer also to section 8 9 on page 152 which describes in more detail the different scramblers and interworking between manufacturers The operator is warned of unusual scrambler settings when SETUP CHECK is requested P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 70 6 6 14 6 6 15 Change Tx Modulator CARRIER Menu Carrier
44. 64kbps carrier and proportionally higher ESC rates with higher data rate carriers addition to the INTELSAT low rate oversampled async ESC Channel on the shared ESC Aux port The P300 when fitted with the IDR option standard on P300 IDR and above also provides a clock so the port may be used as a synchronous Aux channel In addition the overhead usage can be varied from the one bit per frame TS32 bit 1 defined by INTELSAT up to 21 bits per frame providing a synchronous Aux channel at up to 4 3 of the main data rate This may be used for example with external or internal BER testers to provide a continuous measurement of the live BER IBS SMS Definition Frame Format IBS framing is a derivative of the framing used on 2048kbps PCM bearers within Europe specified in ITU G 732 G 732 specifies a frame of 32 timeslots each timeslot is 8 bits of data and the timeslots are labelled TSO TS31 TSO and TS16 are reserved for special functions leaving the remaining 30 timeslots available for data ie 30 data timeslots with 2 overhead timeslots a ratio of 32 30 or an increase of 1 15th G 732 uses an awkward definition of having even amp odd numbered frames with TSO having different functions in even amp odd frames Thankfully the IBS specification parted from the G 732 definition at this point and instead of having even amp odd frames of 32 timeslots it defined one longer frame equivalent to an even then an odd G 732 frame An IBS fra
45. 9 with 4 8 deep interleaving as required for IDR amp TCM IDR Wideband IF Wideband 50MHz 180 MHz IF instead of 50MHz 90MHz High Data Rates Data rates 512kbps 5Mbps in addition to Base Modem rates Async ESC Variable rate ESC channel for Closed Net plus ESC operation High rate IBS SMS ESC with IBS SMS feature Async access to IDR 8k sync ESC channel with IDR option Bessus IBS SMS framing to IESS 309 Drop Insert Normal T1 E1 linear order Drop Insert IDR v v IDR operation to IESS 308 P1348 Emulation amp Aux data in place of one both IDR audio ESC eer Tester Internal Bit Error Rate Tester BERT overhead modes internal Bit Error Rate Tester BERT overhead modes only lera 8PSK with 25 rate Trellis Code Modulation to IESS 310 Extended D I Independent timeslot re ordering on Tx amp Rx Signalling CAS for E1 amp RBS for T1 Rx Partial Insert for multi destinational working Timeslot ID maintenance for N21 to 31 with IBS SMS or Closed Net plus ESC operation Custom Features v Arbitrary n amp K for Reed Solomon with RS feature Custom amp Min O H modes with IBS SMS or IDR options Custom allocation of IBS o h between ESC Aux channels Monitor AGC Demod Rx carrier signal level monitor 0 10V Analog output of carrier signal level Eb No or Rx offset frequency in addition to normal AGC output Constellation monitor port AUPC Automatic Uplink Power Control requires Async ESC feature
46. AMI options for T1 and E1 are both different means to achieve the same objective which is to limit the number of contiguous zeros which may be transmitted on the G 703 line This is necessary with G 703 as with AMI a mark logic one is sent as a pulse on the line and a space logic zero is set as the absence of a pulse on the line If there are too many contiguous spaces the G 703 receiver fails to recover the clock properly as there are no incoming pulses for a while and it causes data errors HDB3 and B8ZS are both methods of ensuring that no more than three or eight zeroes respectively occur on a G 703 line by substituting strings of more than this number of zeroes with another code in turn this code is detected at the end of the G 703 line and replaced with the correct number of zeroes again If the line code is set incorrectly you will almost continuously see Tx Warn Tx line code violations detected which indicates the modem is receiving line code violations and most probably set for AMI but receiving a B8ZS HDB3 coded signal Intermittent occurrences of the warning however are more likely to be caused by line noise corrupting the signal Note that if the modem is incorrectly set for BBZS HDB3 and the other equipment expects AMI then there will be no warning on the modem Finally and only for T1 G 703 cards the following screen is shown Set T1 line length ft 12 133 2 lt 266 3 lt 399 4 lt 533 5 lt 655 Ch
47. Auto Uplink Power Control requires Async ESC feature also to function Low_Rate 4 8k 4 8k See features and R above High Rate 512k 512k See features Q and R above pee b Demod Rx carrier signal level monitor 0 10V Analog output of carrier signal level Eb No or Rx offset frequency in addition to normal AGC output Constellation monitor port 2048kbps G 703 2048kbps G 703 interface in addition to RS422 V 35 RS232 interface software selectable Turbo Codec CORR EET i moggii Spare Spare AUPC B L in the Letter column indicates these features require additional hardware to be fitted eg small PCB or Chip All Other features may be added simply by entering a Feature Code P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 193 APPENDIX C3 FEATURES ON DEMO EXPIRE SOON IF YOU HAVE BEEN REFERRED TO THIS SECTION BY A MESSAGE ON THE EQUIPMENT DISPLAY THEN THIS IS VERY IMPORTANT The modem is warning you that at least one of the features the modem is using in order to operate as configured is due to expire soon This means that after expiry it will cease to function as configured and one or several of the features required for how it is currently configured will no longer be available This Temporary Features mode is usually used to allow customers to evaluate features eg Drop Insert Reed Solomon for a finit
48. Carrier amp Modulation summary AUPC Mode amp Target Eb No Carrier loss action amp Limits AUPC Update rate amp Prop of ESC b w ESC channel summary lest channel summary ESC audio levels VIEW RX CONFIG Carrier Modulation amp Sweep summary Inner FEC Reed Solomon summary Service amp options summary Baseband Framed amp Symbol rates AUPC Remote reporting setting Descrambler summa Buffer size amp MF slip Partial Insert TS from satellite Baseband mode Data rate Clocking lus Timeslots ESC channel summary lege channel summary ESC audio levels VIEW COMMON CONFIG Def d Alm Thesholds BER Eb No Buff slip Actions Buff Auto Centre BER gt 1E 3 AIS Terr CRC Process E Bits Frame acq Terr BER sources Tx Drop Insert bearer Sat BER source MF Period Backward Alarm patching Custom BA Map Tx amp Rx Carrier ID Station Channel Spare Buffer slip MF Thin route spoof X 50 AIS IBS 2M G 732 Spare bits AGC o p scale Relay mode Alarm mode Default status display Upgrades note display VIEW REM M amp C CONFIG Protocol Interface Baud Rate Address Page 43 6 2 3 Full Menu Structure Sheet 3 7 Main Log Test Setu SEE SHEET 1 SEE SHEET 2 p Action Help LOG VIEW Interactive log scroll view TRAFFIG View Print Clear Autolog UM LOG PRINT All entries m f ins entries ance AUTOLOG PARAMETERS Buffer fill state Demod Eb N
49. DC amp References SHF Frequencies Rx LNB DC Supply ae 10MHz Ref mE Set Downconverter Freq shift to display edit Rx Freq at Antenna NO Interactive dialogue to tune reference up down P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Modem BUC control Mode Independent Terminal Closed Loop be supply to L Band Tx port 48V AMHz Reference to L Band port On Set Tx BUC Low Current Alarm Trip Set Tx BUC High Current Alarm Trip Interactive entry of Upconverter frequency shift System Gain from modem to Tx output Interactive entry 99 9 to 99 9 dB Tx Output with System Gain Tx Power EIRP Tx units including System Gain dBm dBW BUG Tx Output status now On Off On Interactive entry of BUC attenuator value DE supply to Rx L Band port 15V 24V OMe Reference to L Band Rx port On Interactive entry of Downconverter frequency shift Page 48 6 3 Status SCREEN DISPLAY When Status is selected the LCD switches to a display of the current modem status This is a series of screens which are accessible from each other with the Up and Down keys The available status screens are summarised in the following diagram Rx path OK for 2 1days BER lt 1E 12 4 n P300 Series TEST C Satellite Modem STANDBY ranavise OSS DATACOM Tx path OK for 3 7days 1 Status Display no faults Status Display T
50. Differential Encoder and Decoder 10 Extended 1 for 1 for Antenna Diversity Initially On Ships Software gt V2 05 The normal 1 for 1 redundancy system will cope well with each modem in the 1 for 1 pair being connected to a different antenna eg at opposite ends of a ship on stabilised platforms The modems will automatically switch traffic to whichever one remains operational Should one of the antennas loose its line of sight to the satellite it will cause the on line modem receive to fail and the modems 1 for 1 partner to come on line conveniently also switching the Tx to the other antenna However one specific customer wished to integrate a block signal from the Antenna Control Unit ACU into the 1 for 1 system to guarantee the Tx on either antenna would be muted when the corresponding ACU indicated block ie when the antenna movement limits set on the ACU indicated the antenna was starting to point at the ship itself or more importantly the crew The solution is to link the block signal from the antenna directly to the modems external Tx Inhibit signal on pin 7 of the alarms connector grounded when blocked also connect a ground on pin 15 AND to set Fault Mode to 10 With the connection made but without the Fault Mode set to 10 the Tx to either antenna will be muted when the corresponding ACU block signal is active It will not however immediately switch the traffic over to the other modem in the 1 for 1 pair ie
51. Eb No Scaling is as for option 1 Local Rx Eb No AUPC Delta Power Software versions gt 2 12 Valid only when the AUPC feature is active this provides an output of the local power adjustments in made in order to maintain the distant Eb No Scaling is OV 25dB 10V 25dB with 0 1dB resolution Practically it limits to between the upper and lower AUPC delta limits set by the operator ie although scaled to 25dB it may practically vary only to 3 1dB if those are the upper lower AUPC delta limits set Undefined at present P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 206 APPENDIX F FRAMING AND DROP INSERT OVERVIEW IBS SMS FRAMING IBS SMS Service Features The INTELSAT definition of IBS framing IESS 309 is intentionally very similar to Eutelsats SMS framing EESS 501 SMS QPSK FDMA System Specification as they are both designed to allow common equipment to provide for both services From here on we will refer to IBS framing but the text applies equally to SMS framing Standard Features specified in IBS SMS definitions The addition of standard IBS framing increases the data rate by exactly 1 15th approx 6 7 IBS framing is added to provide the following extra features compared to closed network links A Synchronous Scrambler which replaces the self synchronising V 35 scrambler used in most closed network links The closed network V 35 scrambler outputs 3 errors for every error received and
52. IDR and Closed Net Plus ESC carriers ESC from 300Baud ie overheads down to lt 1 Target Eb No Tolerance window Max amp Min delta powers Slew rate limit comms loss action freeze max or nominal power Automatic logging of distant Eb No and local AUPC delta power at user controlled intervals in traffic log Automatically interleaves AUPC messages with distant end remote M amp C if active on ESC channel Independent Max amp Min delta powers ie facility to reduce power amp still maintain quality of service with good atmospherics allows power balancing on transponders with traffic to varied destinations Interface Loop local amp remote Drop Insert Loop local Framer Loop local FEC Loop local RS Loop local Internal IF Loop local Rx IF automatically tuned to match Tx Deframer Framer Loop remote Transmit CW pure carrier Transmit alternate 1 0 pattern for carrier suppression test Disable Reed Solomon decoder corrections 3 independent changeover contacts Prompt Unit fault Prompt Traffic fault Tx or Rx Deferred Alarm backward alarm BER or Eb No below user set threshold P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 31 Controller Embedded Software Configuration Memories User Interface Remote M amp C Redundancy Features BUC LNB Support P310 Reference to BUC LNB DC Supplies FSK Communications Alarms Mechanical Weight Intel 8032 mic
53. If necessary eg if the data itself contains long strings one ones you can disable the detection of AIS and resulting actions using Change User Opt Operation Actions AIS Check if this line is connected the cable and supported by the connected device If the line is floating no cable not supported then it might float to the off state and intermittently raise this alarm The modem generates a temporary backup bearer for the Insert mux when set to Loopthrough only if there is no bearer available Should the operator assume the modem is set to Generate not Loopthrough and feed the Rx bearer output back to the Tx bearer input including via other equipment then it will oscillate Temporarily generating a backup bearer when there is no bearer incoming then as this temporary bearer is detected at the Tx input when fed back to the modem it will switch off this temporary bearer and return to Loopthrough mode whereupon as there is now no source for the bearer it s a compete loop it will fail again and switch back temporarily to generating a backup bearer If you see the modem displaying a bearer status switching between Rx Fault Ins mux bearer frame sync lost Rx Fault Insert bearer AIS generating and or Rx Fault No insert bearer generating then check that the bearer is not set to Loopthrough AND at the same time looped back to the modem Tx input even if via other equipment If the user control Thin Route Spoof C
54. Insert dialogue when in Closed Net Plus ESC IBS or CUSTOM IBS modes P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 61 6 6 6 If the Modem is in CUSTOM IDR mode low rate format then it is possible to maintain the Timeslot ID even with an IDR overhead structure Refer to the section Timeslot identity maintenance in Appendix F on page 208 if a refresh is required Note that this is only offered under Custom IDR to simplify normal IDR menu operation but Custom IDR can be selected with all the possible custom features set to Normal to allow normal IDR operation but with timeslot ID maintenance Note that for low rate IDR carriers lt 1544kbps INTELSAT specify the IBS overhead structure but the Modem can operate the IDR 96kbps overhead and use Drop Insert even down to 64kbps If the Modem is in CUSTOM IDR mode low rate format then the following prompt is displayed TS identity over satellite 1 Maintain 2 Don t care Normal Change Tx Rx Baseband Drop Insert IDR Maint Menu MAINTAIN The dropped inserted timeslots will be aligned in the satellite IDR frame in order to maintain the timeslot identity DONT The dropped inserted data will be arbitrarily placed in the satellite IDR frame and the identity of the timeslots will not be maintained as with normal IDR Change Tx Rx Baseband OTHER Menu If the IDR option is fitted standard on P300 IDR and above then the modem can generate a 64kbps carrie
55. Menu NORMAL The data formatting within the IDR frame is ignored and fed out as a 2048kbps stream as per normal IDR operation RE ORDER RX This option only functions if the corresponding Tx path is set for ALIGN FOR RX In this case the Modem relies on the incoming G 732 frame being aligned within the satellite IDR frame in order to locate and re order the G 732 timeslots This selection leads onto a screen identical to that for IBS G 732 re ordering as described in the previous section for IBS G 732 operation on page 138 which allows the timeslots to be arbitrarily re ordered prior feeding to the terrestrial output P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 139 8 1 APPLICATION NOTES DOPPLER amp PLESIOCHRONOUS BUFFERING There are two terms commonly used when referring to the receive buffering namely Doppler and Plesiochronous Doppler Plesiochronous Receive Doppler buffering is required because the incoming data from the satellite is subject to Doppler shift which occurs in an approximately 24 hour cycle The Doppler shift is due to the satellite movement relative to the earth and is directly proportional to its station keeping accuracy Towards the end of a satellites life when its station keeping is degraded to save fuel the Doppler shift on incoming signals increases and buffers may have to be increased in size The receive buffer acts as a elastic store or FIFO First In First Out memory gra
56. NOR RUD Ras ee abe 11 2 4 HEEATORESHIGEEIGEL E vata eR e na ine 12 DESCRIPTION 5 55 98 he ede EL he Bee hs qe etu etr eie 16 Bul OPERATION s ds Re o AR EUR OS Sine ACD UL Sine TUR EORR UR Sova Sire ER ORA Ash 16 3 2 EAUET PHIEOSOPBHBY 5 e ree s Pate rom Poe Ee e tae e eod ae 16 3 8 ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION 16 3 4 ERONT PANEL FEATURES ere iuc ates eis alios al CR dh 17 3 5 REAR PANEL DESGRIPTION Ine e o ERROR OR MOTOR MER mn aga nied 18 3 6 BLOCK DIAGRAM ne e te Rte i hte RR pe ron JOEY Rn ie E Rn e o Y Rn pe RUE 21 SUMMARY OF SPECIFICATIONS 23 INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION 39 Balt UNPACKING ooi ettet e a Gar cet ah tao e agre 39 5 2 VISUAL INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT teen eens 39 5 3 INTERFACE OPTIONS S ahah e itte Marte eae d te eid 39 5 4 IE INTEREAGE ont bremen me b eee d nk od eoa dee b one o ae 39 5 52 POWER UP sce co eed ien aset V eae d S e e gen e e cp 39 MENU SYSTEM e e o RO ROREM n deg co ata ed x o Sa dug i an 40 INTRODUCTION 233 5 13 5 e dire doh e dial CR ETE AER CR RENTUR 40 gt gt gt THE 1 MINUTE GUIDE TO FRONT PANEL OPERATION 4 4 4 40 6 2 MENU STRUCTURE DIAGRAMS 41
57. Off 2 INTELSAT low rate channel 3 Sync Channel Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Define IBS Aux Menu OFF INTELSAT SYNC CHANNEL The Aux port is disabled The Aux port provides the low rate ESC definition in IESS309 which then refers back to IESS403 In this mode only TS32 bit 1 of the overhead is allocated to the Aux port which provides an oversampled async interface at a maximum Baud rate of approx 1 2000th the main data rate Note that even in this mode a clock is available and the port may be used synchronously at 1 480th the data rate if required This option is only available if the DR option is fitted standard on P300 IDR and above as it requires the Clock Data Octet Aux port on the IDR option to provide the synchronous Aux interface the single Data line used for the oversampled INTELSAT ESC on the Async ESC connector cannot provide a synchronous interface If selected the Aux port operates synchronously and varying amounts of the IBS overhead may be allocated to the sync Aux channel The sync channel may utilise at up to a total of 21 32nds of the overhead which with Standard IBS SMS this allows the Aux port to operate up to 4 375 of the main data port rate The selection of the overhead available to the Aux channel is made following the next menu which specifies the ESC port allowing the overhead to be allocated between the Aux port and ESC ports This menu is followed by ESC Port 1 Off 2
58. P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 65 6 6 11 OFFSET QPSK OQPSK PRIMER When using Offset QPSK OQPSK modulation the in phase and quadrature components of each symbol do not change together as with QPSK but instead one component is delayed by half a symbol compared to the other Looking at a constellation vector diagram this effectively limits the instantaneous change of phase to either 90 degrees excluding the 180 degree phase change which takes the vector transition through the zero amplitude point equating to an instantaneous null in the RF envelope By preventing the carrier phase change moving through the null power point large amplitude variations of the output carrier are avoided Consequently on links which exhibit some non linearity and therefore probably some AM to PM conversion there is reduced amplitude modulation AM to get converted to Phase Modulation PM which would otherwise degrade the distant Eb No as a phase noise effect Change Tx Rx Modulator FEC Menu Select FEC Type 1 None 2 Viterbi 3 Sequential 4 TCM Rate 2 3 5 Turbo Change Tx Rx Mod Demod FEC Type Menu The operator is first prompted to select the Forward Error Correction FEC type and the choices are between NONE uncoded VITERBI if Viterbi FEC option fitted SEQUENTIAL if Sequential FEC option fitted TCM Trellis Code Modulation if the 8PSK TCM feature is available Rate 2 3 only Turbo Turbo P
59. Page 24 Harmonics and Spurious Better than 55dBc 4 kHz Transmit On Off Ratio 55dB minimum External Transmit Inhibit By external contact closure or by TTL signal applied to rear panel connector Hardware function overrides processor control Demodulator Specifications IF Input Range P300 45dBm nominal 15dB desired carrier P310 20 to 70dBm desired carrier Maximum Composite Signal P300 30dB above level of desired input up to a maximum of 0dBm P310 35dB above level of desired input to a maximum of 10dBm Frequency Acquisition Selectable from 1 kHz to 32 kHz Range Acquisition Threshold 5dB Eb No Acquisition Time rate 1 FEC 9 6 kbps 3 seconds at 6dB Eb No 64 kbps lt 2 seconds at Eb No 2048 kbps lt 500 ms at Eb No Clock Tracking Range 100 ppm min Receive Filtering BER Performance P300H 6th order Butterworth group delay equalised INTELSAT IESS compliant In all cases met in the presence of two adjacent carriers each 10dB higher than the desired carrier with V 35 scrambling These figures meet or exceed the relevant IESS performance specifications Rate 1 Rate 34 Rate Rate 25 Viterbi 1x10 4 7dB 6 1dB 7 1dB all rates 1x10 7 2dB 8 8dB 9 5dB Sequential 1x10 4 3dB 5 4dB 6 4dB 64kbps 1x10 6 4dB 7 3dB 8 6dB Sequential 1x10 5 6dB 6 1dB 6 9dB 2048kbps 1x10 7 5dB 8 1dB 8 4dB 1x10 3 7dB 4 5dB 8 3dB 8PSK TCM 1 10
60. RS422 V 35 and RS232 Normally for RS232 operation the 530 connector would be used which is standard 25 pin RS232 compatible and for RS422 the 37 pin RS449 connector The old style 34 pin Winchester connector favoured for V 35 interfaces has poor EMC performance and so could not be incorporated whilst maintaining CE compliance If this style of connector is required then an external adaptor cable must be used If the G 703 option is fitted then in addition to RS422 V 35 RS232 G 703 is also available as a software selectable interface standard T1 1544kbps G 703 is a balanced 1000 signal and is provided on both D type connectors when G 703 is selected from the front panel When the E1 2048kbps G 703 option is fitted then in addition to providing support for the balanced 1200 signal on both D type connectors an additional pair of BNC connectors are provided to accept the unbalanced 750 interface standard THE SELECTION BETWEEN 750 and 1200 IS MADE BY A SWITCH ON THE E1 G 703 OPTION not by software As with the 25 37 pin connectors do not connect signals to both the BNC and D type connectors simultaneously In addition a switch on both the T1 and E1 G 703 options controls what happens to the G 703 port when power is removed Either the G 703 ports can be set to go high impedance used in 1 1 redundancy operation or it can be configured to loop the G 703 input back to the output typically used when Drop Insert is in operation and t
61. Rates The Data Rate is normally the frequency of the clock used on the terrestrial port however if Drop Insert is active the Data Rate is 64kbps times the number of timeslots dropped Inserted As the P300 Series Modem use PSK Phase Shift Keying the Symbol Rate is the rate of phase changes on the signal Each phase change represents a new symbol to the demodulator and depending on the modulation scheme that symbol may convey one BPSK two QPSK or three 8PSK bits of information The diagram below shows how the symbol rate is built up from the data rate Terrestrial Data Rate Data Rate Data Rate Baseband signal IF Signal Modulated Data Rate 4 Framing Framing RS amino RS at Symbol Rate at Symbol Rate REED Clock FRAMING SOLOMON FORWARD if any OUTER FEC CORRRECTION MODULATOR IF STAGES aa if any Data Rate IBS SMS x 18 Specified as N K 1 2 Rate x2 BPSK 1 Occupied Bandwidth Increase 15 e g 219 201 1 2 x Symbol Rate IDR 96kbps 2 3 Rate x QPSK 2 Intelsat Recommended Carrier xN 3 4 Rate x4 8PSK 3 Spacing 1 4 x Symbol Rate K 7 8 Rate x Uncoded x1 Example IBS SMS framing 126 112 RS Coding 1 2 Rate FEC QPSK Occupied b w 92 16KHz 64 kbps 68 266kbps 76 8kbps 153 6kbps 76 8kSym s Carrier Spacing 107 52KHz You will see that with 2 rate FEC and QPSK common combination the Symbol Rate is the same as the Data Rate assuming no Framing or Ree
62. SMS low rate INTELSAT oversampled ESC facility which is configured as the Aux data channel on the modem When the IDR option IS fitted separate ports for the ESC and Aux channels on the IDR card are activated and ESC Aux access on this async port is disabled Finally this connector also provides the port for an RS422 compatible Station Clock see the Station Clock paragraph on the previous page Tx IF output This connector is a BNC female and can be used as either a 500 or 750 output The output power level can be varied from OdBm to 25dBm on 0 1dB steps from the front panel P310 5dBm to 30dBm ESC amp Aux connector This connector is fitted as part of the IDR option Standard on P300 IDR amp P300 TCM it provides access to Four backward alarm form outputs and the 4 backward alarm inputs together with a Rx summary alarm signal for direct connection to the backward alarm inputs Note that these can be used both in IDR modes and if the IBS and Custom Features features are available a custom IBS mode which allows four backward alarms for low rate IBS multidestinational carriers Two Audio ESC ports 4 wire 600Q 7 to 16dBm In addition to normal IDR ESC operation these ports may also be used in IBS modes to generate a 64kbps IBS carrier comprising just the two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels or a 128kbps IBS carrier comprising 64kbps data from the main data interface of the modem plus the two 32kbps ADPCM audio c
63. The data rate to the satellite main data overhead remains unchanged There is no Aux channel facility in Closed Net Plus ESC as this mode is specifically designed to minimise the satellite bandwidth used and hence all overhead is assigned to the ESC channel IBS SMS mode is only available if the IBS SMS feature is available standard on P300 IBS and above The ESC channel is the channel which is normally used to carry asynchronous data from earth station to earth station typically used for distant end M amp C When selected as the BER test channel Async ESC data is not passed and the channel is used synchronously for BER testing It is only possible to define an ESC channel in IBS SMS mode for the BER test to run through if the Async ESC feature is available standard on P300 IBS and above The ESC channel may be configured to provide rates up to 4 6 of the main data rate for BER testing The Aux channel may be configured to provide the mandatory INTELSAT oversampled low rate ESC yes ESC but on the Aux port of the modem When used by the BER Tester it is used synchronously and provides a test channel of 0 2 the main data channel rate If the IDR Option is fitted standard on P300 IDR and above which provide a synchronous external Aux port then the Aux channel may be set for sync channel and to use all P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 126 IDR Custom Framing the available overhead not alread
64. Tx 70 0000MHz 2048k Rx 70 0000MHz 2048k CARR Normal Eb No gt 15 0dB LOCAL Info Configuration Summary Screen This screen displays a summary of the configuration on the top line The lower line provides carrier unit and traffic messages such as Carr On Unit Fault or Traffic Warn and the operator has to press the Down key to display the Tx amp Rx Traffic Summary screen in order to determine what the fault is The fields can take the following values Carrier Status CARR Normal CARR DISABLED CARR Mute Brk CARR Mute 1 1 CARR Mute Ext CARR Mute RTS CARR Mute Flt CARR FAULT Demod status Not Locked Eb No xx xdB Pressing the down arrow leads to further information Unit Status in order of priority Unit Fault Cfg Error Unit Warn Cfg Warn Cfg Info Traf Fault Traf Warn Remote Local Normal Tx status Carrier state set to Off formerly CARR Mute Off Carrier set to Power Break Mute requires operator to confirm if carrier can be retransmitted as power outage has occurred Muted by 1 for 1 logic Muted by external signal on alarms connector Carrier set to RTS controlled and interface RTS line is off Muted due to an internal fault eg synthesiser lock There is a fault in the carrier on off logic disconnect the carrier from the satellite If the demodulator is unlocked When the demodulator is locked a valid Eb No is displayed There is a Unit Fault The Unit cannot perform as reque
65. V div with the trigger from the external trigger input See STANDARD LEAD on the following page DIFFERENTIAL STATION CLOCK This provides RS422 compatible station clock in addition to the unbalanced 750 station clock BNC connector See the menu dialogue in section 6 7 4 on page 89 For a full description of this port P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 183 ASYNC PORT FOR ESC OR AUX CHANNELS The modem has two fully independent data channels which may be carried over the satellite within any overhead that is added these are referred to as the ESC and Aux channels The shared interface on this connector allows the use of only one of these channels at a time and then only in an Async mode there is no clock signal on this port If both ESC and Aux channels are to be used together or either channel used in a synchronous mode then the IDR option must be fitted which provides separate ESC amp Aux ports both with clock data and octet lines When the IDR option is fitted the shared ESC Aux port on this connector IS DISABLED The screen dialogue to configure these channels is described in section 6 6 25 Change Tx Rx ESC AUX BA Menu on page 76 When configured for different services the ESC and Aux channels provide as follows In Closed Net Plus ESC mode the ESC channel provides the variable rate async ESC facility the Aux channel is not used In IBS SMS modes the ESC channel provides the High Rate Async E
66. Viterbi Extended Feature The extended Drop Insert provides significant extra features compared to the basic Drop Insert feature set Arbitrary amp independent timeslot re ordering for Drop amp Insert Full support for G 732 Channel Associated Signalling CAS over IBS SMS links T1 D4 amp T1 ESF Robbed Bit Signalling RBS maintenance over IBS SMS links Maintenance of timeslot ID for N 1 to 31 inclusive when using any framing normally only N 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 are maintained for IBS SMS and there is no ID maintenance for IDR Insertion of only partial received data for multi destinational working Custom Features Feature With respect to the Reed Solomon the Custom Features provides Codeword length n variable from 60 to 255 Error correct bytes t variable from 2 to 20 in steps of two Selectable 4 and 8 depth interleaving With respect to the Framing the Custom Features provides Custom IDR Modes including 16kbps ADPCM mode providing all normal IDR facilities in a 64kbps overhead or all normal IDR facilities plus a 32kbps Aux channel in the normal 96kbps overhead which allows an internal or external PRBS test to run in parallel with the traffic to monitor the service quality The overhead can also be reduced to provide reduced IDR facilities with 64kbps or 32kbps overheads Custom IBS SMS modes including facilities for multidestinational IBS carriers with 4 backward alarms
67. amp worst case Eb No and or user BER In The Rack upload of revised internal software 25dB Tx IF level control in 0 1dB steps Band limited IF input capable of operating with high composite power ie IF input not wide open and affected by out of band signals 1PPM internal frequency amp clock reference with external station clock input amp options for higher stability internal references CCITT amp INTELSAT V 35 scramblers for closed network operation with additional two modes for compatibility with FDC and Linkabit proprietary patterns Deferred alarm at user set service limits individual Eb No BER amp Buffer slip thresholds Frequency locked clock loops ie not phase locked immune to clock hits caused by equipment such as routers Comprehensive monitoring and status display with explicit fault descriptions of most significant fault for Tx amp Rx paths P500 1 FOR N Switch available allowing mixed interfaces within 1 N system Supported by Alphawave CAM multi product remote M amp C system which can provide centralised log gathering on a PC including logged circuit performance figures eg Eb No every 10 mins Software includes two User Variables to accommodate custom user requirements such as special alarm handling allowing special user requested features to be added whilst still keeping common software Clear display intuitive menus with Normal selections amp efficient user interface with full keyboard Tx or R
68. as far as possible be limited to the printable ASCII characters Whilst this is not specified for the Paradise FDC protocol Paradise Datacom have attempted to achieve this wherever possible For this reason only 6 bits of each character of the Body are utilised bits 0 to 5 Bit 6 is fixed at a one for both protocols and for the Paradise FDC protocol where the character has 8 bits 0 7 bit 7 is fixed at a zero Note that this applies on to Body characters there are no such constraints on the other characters in the message Electrical Interface Both protocols require a 4 wire plus ground interconnection between equipments Signals are at RS485 levels effectively a tri statable RS422 with Tx amp Rx data being transmitted as a series of async characters over a differential pair labelled A and B Lines referred to as Tx A and Tx B are outputs and Rx A and Rx B are inputs The Paradise convention as specified by RS422 is that the lines represent true data ie the inactive state is mark which is high and the A lines inverse data ie the inactive state is space which is low An async character then appears as RS 485 B Line iie le ee ee Paradise FDC idle d start bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 bit 7 stop idle SA bus i start bit 0 bit 1 bit 2 bit 3 bit 4 bit 5 bit 6 pay stop idle RS 485 A Line mark space mark mark The
69. be active and the operator needs access to the baseband menu in order to independently set the insert TS selection The Buffer Clocking menu is always shown The Demod menu provides access to the independent selection of IF Frequency and demod Sweep Width control Note If Rx Tx is enabled and the Tx Service is set to Off then only the Rx Tx selection will be the only one displayed P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 86 6 7 1 6 7 2 Change Rx SERVICE Menu See Change Tx Rx Service Menu on page 54 Change Rx BASEBAND Menu The Continuous amp Other menu options are identical to the Tx selections see Change Tx Rx Baseband Menu on page 57 The Insert Mux selection is the same as the Drop Mux selection except the prior to the same dialogue as on the Tx path two other questions are asked Bearer routing Loop Terror Generate amp Partial Insert All or Partial These are described as follows Bearer Routing The bearer to the Insert Mux can either be looped from the Drop Mux or generated internally The following prompt is displayed Insert bearer 1 Loop Terr 2 Generate internally Change Rx Baseband Insert Mux Bearer Route Menu In most situations Loop Terris selected and the receive data is inserted onto the same bearer from which the Tx data was dropped This however forces the receive data to be passed to the terrestrial using the terrestrial clock which is already
70. be allocated to ESC or Aux TS32 bits 5 and 6 allocated together and bits 7 and 8 allocated together both correspond to 2 32nds of the overhead These are normally spare see note 1 and can be allocated to ESC or Aux TSO bit 1 is 1 32nd of the overhead and are normally spare again see note 1 This bit can only be allocated to the ESC TS32 bit 1 is 1 32nd of the overhead and is the bit allocated by INTELSAT for the low rate oversampled ESC available on the Aux port if so configured Spare if the Aux port is not set to INTELSAT mode or Note 1 can be allocated to ESC or Aux TS32 bit 3 is 1 32nd of the overhead and is normally used for the backward alarm but is spare if Custom IBS mode is selected and the backward alarm facility has been disabled This bit can only be allocated to the ESC TS32 bit 4 is 1 32nd of the overhead and is normally used for the Satellite TS32 Multiframe but is spare if Custom IBS mode without a TS32 multiframe is selected This bit can only be allocated to the ESC P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 80 Note 1 Spare unless the unit is configured for 2048kbps IBS G 732 mode with spare bits of TSO set to transparent when these bits carry the spare bits To summarise In standard IBS modes up to 8 8 2 2 1 1 bits 22 32nd of the overhead may be allocated to the ESC port and up to 8 8 2 2 1 bits 21 32nds of the overhead may be allocated to the Aux port 21 of these bits
71. card described earlier For operation in Eurocom modes please continue reading Note For non Eurocom operation without a G 703 option fitted a small 2 x 4 header is required plugged into J4 exactly as per the P1440 in order for RS422 V 35 and RS232 modes to work Equipment is supplied with the header fitted but be aware of this if ever removing a G 703 option card P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 176 Eurocom 0 1 interface D operation The Eurocom D interface uses transformer coupled differential clock and data signals The data signal is AMI coded and the amplitude of both clock and data signals is 0 5V ie 1 0 V peak to peak The differential lines are of 1300 impedance and the centre tap of the line coupling transformers may either be grounded or left floating The Eurocom D interface will operate from 16kbps to gt 2048kbps although the Eurocom specification call for only 256 512 and 1024kbps In addition to the clock and data lines in and out four lines a fifth line is implemented over and above the Eurocom specification which carries the modems internal clock out when the Tx clock is set to internal Min Signal Description dire Senn ba tapa Req 9 2 Number wanstomer d transformer Clock Out LK 4 S v Data Out LK5 we i 14 n a Do Not Connect 12 20 EP v Signal Ground 2 7 13 15 22
72. case Eb No for the period are logged at the end of the period The average AND worst case estimated USER BER are logged at the end of the period The BER as measured by the internal BER Tester BERT This can be measured either in the main data channel or when running in parallel with the main data in either the ESC or the Aux channels The average AND 7 second worst case BER measured by the BERT are logged at the end of the period This is the BER measured at the terrestrial input This is only available if the terrestrial signal can be monitored for BER ie it s framed and or has a CRC The actual method of measuring it is determined by Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial Tx Drop BER As above This is only meaningful ie different to the Tx Drop BER above if the modem is used with separate Drop Insert bearers by the use of a twin G 703 terrestrial interface The method of BER measurement can be selected by Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial Rx Insert BER This logs the power variation delta power the AUPC has used to maintain the target Eb No See AUPC in section 8 11 1 on page 154 for further details This is useful in case the satellite operator requires you to determine the Tx power that was active at any time whilst AUPC was active This is the distant end Eb No available when AUPC is active again see AUPC in section 8 11 1 on page 154 for further details As with the local Eb No the average AND worst case Eb No f
73. clocking the bearer and hence is the normal plesiochronous mode For other clock modes such as where it is necessary to use the satellite clock or a station clock to drive the clock to the terrestrial equipment use Generate internally LOOP TERR The PCM bearer at the input to the Drop Mux is looped to the Insert Mux If this bearer should fail no clock or AIS the modem will switch temporarily to Generate Internally so that the Rx traffic is not lost as a result of a Tx fault When set for Loop Terrthe Rx Clocking menu asks for the selection of the clock source for the Backup bearer Satellite Internal or Station clock GENERATE The modem generates a suitable formatted PCM bearer internally with multiframes G 732 CAS and CRC s T1 ESF amp G 732 as it is set to utilise ie it will not generate a terrestrial TS16 CAS multiframe unless it is operating ina CAS mode and therefore expects one When so configured the Rx Clocking menu asks for the selection of the clock from which to source the Generated bearer Satellite Tx Clock In Internal or Station clock Partial Insert This option only available if the Extended feature if available standard on P300 TCM and is provided to simplify Multidestinational working It allows some of the incoming Rx data to be inserted onto the insert bearer and the information for other destinations to be discarded This screen is only displayed if Rx Tx is Off when Rx Tx is On ie a symmetrical li
74. compatible selection including enabling Intelsat compatible SPECTRUM INVERT multiple scramblers FDC compatible Normal Control of Linkabit compatible Invert spectrum Synchronous IBS scr Synchronous RS scr Self sync V 35 scr DEMOD SWEEP USER DEMOD SWEEP Normal Entry of sweep width 1 31kHz User specified AUPC Option AUPC emote reporting of Eb No via ESC for distant AUPC Off On ESC Aux Change Rx ESC Aux exactly as Change Tx ESC Aux see sheet 5 RX TX TRACKING Select most Rx parameters to Kack Tx for symmetrical links On P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 47 6 2 7 Full Menu Structure Sheet 7 7 Change BUC LNB BUC Attached None Other Paradise Std Ku Paradise Ext Ku Paradise Std C Paradise INSAT C Paradise PALAPA C pue TOMHZ Ret Current Monitor I ur BT Tx BUC BUC Type DC amp References SHF Frequency SHF Power Units BUC Control Set Upconverter Freq shift fo display edit Tx Freq at Antenna NO From sheet 1 MAIN CHANGE BUC LNB Modem System Gain TxPwr EIRP in dBm dBW Tx BUC Set System Gain CHANGE BUC LNB Set IxPwr or EIRP Rx LNB Set dBm or ABW xp Tune Ref BUC Control Display of power read from BUC BUC Output ON OFF BUC Attenuator EE LNB Attached None Other 3 635 4 2G 10 95 11 45G 10 95 11 7G 11 20 11 7G 11 70 12 2G 12 25 12 75G Rx LNB LNB Type
75. data although it has found TA TC Frame sync and TS32 Multiframe sync otherwise the Frame Multiframe sync messages above would display CAS Multiframe sync used to convey either 1 Channel Associated Signalling CAS in G 732 Drop Insert modes using CAS 2 To maintain the identity of a group of timeslots for the Odd values of N such as N 7 etc 3 To maintain Robbed Bit Signalling RBS in selected in T1 D4 or T1 ESC Drop Insert modes Be aware that most competing modems do not support the use of a CAS Multiframe to provide any of these three functions Check as follows for each use 1 The Tx modem is set to operate in CAS mode if CAS signalling is to be conveyed within the IBS SMS overhead one of the questions in the Change Tx Baseband Drop menu dialogue 2 If the Tx modem cannot use a CAS Multiframe to maintain the TS identity for the Odd values of N then to prevent this modem seeking a CAS multiframe for one of these Odd value of N in the Change Rx Baseband Insert menu dialogue when prompted TS identity over satellite 1 Maintain normal 2 Don t care select Don t Care 3 If the Tx modem cannot use a CAS Multiframe to maintain RBS over satellite in the Change Rx Baseband Insert menu dialogue when prompted T1 RBS over satellite 1 Normal or no RBS 2 Maintain RBS select Normal or no RBS The final customer data after demodulation error correction deframing and descrambli
76. default it is 2000ms approximately 4 times the normal IBS multiframe time of 512ms at 64kbps This will only be an issue where very low data rates 16kbps and low ESC rates are in use or Minimum overhead mode is active with No ESC requirement and the multiframe just provides timeslot ID maintenance and backward alarm facilities Only consider adjusting from default if you see long periods where the status displays T9532 Multiframe sync lost or CAS Multiframe sync lost after the demod has lost and re acquired the carrier Default 2000ms The earlier versions of the Eutelsat SMS specification defined 3 eight bit identities which may be transmitted once per satellite TS32 multiframe to identify the carrier and the earth station These were named Sfation ID Carrier ID amp Spare ID More recent issues just say reserved for uses such as This options allows these P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 104 BACK ALM MAP IF 50 750 three ID s to be set 0 255 for each and also displays the corresponding ID s from the incoming Rx carrier Default all 255 In Custom IBS Modes it is possible to operate an IBS style service and allow the use of four independent backward alarms as for IDR for use on multidestinational services This option allows the four alarms to be mapped in different ways onto the IBS TS32 multiframe in the hope that should INTELSAT adopt such a standard the P300 Modems could be set to be c
77. differential pair from Master to Slaves is typically driven all the time by the Master device ie never goes high impedance The return pair from Slaves to Master is driven by a Slave device when sending a message All devices hold their output drivers at a high impedance unless actually transmitting a message to allow other Slave devices on the bus access to the return pair It is possible to operate a link to a single device using an RS232 interface instead of RS485 However as RS232 cannot go high impedance only one Slave device can be on the bus otherwise there is permanent bus contention Note that RS232 systems a mark high is defined as negative voltage and a space P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 195 low is defined as a positive voltage This means that RS232 character will appear as the RS485 A line shown previously except it will transition from lt 3V to gt 3V as opposed to OV amp 5V Message Structure All messages are transmitted in a defined message format The formats are as follows Paradise FDC The same format is used for message from Master to Slaves and Slaves to Master Messages from Master to Slaves carry the address of the destination Slave device return messages from Slave to Master ALSO carry the address of the Slave ie the source of the message NOT the destination on the return as all returned message are for the Master device idle STX Char Coun
78. either None Other Std Ku Ext Ku Std C INSAT C or PALAPA C If the BUC is from Paradise Datacom and the modem is fitted with the FSK communication option then more information is available on this and subsequent screens On this screen Software Ver The version of software in the BUC Power Class The maximum power in Watts amp dBm Subsequent screens those marked only visible when the BUC is FSK capable include BUC frequency range amp shift LO The LNB DC voltage off 15 24V amp 10MHz ref on off supply settings P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 119 6 15 6 15 1 LOG MENU Traffic Log 43 entries 1 View 2 Print 3 Clear 4 Autolog Log Menu The Log menu allows the operator to view print or clear the internal 1000 event traffic log The Autolog option allows the operator to have certain parameters added to the traffic log at regular intervals The traffic log is a circular store of 1000 locations events not viewed or printed are lost after 1000 subsequent events The options are as follows VIEW This allows the log to be viewed on the LCD The Up Arrow and Down Arrow keys allow the operator to scroll through the list of logged events Each entry is logged with it s time and date PRINT This allows the log entries to be printed to the rear panel serial port on the Async ESC connector either just the unprinted entries or the whole log CLEAR The log is cleared
79. frequencies instead of the IF frequencies When the BUC Type has been set to a known Paradise BUC and the modem has the FSK communications option then this setting is done automatically and the menu option to manually set the frequency shift is not presented Set upconverter freq shift to display amp edit Tx freq at antenna Yes 1 Yes 2 No Change BUC LNB Tx BUC SHF Frequency Menu 1 If Yes is selected then the following screen is displayed Freq shift of upconverter 13050 MHz 0 65535MHz 2 2 YES Change BUC LNB Tx BUC SHF Frequency Menu 2 Once set all Tx IF frequencies displayed or edited include the frequency shift of the BUC or upconverter chain Change BUC LNB Tx BUC SHF POWER UNITS Menu This screen is available on both 7OMHz 140MHz P300 modems and P310 L Band modems and allows the modem to be set to display and edit the final SHF power instead of the IF carrier level Modem 13 7 Gain SHF EIRP in dBW 1 System Gain 2 TxPwr EIRP 3 dBm dBW Change BUC LNB Tx BUC SHF Power Units Menu It allows the user to set the system Gain or Loss after the modem so that the modem can then display and edit the Tx carrier level in terms of either the Tx Power or EIRP measured in dBm or dBW The system gain or loss can be set from 99 9dB to 99 9dB Options for TxPwr EIRP amp dBm dBW are only available once the System Gain has been set to other than zero When zero the default units are TxPwr indBm Thi
80. functionality separate ESC amp Aux channels with independent electrical interface selection a built in Bit Error Rate Tester BERT which can run continuously through the ESC or Aux channels logging results in the traffic log plus a Closed Net Plus ESC minimum overhead mode in which the overhead varies from 0 5926 to whatever is required to support virtually any async ESC channel requirements To provide as simple as possible software upgrade facility the embedded monitor amp control software can be changed without opening the product Unlike other equipment which holds the embedded M amp C software in EPROMSs requiring replacement EPROMs to be shipped changed amp returned the P300 Modem M amp C software is downloaded in to FLASH memory via a rear panel serial port from a PC A process which requires no tools and is completed in 30 minutes For operators requiring the latest features or upgrades the most recent release of the internal M amp C software is available on our Web site http www paradisedata com for free download P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 9 2 2 P300 SERIES FEATURES As this handbook covers the full feature set of the P300 Modem some of the text will not be applicable to modems equipped with only a subset of the possibly functionality In the text where it describes features which are optional it uses phrases like Requires Drop Insert feature standard on P300 IBS and a
81. has no effect on T1 G 703 cards if SW2 is correctly set in position 2 Finally for both T1 and E1 options SW1 selects what action to take if the power is removed Sw1 position 1 Normal the G 703 input is looped to the output by a relay if power is removed This is so any other traffic on the G 703 PCM bearer is not lost by a break in the bearer P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 171 Sw1 position 2 1 1 Operation the G 703 output goes high impedance if power is removed allowing the units 1 1 partner to carry the traffic The normal input impedance switches to whichever one is on line with the standby input at high impedance Installation note If installing the G 703 card the BNC labelled IN connects to J3 on the card and the BNC labelled OUT to J2 on the card P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 172 P1440 IN X 21 MODE The P300 Series along with its standard P1440 RS422 V 35 RS232 interface can provide both X 21 DCE and X 21 DTE operation For X 21 operation the card must be set to RS422 mode and the Tx amp Rx Clocking modes must be set correctly With the use of the appropriate adaptor lead to convert to the X 21 standard 15 pin D connector a full X 21 DCE or DTE interface is available X 21 DCE OPERATION This only has a clock from the modem to the terrestrial equipment Configure a cable with a 15 pin D female at one end X 21 DCE and either a 25 pin or 37 pin D
82. if AUPC is active where the local modem continuously reads the distant modems Eb No Rx Warn Turbo Decoder status This is a warning used in the engineeering debuging process it should not occur in the field If it does please consult the factory Actions Relays U Prompt Unit Fault relay Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR AE AS1 AS1 T Prompt Traffic Fault relay Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR AE AS1 AS1 D Deferred Alarm relay Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR none AS2 AS2 Actions To Terrestrial TA AIS all ones in selected TS if the Insert mux is active AIS over all data if not in Insert mode If Insert mode is active and the user control Thin Route Spoof Change User opt Operation Terr Sat Thin Route Spoof is set to On then AIS is forced over the whole PCM bearer not just the selected timeslots to spoof full bearer connectivity when passed over a Thin Route satellite circuit ie not the whole bearer data rate Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR AH1 amp AH3 AH1 AH1 Frame Backward Alarm in PCM Multiplex 9 732 TSO NFAS bit 3 Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR AH2 AH2 none AIS all ones forced in the G 732 CAS abcd signalling nibble Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR AH4 AH3 none Force a fixed value in the G 732 CAS abcd signalling nibble The fixed value is set by user control Change User Opt Operation Actions Back Alarm to be either No Action b 1 a b 1 a b c d 1 Equivalent to SMS
83. immediately it is much simpler to get the circuit working first determine the normal levels AND THEN activate the AUPC gt Configure the modems at both ends of the link and ensure the basic satellite link is operating correctly Set the Tx power to achieve the distant Eb No expected under clear sky conditions gt gt For IBS SMS and IDR carriers the ESC be switched on later within the overhead without changing the carrier power or bandwidth For Closed Net Plus ESC carriers the overhead is added as required for the ESC channel Adding an ESC channel later will change the bandwidth of the signal and may slightly affect the Eb No In this case configure the ESC at least to a nominal Baud rate If the ESC is not used for any other M amp C purposes then 300 Baud may be sufficient for AUPC alone Configure an ESC channel for 8 bits no parity Baud rate as described below gt gt For IBS SMS and IDR configure as higher rate ESC channel as the modem can provide This will give the fastest possible reporting rate For Closed Net Plus ESC our suggestion would be to include the optional Backward Alarm as this is a very useful feature and set the Baud rates as high as possible without either exceeding the allotted satellite bandwidth or using an overhead over 10 The ESC channel for the AUPC must have symmetrical Baud rates Set the ESC interface gt P300H If the ESC channel is to be used for AUPC only
84. immediately below instead Refer also to the description of the dialogue under Change Rx Buff Clk Rx Clock to determine which signal the PLL uses as a backup clock P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 224 Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Other Rx Warn No clk ref lt source gt now int The reference specified for the PLL which generates the Rx output clock or backup Rx clock has failed the modem has switched to using the internal 1 PPM reference to keep the clock available Check the clock source specified is present If a station clock is specified as available the modem will use this as the source to generate the backup Rx output clock even if Station not specified as the primary source on the Rx Clock Mode screens Check that the Station clock is still connected as itis a common mistake to change the Rx Clock Mode to something other than Station then disconnect the station clock assuming the modem will not use it whereas the modem will always use it in preference to the internal 1PPM clock if it is has been told a station clock is available Change Rx Clock Buff Station Clock Input Rx Warn Back alm received at ins mux This fault will only be displayed if the modem if fitted with an interface which provides four ports for separate input and output of separate Tx Drop and Rx Insert PCM bearers It indicates a Backward Alarm is detected at the Rx bearer Input This i
85. impedance so you can connect the two in parallel and also selects what happens when power is removed If the power is lost in Normal mode the G 703 input and output are joined so that if in Drop Insert operation the G 703 signal is looped through multiple equipments the other traffic is not affected by a break in the G 703 line If the power is lost in 1 1 mode the G 703 output goes high impedance if power is lost allowing its 1 1 partner to carry the traffic Unlike previous interfaces the standard P300 Series interface does not provide a pin on the connector which can make the interface go high impedance HANDSHAKE LINES Many interfaces provide optional control lines such as RTS CTS etc It is generally better to implement these between equipments if possible P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 167 P1440 IN RS422 MODE The P1440 is the standard interface supplied with the P300 Series Modem If RS422 is selected under Change Terr Intfc Electrical then the following interface description applies Min Si i oin RS422 Circuit 25 37 pin Electrical Req Description Name Number B B Levels aes z Sig Accpt d Out CS 106 5 13 9 27 RS422 Int Tx Clock Out 15 12 23 5422 oe ee DE EE gt omon Js 0 aoe oo ee
86. inner FEC is active ie not operating uncoded To RS This is the measured error rate into the Reed Solomon decoder from the FEC unless operating uncoded The difference between this and the To FEC figure shows the improvement due to the Inner FEC BER on FAW An estimate of the USER BER based on the count of errors on the Frame Alignment Words FAW received by the deframer over a 1 minute sliding window Only available if operating in a framed mode This is equivalent to the final user BER The difference between this and the To RS figure shows the improvement due to the outer RS FEC Final BER This is the final BER figure the modem is using the source is displayed in brackets after the BER in this case RS It is based on this figure that the deferred alarm is raised if it exceeds the user BER threshold 6 13 2 Monitor TERRESTRIAL BER Menu This screen is only available if the signal on the terrestrial ports is framed ie T1 E1 PCM bearer which allows the modem to determine the BER on those ports Terr 1 BER at Drop Mux 1 6E 8 FAW 2 BER at Insert Mux 1 5E 8 CRC Monitor Terrestrial BER Menu It displays the terrestrial BER at the input to the Drop and Insert multiplexers these will be the same unless an interface card with separate Drop Insert bearers is in use The display shows BER source and the source may be changed by pressing 1 or 2 The dialogue is exactly the same as described in section 6 10 4 on page 103
87. is fitted If it is not the screen above displays only the temperature When selected this displays all of the internal power supply lines amp internal temperature as monitored by the processor with each PSU line is displayed as percentage of the nominal value The temperature is monitored continuously and a Unit Warning deferred alarm will be activated if ever the internal temperature reaches within 3 degrees Centigrade of the operating limits of OC and 60C Should the internal temperature exceed the limits of OC and 60C then a Unit Fault Prompt Alarm is activated The Tx carrier is muted outside the operating temperature range P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 124 6 16 4 Test INT BERT Menu Software gt V2 34 Internal BERT 1 Off 2 Channel ESC 3 Pattern 2 15 1 4 Mode Manual 5 Results Test Internal BERT Menu The internal Bit Error Rate Tester BERT is only available if the PRBS Tester feature is available standard on P300 IDR and above It is a powerful feature capable of monitoring and Auto Logging the BER of the receive satellite path even while the main data channel of the link is carrying normal traffic It allows a test pattern to be sent and received in either this main data channel or in parallel with the main data channel in the ESC or Aux channels carried within all satellite overheads The BER tests can either be selected to be manually controlled using Stop Start Reset run
88. is not transmitted The 32kbps for FAS Back Alarms 8K sync ESC channel and Audio ESC channel 1 are still transmitted The overhead is reduced to 32kbps both 32kbps channels defined for ESC audio are not transmitted The 32kbps for FAS Back Alarms 8K sync ESC channel alone is transmitted Both Audio ESC channels operate in 16kbps ADPCM mode allowing both audio ESC s to fit into 32kbps The 32kbps for FAS Back Alarms 8K sync ESC channel is transmitted first followed by 32kbps defined for Audio ESC 1 now containing both Audio ESCs 1 amp 2 using 16kbps ADPCM These are followed by the 32kbps for Audio ESC channel 2 which is unused and may be defined for use by the Aux port providing either a spare 32kbps for external BER testing or for the use of the internal BER Tester in both cases for possible traffic quality monitoring Both Audio ESC channels operate in 16kbps ADPCM mode allowing both Audio ESC s to fit into the 32kbps allocated to audio ESC channel 1 The overhead is 64kbps comprising 32kbps for FAS Back Alarms 8K sync ESC channel plus 32kbps containing the two 16kbps ADPCM audio channels The final 32kbps defined for Audio ESC channel 2 is not transmitted P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 136 7 2 7 2 1 IBS SMS OPERATION WITH 2048KBPS CONTINUOUS DATA Change Tx Rx Baseband Continuous 2048k G 732 Menu IBS 2048kbps IBS SMS operation is a special case in which there
89. is presented on the following pages In order to not over complicate the menu screens for modems which do not have the full feature set some menu options only display if features are fitted and or active Items in Square Braces are relevant only when the modem is configured in certain modes and are not displayed unless the modem is suitably configured For example menu options relating to certain features of IBS or IDR framing only display if the Tx or Rx Service is set for IBS or IDR Items displayed with a Option suffix such as AGC OUTPUT Option Monitor AGC only appear on the menu s when the relevant feature is available on that modem This may be a feature controlled by a front panel entered Feature Code or a feature requiring a hardware option as per this example Some items require not only the feature to be available in the modem but also the feature to be currently active before they are displayed For example the option to raise a deferred alarm if the distant Eb No falls below a certain level shown on the diagrams as DISTANT Eb No Option AUPC requires the AUPC feature to be available and switched on before the menu option is shown P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 41 6 2 1 Menu Structure Sheet 1 7 Main Status Change CONFIGURATION SUMMARY 0 o TRAFFIC STATUS SUMMARY 00 RX TRAFFIC DETAILED STATUS OO TX TRAFFIC DETAILED STATUS OO DEMOD xe DETAILED t K C
90. limits Power slew rate limit Carrier loss action pe oe BUC STATUS BUC Type open loop closed loop Setu Comme stat Address Temperature BUC closed loop set power measured power output on off attenuator settin Hel FSK Tx Rx status BUC true ou p BUC DC supply 10MHz Ref Current BUC Action low high Trip limits Service THIS UNIT Display of Model Serial number Software version Supplier Subsequent screens Internal board ID s etc SUPPLIER Display of Supplier name phone amp fax Subsequent screens E mail WWW Street address VIEW CONFIG INFO Tx This unit Supplier View config Terr interface Features BUC LNB Rem M amp C TERR INTERFACE Display of Interface card type Emulating other card Tx amp Rx Data rate limits Interface line descriptions FEATURES Upgrade code entry 0 In use by current config Standard always available Temporary on demo Hardware capable of Updates info for upgrade code Test user test of all features BUC LNB Info BUC LNB BUC Type software ver power class BUC frequency range amp shift SEE SHEET 3 P300H LNB type DC supply 10MHz ref P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook M status VIEW TX CONFIG Baseband mode Data rate Clocking Drop Timeslots ervice amp options summary Baseband Framed amp Symbol rates Scrambler summary Reed Solomon Inner FEC summary
91. lt symbol and displays the BER that it would calculate if ONE error had been received This means that as the test progresses without errors the displayed BER improves but never assumes it is zero as a Firebird does Note 1 The BER displayed by the Internal BERT is 100 accurate However if you use the Internal BERT and in parallel monitor the same received PRBS with an external Firebird there will be a lt 0 1 discrepancy in the error count but NOT the BER For the purists amongst you and so you do not question the accuracy of the Internal BERT the briefest useful explanation possible is as follows When the processor reads the BER counters once per second errors number of bits etc it has to freeze the counts in order to read the results accurately in case the counters increment whilst being read This reading of the counters takes less than 0 1 of the time but does mean that the BERT is blind for a small proportion of the time and some individual errors may not be counted However the BER is 10096 accurate because as well as counting Errors the BERT also counts PRBS bits received and calculates the BER as Errors P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 129 6 17 6 18 lt Count of bits received gt ie both are in proportion This would not be the case if we did not count the bits received and simply assumed that the error rate was Errors lt Time gt x lt Rate gt This may n
92. m uug lt 46 47 48 nil In Closed Net Plus ESC mode the variable rate async ESC is available on this port In IBS modes high rate async ESC is available on this port In IDR modes this port provides access to the 8kbps IDR ESC channel This can either by synchronous at 8kbps or if the Async ESC feature is available asynchronous at up to 4800 or 9600 Baud P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 185 Aux eee Pin Pin Number sync async T RS422 usage Cd usage RS 232 usage Tx Aux Clock out A Tx Aux Clock out TxAuxClockout Tx Aux Clock out B n c v Tx Aux Data in A Tx Aux Data in Tx Aux Data in B n c Rx Aux Clock out A Rx Aux Clock out Rx Aux Clock out B n c Rx Aux Data out A Rx Aux Data out ii 27 ii 10 28 Rx Aux Data out B Tx Aux Octet out A Tx Aux Octet out Tx Aux Octet out B Rx Aux Octet out A Rx Aux Octet out EIRE Rx Aux Octet out B n c indicates lines are optional 12 42 43 mm In Closed Net Plus ESC mode the aux port is not used In IBS modes the Aux port can be set to both INTELSAT using TS32 bit 1 and Sync modes selectable to use any of TS16 TS32 bits 1 amp 5 8 amp TS48 In both modes a clock is provided and the port can be used synchronously with the clock or asynchronously allowing the async data to be oversampled by the higher rate clock In this oversampled mode as specified by INTEL
93. menu in section 8 7 2 on page 148 7 1 4 Change Tx Rx Service CUSTOM Menu If Custom is select from the Change Tx Rx Service menu this leads to the following dialogue IBS IDR Custom framing based on 1 IBS 2 IDR Change Tx Rx Service Custom Menu This leads to variants on standard IBS framing all explained later which allow for operation Without a TS32 multiframe Without a backward alarm With four backward alarms for Multidestinational IBS Minimum overhead mode where the overhead scales to provide any ESC requirement at any data rate This leads to variants on standard IDR framing again explained later which allow for operation With overheads of 96 64 or only 32 kbps With 16kbps ADPCM on the audio channels instead of 32kbps allowing either all normal IDR features in a 64 kbps overhead or again utilising 16kbps ADPCM 96 kbps overhead with all normal IDR features but including a 32kbps spare channel for continuous BER traffic quality monitoring The discussion of IDR this continues after the IBS section in para 7 1 3 on page 135 7 1 2 Change Tx Rx Service Custom IBS Menu If IBS is select from the menu above this leads to the following question NORMAL NO 17532 MF P300H Multiframe 1 Normal 2 Without a TS 32 Multiframe Change Tx Rx Service Custom IBS Multiframe Menu 7532 Multiframe is used as normal No TS32 Multiframe is sent Tx or acquire
94. n k t amp depth 3 Other Change Tx Rx Mod Demod Reed Solomon Menu The Reed Solomon outer FEC codec may be configured as follows OFF INTELSAT OTHER The Reed Solomon out FEC is disabled Note that for testing the effectiveness of the RS codec a test mode allows you to disable the RS decoder error corrections without removing the RS overhead which changes the satellite data rate and therefore to a small extent the Rx Eb No This switches the RS codec on using standard INTELSAT values which are as follows FEC Framing Data Rate n k t Depth gt 1544 kbps 8 lt 1544 kbps 219 201 9 2048 kbps Non TCM ID 1544 E 225 205 10 4 Turbo Viterbi Sequential or No Other rates rates FEC IBS or All rates ma 112 7 Closed Net Note When interworking with NEC modems in TCM mode and IBS framing NEC have chosen to use Interleaving depth 4 for all data rates For rates gt 1544kbps then it will be necessary to select Other and manually select the interleaving as depth 4 This option is only available if the Custom Features feature is available standard on P300 TCM This feature allows the operator to specify the code rate outside of the normal INTELSAT parameters ie a fully variable code rate Reed Solomon codec The limitations are as follows 60 255 n 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 or 20 ie t 21 to 10 See the applications section para 8 4 Choosing Opti
95. necessarily the clock from the satellite ie the clock used depends on the Rx Clocking setting This means for example that if the Rx Clocking Station Clock then setting Tx Clocking Rx ref Stn would slave the Tx Clock ultimately from the Station Clock whatever the Station Clock frequency Similarly setting Tx Clocking Rx 5 ie with Rx Clocking Satellite would slave the Tx Clock to the incoming satellite clock which is what most other modem manufacturers means by Tx Rx In all cases if the clock selected by the Rx Clocking fails then the backup receive clocks as defined in P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 63 P300H the Rx Clock section also source the Tx Clock as it is slaved to the Rx clock whatever the source Note the P300 provides as standard the facility for Asymmetric Loop Timing a 1000 option from some vendors This means you can set Tx timing Rx ref Sat even if the Tx and Rx rates are different and it will generate the Tx Clock from the incoming satellite clock This works for any combination of rates it does not require the Rx rate to be higher than the Tx or the rates to be in any way related Finally and only for those with inquisitive minds why does it state earlier This option is only of any practical use when the Rx Clocking is set to Satellite or Station Clock Because with Rx Tx Clock In it causes a clock loop as Rx Tx AND Tx Rx with Rx nternal it is the
96. of IF frequency MODULATION BPSK OQPSK 8PSK Option 8PSK TCM FEC TYPE FEC RATE TURBO FEC RATE AUPC MODE None uncoded 1 2 Rate Scroll Up Down preset rates Off Viterbi Option Viterbi 3 4 Rate Includes 1 2 3 4 7 8 amp 0 789 Monitor distant Eb No amp BER Sequential Option Seq 7 8 Rate amp others as added Maintain distant Eb No Rate ran BPSK Maintain own Eb No self monitor urbo Option Turbo REED SOLOMON INTELSAT MAX DELTA POSITIVE Option Intelsat RS Modem maintains n k t amp Entry of max positive power of Interleaver depth as specified adjustment AUPC can make Intelsat by Intelsat even if user changes fter S Service FEC type or Data rate MAX DELTA NEGATIVE MODULATOR IAUPCI Entry of max negative power OTHER RS n k t INTERLEAVER DEPTH Option AUPC adjustment AUPC can make FEC nner Option Custom Features Depth 4 Mode Entry of n 60 255 and Depth 8 plus camer power slew rate MAXIMUM SLEW RATE Power e art Eb No Envy of max o tolerence of Tx power dB min Mec er NORMAL Carrier loss action Modem maintains correct SCRAMBLER scrambling automatically TARGET Eb No Switching between V 35 Entr t distant Eb No other IBS and RS scramblers niry of target distant Eb No to maintain OTHER SCRAMBLER V 35 SCR SELECT Eb No TOLERENCE WINDOW Manual control of scrambler CCITT compatible thy lerate bef dj
97. off Tx or Rx AUPC may be set to monitor the distant Eb No Mon Dist shown above in its normal mode to maintain a distant Eb No Maint Eb No shown overleaf In both modes the distant Eb No and BER estimate can be displayed on the local end LCD Monitor Dist end a deferred alarm can be set to activate if the distant Eb No falls below a user set threshold Change User Opt Alarm Thresholds Distant Eb No and the distant end Eb No can be recorded regularly in the local end traffic log using the Autolog feature Change Log Autoblog The distant Eb No can also be output on the uncommitted analog DAC output if the Monitor AGC option is fitted see uncommitted analog DAC output value 4 in Appendix E starting on page 201 P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 154 AUPC Maintain Eb No TX power adjusts within preset limits to 2 maintain distant Eb No at target value e OJ m m EE D sno nen eRe 5 12000909 E 2008 iL boas i 9X0 co oO Provides Distant Eb No Change Tx Mod AUPC Tx power Mode Main Eb no v Maintain Eb No contol Tx Limits 2 5 1 0 dB Slew rate 10 dB min iua od ce ein ts E Target Eb No 8 5 dB Tolerence 0 2 dB a X 7 Pap Loss action freeze AR Deferred alarm Monitor Demod FEC threshold Display of
98. out 25 pin connector of the P1440 card and adds instead a second 25 pin connector a male for the Eurocom interface Note that although the RS422 V 35 RS232 and G 703 modes are still compatible with 1 1 redundant operation as with the P1440 the Eurocom interfaces ARE NOT 1 1 compatible IMPORTANT The Eurocom modes are activated by grounding certain pin combinations on the Eurocom connector With no pins grounded or the Eurocom lead unplugged the card operates just as the standard P1440 allowing software selection of the interface RS422 V 35 RS232 G 703 control lines in non G 703 modes RTS etc in and line code and length in G 703 modes With the appropriate pins grounded the modem recognises it as a Eurocom D or G card and the software selections relating to the other interfaces are not available NOTE ESPECIALLY That when switching between Normal Eurocom D and Eurocom G modes ie exchanging connectors if the links to enable the Eurocom modes are in the cables that the modem must be RESET in order to recognise and correctly operate with the new card type This is achieved simply by removing the power cord for a few seconds and then re powering the unit To verify if the card is in a Eurocom mode select Main Info Terr Intfc from the menu and read the card description To use this interface in RS422 V 35 RS232 or G 703 modes please disconnect any connectors from the Eurocom interface and treat the card exactly as the P1440
99. outbound terrestrial error rate Loopthrough or generation of local bearer onto which to insert the Rx data from any normal clock source eg station clock clock from satellite internal clock Automatic generation of backup bearer so Rx traffic is not lost if Drop bearer into Tx fails and bearer is looped through to the Insert mux to pick up Rx data Timeslot ID maintenance even with Closed Net Plus ESC carriers Enhanced features with the Extended Feature see later X X X Ot OO P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 13 P300 P310 IDR Additional Features v v P300H IDR Option Satellite Framing in accordance with the IDR specification to IESS 308 including Standard IDR framing with 2 x 32 kbps ADPCM audio ESC a synchronous 8kbps ESC data channel and four backward alarms Enhanced features with the Custom Features feature see later Independent ESC amp Aux Ports to replace the shared ESC Aux port of the base modem The ESC and Aux ports are active in all framed modes They provide the following features ESC Port provides a front panel selectable RS232 RS422 or RS485 interface In IDR Mode it provides either a synchronous interface to the 8kbps IDR ESC channel or if the Async ESC feature is available standard on P300 IBS and above an async interface supporting up to 4800 or 9600 Baud eg for distant end M amp C via the IDR overhead This same ESC port although part of th
100. output but which may be selected via the front panel to provide other user requested signals eg Eb No Rx IF offset frequency or other uses implemented as required The alarm relays have the following definitions Unit Fault A unit fault exists i e an equipment failure Traffic Prompt A Tx or Rx traffic fault exists Deferred alarm of the following conditions exists The receive BER is greater than the user defined threshold The receive Eb No is lower than the user defined threshold Buffer slips are more frequent than the user set threshold A Backward alarm is being received from either the satellite or terrestrial ports Full pinout details are provided in Appendix B The alarm relay functions can be changed See Relay Mode in appendix E Async ESC connector This 15 pin D female connector provides a superset of the features found previously on the front panel circular 8 pin din connector It includes an RS232 serial port for the loading or revised internal software from a PC or the printing of the units traffic log to a serial printer PC terminal emulator If the Monitor AGC option is fitted it provides I Q and symbol clock outputs to monitor the receive constellation in order to view received signal quality on an oscilloscope When the IDR option IS NOT fitted it provides an RS232 RS422 RS485 asynchronous port for either the high rate Async ESC facility for IBS SMS or Closed Net Plus ESC services or the IBS
101. passes 31 data timeslots transparently not just the 30 implied in the SDM300 handbook The P300 Modem can also provide 30 timeslot operation where TS16 contains CAS at step 3 simply select CAS P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 150 T1 ESF amp T1 ESF S 1544kbps Extended Super Frame S Special The P300 Modems do not require the S Special mode to support N29 and N 18 as the P300 Modem equipped with the Extended feature standard on P300 TCM can support any value of N Simply configure as follows CVE CN it Select Change Tx Service IBS SMS Select Change Tx Baseband Drop Mux T1 ESF Select the number of timeslots to drop Select Leave or Replace with Idle code as required When T1 RBS Over Satellite 1 Normal or no RBS 2 Maintain RBS is asked select as appropriate If RBS is selected the dialogue ends here For No RBS if the number of timeslots chosen is not an Odd values of eg N 7 or 9 then the unit will prompt TS Identity will be maintained by TS32 multiframe YES and the setup is complete If you have selected an Odd value of the unit will prompt TS Identity over satellite 12 Normal maintain 2 Don t maintain If you select Normal maintain the unit will provide TS identity maintenance for any value of N by using a CAS multiframe If you select Don t Maintain then the Modem will not use a CAS multiframe and will be compatible with the same number of times
102. prior to operation later changes to the configuration are made with the CHANGE option The Status screen cannot be selected unless SETUP INITIAL CONFIG has been performed P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 39 6 1 MENU SYSTEM INTRODUCTION All configuration amp monitoring features are accessed from the front panel via the menu system Provided an operator has an understanding of how the menu system works there is no need to try and memorise the menu structure itself as selecting a single option SETUP INITIAL CONFIG explained later will make the unit prompt for all needed configuration parameters The structure of the menu system is however shown on the next few pages for reference gt gt gt THE 1 MINUTE GUIDE TO FRONT PANEL OPERATION lt lt lt The main menu can be accessed from any display with the MAIN key It is from this main menu that all functions are selected 1 Status 2 Change 3 Monitor 4 Info 5 Log 6 Test 7 Setup 8 Action 9 Help Main Menu Whenever the t or i symbol appears it indicates that further information is available by pressing the UP or DOWN key This information is usually worth looking at otherwise we wouldn t have put it there The NO key functions as a backstep backspace key both when entering numeric data and when traversing the menus The YESkey doubles as an enter key for numeric entries Where a numeric entry requires many digits eg IF frequency
103. remote M amp C port to receive a message including this modem Messages present on the remote M amp C port Tx output lines which includes any response from this unit or any device daisy chained to the remote M amp C port are routed to the Tx ESC channel and back via the satellite link Aux Interface Following the ESC interface selection the Aux port may be configured self explanatory Aux Interface RS232 1 RS232 2 RS422 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Cfg Interfaces Aux Menu P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 83 6 6 34 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA AUDIO LEVELS Menu Audio levels V1 12 3dBm V2 5 6dBm Press 1 or 2 then level t YES to fix Change TX Rx ESC Aux BA Audio Levels Menu This screen is used to set the levels for the Audio ESC ports These are typical used in IDR modes for the Audio ESC channels but may also be used when generating a 64kbps IBS carrier comprising of 2 x 32kbps ADPCM audio channels only or a 128kbps comprising of 2 x 32kbps ADPCM audio channels plus 64kbps from the main data port Press 1 or 2 to select which channel then use the Up and Down buttons to vary the level Pressing the up down keys slowly rapidly causes the level to change in 0 1dB steps rapidly in 0 5dB steps YES must be pressed to exit the screen otherwise the previous values will be restored P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 84 6 6 35 Change Tx Rx E
104. same as selecting Tx nfernal ie the second Tx Clocking option and with Rx DCE Clock it does something entirely different for a reason even the inquisitive would find tedious and uses the Station Clock again if there is one or the Internal 1PPM ref if not So this option really is only of any practical use when the Rx Clocking is set to Satellite or Station Clock P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 64 6 6 8 6 6 9 6 6 10 Change Tx MODULATOR Menu Mod 1 Freq 2 Mod n 3 FEC 4 RS 5 Scr 6 Carr 7 Pwr 8 Spect Inv 9 AUPC Change Tx Modulator Menu Each option leads to the following menus Change Tx Rx Modulator IF FREQUENCY Menu Set IF Frequency 70 0000MHz Change Tx Rx Mod Demod IF Frequency Menu The operator is be prompted to enter the desired transmit frequency In the 70 MHz band the valid range is from 50MHz to 90MHz and in the 140 MHz band the valid range is from 100MHz to 180MHz If both the 70MHz and 140MHz IF bands are available standard P300 IBS and above then the range is actually continuous from 50MHz to 180MHz ie includes 90 100MHz As the data entry field is 7 characters entries for the 70MHz band require a leading zero to be entered The operator may enter any frequency within either the IF band with up to 100Hz resolution The unit will reject a frequency which falls outside the ranges stated and will prompt the user to re enter the value Once complete the user shou
105. see Fault Mode 8 in Appendix E Warning 10MHz Reference clk in failed The station clock set to 10MHz has been selected as the reference the Tx amp Rx synthesisers but it D IF amp Clocks switched to int 1PPM ref has failed Check the signal applied to the station clock port This is an internal failure consult the factory with the error code Typically though it is caused by D poor seating of the Turbo option board on the mating connectors Unit Warn Turbo codec DLL fail error code P300H P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 216 TX TRAFFIC FAULTS line of display Tx Traffic Faults Tx OK LED Off and Tx Traffic prompt relay Tx Warn Reconfiguring Tx path The modem is reconfiguring the Tx path after a user parameter change Tx Fault line off terr lt DTE DCE gt not line depends on the interface in use eg RS422 DCE TR V 35 DTR This is a DC control Top TFopt ready line which is used to indicate the terrestrial equipment is functioning properly The lt line gt switching off may be user set to cause this fault or be ignored Change Terr Int Control Lines See note 5 Tx Fault lt line gt off nothing to send line depends on the interface in use eg RS422 DCE RS V 35 RTS This is a handshake Top line which is used to indicate the terrestrial equipment has data to send The lt line gt switching off TF may be user set to cause this fault or be ignored Change
106. so increases the error rate by a factor of 3 The IBS SMS synchronous scrambler does not multiply errors and so give a factor of three BER performance increase over the V 35 scrambler ABackward Alarm facility which raises a local deferred alarm if the distant end modem cannot receive data transmitted from this station ie a possible Tx problem this end ALow Hate Oversampled async ESC Channel 1 2000th the data rate this is available on the Aux port of the modem This results in async rates of 50 Baud at 64kbps and 110 Baud at gt 256kbps ATS32 Multiframe Sequence to allow the transmission of satellite encryption control vectors and three 8 bit carrier ID s referred to as Station Channel and Spare ID Overhead channels to convey Channel Associated Signalling CAS corresponding to an extra 2kbps per 64kbps transmitted by use of a separate CAS Multiframe sequence in TS16 48 gt Timeslot ID Maintenance which is the facility to maintain the identity of individual data streams when multiplexed together into one aggregate rate carrier eg two independent 64kbps circuits in one 128kbps carrier Additional Features Paradise products In addition to the basic INTELSAT definition above the P300 Modems provide the following additional features in IBS SMS mode gt Ahigh rate ESC channel carried in spare parts of the overhead This allows up to 68 22 32nd of the overhead to be used for ESC providing a 2400 Baud ESC with a
107. the bandwidth reduction effects of deframing are ignored as INTELSAT chose to define the mandatory modem performance in terms of E specifying that this relates to the Composite Information Bit Rate ie it includes framing Baseband processing has no effect on bandwidth and is totally ignored Practical Implications of Displayed Eb No Practically this means the following For a constant Tx Power you will get the same displayed E N whatever the settings of Modulation Inner FEC and Outer RS FEC as the E N display compensates for these parameters The bandwidth will vary and so will the Carrier Noise at the input of the demod but the displayed E N will be steady as it compensates for these parameter changes When comparing BER performance for different Modulation FEC schemes against E N the plotted E N already accounts for the changes in Carrier Noise caused by the different Modulation and FEC settings Any BER difference you see with different schemes is a real difference you don t have to further compensate for the changes in Carrier Noise this change induces You do however have to be aware of Bandwidth considerations You might find a Modulation FEC scheme which gives an exceptional BER for a given E N but it will of little practical value if the bandwidth it requires occupies a whole transponder When you look at BER performance figures at a specified E N you get the same BER performance whet
108. the channel noise but in some carrier line up procedures a circuit may be required to operate error free for 12 24 hours For higher data rate circuits this proved impossible to achieve with the differing scramblers and so tests were performed on the bench INTELSAT were called in to adjudicate the argument and as both camps were technically correct someone was going to be upset INTELSAT decided in favour of the larger camp with a Japanese company being the only member in the opposing camp This was unfortunate as it happened that the losers were the only company to have the V 35 scrambler buried deep within as ASIC at the time and therefore a nightmare to change whereas every other manufacturer had it implemented in hardware and could have made cuts straps to resolve the issue The definition finally approved by INTELSAT became known as INTELSAT V 35 scrambling with the other definition derived from the original CCITT spec as CCITT V 35 scrambling INTELSAT of course approve only INTELSAT V 35 scrambling Other Derivatives As mentioned earlier the CCITT were only the first of many companies to mess up the V 35 scrambling Atleast two other companies also implemented a V 35 scrambler which was accidentally different to the CCITT definition ie didn t match the schematic or the written description These companies now offer corrected INTELSAT V 35 implementations but in order to maintain backwards compatibility they support t
109. the local modem in order to determine if any adjustment is necessary The AUPC will use a different proportion of the available ESC bandwidth depending on the ESC interface selected If the ESC interface is set to Link to M amp C Link L or Link R then it assumes the ESC channel is a so being used for network M amp C as this is the setting used to provide the connectivity for distant end M amp C In this case the AUPC will use up to 33 of the ESC channel bandwidth in order to achieve an Eb No reporting rate of once per second If the ESC Baud rate is such ie so high that the AUPC can achieve this update rate using less than 33 of the ESC channel bandwidth then it uses only the proportion of bandwidth required for a 1Hz update rate The 33 bandwidth is used by interleaving the requests P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 156 8 11 2 for the distant Eb No and distant end Eb No responses between M amp C messages using the ESC channel If the ESC interface is set to RS485 then the external RS485 interface will be disabled and the AUPC will use 100 of the ESC channel bandwidth to achieve as high an Eb No reporting rate as possible If the ESC interface is set to RS232 or RS422 AUPC cannot be used The Eb No update rate and percentage of ESC channel bandwidth used is displayed on one screen of the Info View Config Tx sequence of screen displays Configuring AUPC for operation DO NOT switch on the AUPC
110. the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors With the Tx Clocking Set to Tx Clock In the Data signal is checked against the Clock In signal With the Tx Clocking Set to Internal or Rx the Data signal is checked against the Int Tx Clk Out signal Note that although there are both 25 pin EIA530 pinout and 37 pin RS449 pinout connectors on the rear panel these are simply connected in parallel Do not use both connectors at the same time If you require the older 34 pin Winchester connector then an adaptor lead is required please contact the factory for details By selecting Change Terr Intfc Control Lines it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line RTS or Device DTE Ready In line DTR switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the 5 Valid In line RTS by selecting Change Tx Modulator Carrier RTS Controlled P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 169 P1440 IN RS232 MODE The P1440 is the standard interface supplied with the P300 Series Modem If RS232 is selected under Change Terr Intfc Electrical then the following interface description applies Min M RS232 Circuit 25 37 pin Electrical Req Description Number Levels RS23
111. the rear panel these are simply connected in parallel Do not use both connectors at the same time The EIA530 connector is pin compatible with the standard 25 pin RS232 interface By selecting Change Terr Intfc Control Lines it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line CA or Device DTE Ready In line CD switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line CA by selecting Change Tx Modulator Carrier RTS Controlled P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 170 P1440 IN G 703 MODE If the G 703 option is fitted to the P300 Series modem then G 703 becomes a front panel software selectable interface in addition to the standard RS422 V 35 and RS232 interfaces If G 703 is selected under Change Terr Intfc Electrical then the following interface description applies Note on E1 G 703 cards you must set switch 2 on the G 703 option to select either 75O G 703 on the BNC connectors or 1200 G 703 on the D type connectors For the T1 card or for the E1 card if the impedance switch is set for 120Q then the following pinout applies Note that although there are both 25 pin EIA530 pinout and 37 pin RS449 pinout connectors on the rear panel these are simply connected in parallel Do not use both connectors at the same time 2 pin pin mw Levels Min Signal Descrip
112. to make the measurement with the noise on and then convert back to simply Carrier Noise In the equation below the term C N N is the Carrier Noise Noise ratio read from the spectrum analyser C N N E amer E Noise We express this same Carrier Noise ratio at the input of the demod in terms of the Energy per Symbol Noise power density which is written as E Because Carrier Noise is a ratio of two powers measured in the same bandwidth the resolution bandwidth of the analyser this is the same as E N Within the demodulator each Symbol is converted back into the Transmitted Bits For BPSK each Symbol represents only 1 Transmitted Bit for QPSK or OQPSK each Symbol represents 2 Transmitted Bits and for 8PSK each Symbol represents 3 Transmitted Bits The expression E N or E represents the Carrier to Noise ratio referenced to this Transmitted Bit rate For QPSK and 8PSK the Transmitted Bit rate is higher than the Symbol rate and so E N ie the Carrier Noise referenced to Transmitted Bit rate is lower than the E N the Carrier Noise referenced to the Symbol rate as this same power is referenced to a higher bit rate Allowing for the change in bit rate in the demod gives E E 10log No of Bits Symbol No No Next in the demod chain comes the FEC Decoder The receive Carrier Noise referenced to this point is referred to as Ebe
113. to the fitting of the main data into the 60 timeslots available for data per IBS frame the abcd signalling information has to be fitted into the 30 available nibbles in the 15 signalling data timeslots in TS16 TS48 following the CAS MF unique word in TS16 There are certain values of N for which this will work ie where 30 N gives an integer These include N 1 2 3 5 6 10 15 30 In these cases then the CAS multiframe is 8 frames in duration with the first frame containing CAS MF unique word in TS16 and pairs of abcd signalling nibbles in TS48 and the following seven frames contain pairs of abcd signalling nibbles in TS16 and TS48 For values of N which are not supported by an 8 frame CAS multiframe with room for 30 nibbles of signalling the multiframe is simply extended in length by multiples of 8 frames until it reaches a value where it can accommodate an integer multiple of the signalling information in one multiframe Although the multiframe is extended in multiples of 8 frames giving a further 30 locations to carry signalling each 8 frames the CAS MF unique word is not repeated but is instead replaced by a 00000000 pack byte in TS16 of every eighth frame after the original CAS MF unique word This keeps the same ratio of 30 signalling nibbles every 8 frames no matter how long the CAS multiframe actually is The CAS Multiframe structure is of variable length in multiples of 8 frames and this feature lends its
114. which the Rx traffic is to be inserted is not available and the Rx data would therefore be lost as a result of a Tx fault In such a circumstance the modem temporarily generates a PCM bearer onto which the Rx data can be inserted to preserve the Rx traffic See notes 6 amp 9 Rx Fault Insert bearer AIS generating See above see notes 6 amp 9 T Rx Fault Ins mux bearer frame sync lost The modem only detects frame sync when the Insert Mux is active Check the bearer type is T specified correctly Change Rx Baseband Insert This normally only occurs if either there are significant errors on the terrestrial link or if it is supplied with AIS and the modem is set to ignore AIS Check that the AIS detector is not disabled with Change User Opt Operation Actions AIS ALSO there is an option to make the modem re seek frame sync if CRC sync is lost Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial PCM Bearer CRC CRC Frame Acq Check the modem is not set to expect a CRC and forcing frame re acquisition if CRC is lost but there is no CRC on the PCM signal See notes 6 amp 9 Rx Fault Ins mux bearer MF sync lost Rx Fault Ins mux bearer CRC sync lost Rx Fault Clk PLL lock fail to source P300H The modem only seeks TS16 Multiframe sync when the Rx baseband is set to use the Insert mux in T a G 732 mode and CAS signalling has been selected Check that a CAS multiframe is present on the PCM signal applied to the modem
115. 00 Series provides a data port on the terrestrial side which provides RS422 V 35 and RS232 software selectable interfaces on both 25 pin EIA 530 and 37 pin RS449 connectors Optional G 703 interfaces provide either a T1 or E1 1544kbps or 2048kbps G 703 interface in addition to the standard three interfaces The modem couples into the ground station up down converter chains on the RF side at either 70MHz or if the Wideband IF feature is available standard on P300 IBS and above 140MHz The status of a unit is available externally on form c relay outputs designed to connect to station monitoring system The modems also provides a complete remote Monitor amp Control M amp C port allowing the status to be remotely monitored and the unit controlled or the configuration changed If Async ESC feature is available standard on P300 IBS and above the modem can provide an asynchronous Engineering Service Channel carried across the satellite link as an overhead added to the main data channel The ESC channel can be internally linked to the remote M amp C port allowing any modem to be monitored or controlled from the distant end of the satellite link In addition external equipment such as radio transceivers if coupled into the remote M amp C port may also be accessed remotely over the satellite link Higher specified P300 modems additionally feature many advanced functions including variable code rate Reed Solomon the ultimate in T1 E1 Drop Insert
116. 00H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 182 ASYNC ESC CONNECTOR This connector carries An RS232 RS422 RS485 async port for use on either the ESC or Aux channels An RS232 serial port for log printing amp embedded M amp C update An RS422 Station Clock input The Receive constellation monitor points if the Monitor AGC option is fitted ASYNC ESC CONNECTOR RS422 Kayne port for ESC or Aux channel RS485 a Async ESC Aux Input to satellite 9 b Async ESC Aux Input to satellite a Async ESC Aux Output from satellite Async ESC Aux Output from satellite ove 232 l 1 Ground RS232 Serial port for Log printing or embedded M amp C update Serial Input RS232 port Serial Output RS232 port Co Ground Analog Rx constellation monitor Rx signal quality AR Rx channel eye Rx Q channel eye Rx symbol clock Co Ground RS422 Differential Station Clock Input Station Clock a Station Clock b 13 Ground RX CONSTELLATION MONITOR PORT If the Monitor AGC option is fitted it is possible to view a receive constellation but not the more traditional eye pattern To display the receive constellation on an oscilloscope connect the and signals to the main X Y inputs and apply the receive symbol clock to the external trigger input of the scope The main scope inputs should be set to X Y display AC coupled both channels 200 m
117. 180 10 are equivalent they can correct 5 bytes in 100 and 10 in 200 respectively but the effect of the interleaver synchronisation words will be more noticeable equivalent to a loss of t 21 when t 5 20 loss as opposed to t 10 10 loss On the negative side the longer the codeword the proportionally higher the delay through the encoder decoder and interleaver deinterleaver The delay of the combined encoder and decoder is approximately 8x 2x n K 60 bits and the interleaver amp deinterleaver a further 8 x n x depth bits if calculating the delay use the data rate inc framing and Reed Solomon INTELSAT recommend an interleaving depth of 4 for rates less than 1544kbps and 8 for rates of 1544kbps and above Practical values for Reed Solomon code rate will depend on the amount of overhead the circuit can tolerate For overheads between 1 6 and 30 the table below gives practical values of n k t with the error correction at its maximum 96 o h Optimum n k t 96 o h Optimum n k t 96 o h Optimum n k t 1 6 254 250 2 11 202 182 10 21 115 95 10 2 204 200 2 12 187 167 10 22 111 91 10 3 206 200 3 3 174 154 10 23 107 87 10 4 208 200 4 14 163 143 10 24 103 83 10 5 210 200 5 5 153 133 10 25 100 80 10 6 247 233 7 6 145 125 10 26 97 77 10 7 245 229 8 17 138 118 10 27 94 74 10 8 243 225 9 8 131 111 10 28 91 71 10 9
118. 2 2 a 101 6 10 1 Change User Opt THRESHOLDS Menu 101 6 10 2 Change User Opt OPERATION Menu 101 6 10 3 Change User Opt Operation ACTIONS Menu 102 6 10 4 Change User Opt Operation TERRESTRIAL 103 6 10 5 X Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial PCM BEARER CRC Menu 103 6 10 6 Change User Opt Operation SATELLITE Menu 104 6 10 7 Change User Opt Operation TERR SAT Menu 105 6 10 8 Change User Opt Operation ALARMS Menu 106 6 10 9 Change User Opt DISPLAY Menu 106 6 10 10 Change User Opt AGC Output 106 6 11 CHANGE TIME DATE MENU s cee eee eee 107 6 12 GHANGE B G ENB MENU slo dane den Rr RR ga 108 6 12 1 Change BUC LNB TX BUC Menu 108 6 12 2 Change BUC LNB Tx BUC BUC TYPE Menu 109 6 12 3 Change BUC LNB Tx BUC DC amp REFERENCES Menu 110 6 12 4 Change BUC LNB Tx BUC SHF FREQUENCY Menu 111 6 12 5 Change BUC LNB Tx BUC SHF POWER UNITS Menu 111 6 12 6 Change BUC LNB Tx BUC BUC CONTROL Menu 112 6 12 7 Change BUC LNB RXLNB Menu
119. 242 222 10 9 125 105 10 29 89 69 10 0 220 200 10 20 120 100 10 30 767 10 For other values of overhead o h expressed as 1 xx maximise t then n Round 2 x o h xt o h 1 k n a2t If n is greater than 255 reduce t P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 144 8 5 For some applications particularly when operating with lower data rates a reduction in the processing delay associated with Reed Solomon FEC is the prime goal In such circumstances use the Custom Features feature and select shorter codewords to reduce the encoder decoder amp interleaver de interleaver delay For example switching from INTELSAT standard values of n k t 126 112 7 to 64 56 4 provides approximately the same correction ability 7 in 126 5 5 and 4 in 64 6 25 respectively with similar overheads 126 112 12 5 64 56 14 3 but with interleaving amp decoder delays reduced from 5632 to 3104 bits 156ms to 85ms at 32kbps If using Sequential FEC see also Fault Mode 3 in Appendix E NOTES ON DATA RATES amp SYMBOL RATES The normal constraint for a modem is the range of Symbol Hates over which the modem can operate correctly The Symbol Rate range however is not of initial interest to most modem users as they first need to know if the modem can operate at the terrestrial Data Rate they require This section briefly explains the relationship between Data Rates and Symbol
120. 28kbps Once demultiplexed to 128kbps the start and end boundaries of each timeslot are lost in the continuous 128kbps data stream Without the TS ID maintenance there would be 16 different ways 2 x 8 bits per TS that the two data streams could be inserted back into the terrestrial PCM bearer timeslots at the receive end One correct way one with channels reversed 8 bits shifted and 14 ways shifts of 1 7 8 15 bits in which parts of each channel appeared in the channel Without TS ID maintenance then Drop Insert can only useful if all the data dropped inserted comprises one single data stream of N x 64kbps from a single source Note Typically 0 1 is tested with a PRBS from a Firebird in all relevant timeslots this is a guaranteed way to NOT TEST TS ID Maintenance as it is not required for such a test because all the data comprises one single data stream from a single source the PRBS generator Instead to verify TS ID maintenance insert the PRBS into any subset of the dropped timeslots eg just one If the Timeslot ID is not maintained you are likely to get something else back in the equivalent receive timeslot instead of the PRBS probably the idle code from one of the other dropped timeslots If the Timeslot ID is maintained you should consistently get the PRBS back in this same subset or single timeslot Bear in mind that without TS ID maintenance when dropping N timeslots statistically it will still work one time in 8xN when the rand
121. 2900 Viterbi V 35 FDC Link FDC SM290 SM2900 Sequential Link FDC v 35 SSE SM3000 4000 Viterbi V 35 FDC 308 SSE SM3000 4000 Sequential SSE SM3000 4000 Sequential 308 mE V 35 EF SDM 300 300A Viterbi IESS 308 V 35 EF SDM 300 300A EF SDM 300 300A Sequentia IESS IESS Requires Tx amp Rx Spectrum invert on P300 308 V 35 308 V 35 Modem 300 A set for data 300 A set for true invert data EF SDM 650B V 35 V 35 Requires Tx amp Rx Spectrum invert on P300 650B set for data 650B set for true Modem invert data Comstream CM701 Comstream IDR MAN Comstream Viterbi BPSK requires P300 Tx Rx spectrum 701 set for data true data but poss invert QPSK is OK invert 10 error rate Sequential requires P300 Rx spectrum invert in BPSK and both Tx amp Rx spectrum invert in QPSK See Appendix E FaultMode 11 A compatibility document which describes interworking tests between the Paradise P300 P400 Modems and other manufacturers modems is available on request P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 153 8 11 1 INTRODUCTION TO AUPC AUTOMATIC UPLINK POWER CONTROL Note Authorisation from the satellite operator is probably required before AUPC is activated Introduction AUPC provides a mechanism to counteract changes in atmospheric conditions eg rain which in turn affects the attenuation of the atmosphere a
122. 300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 8 2 1 INTRODUCTION OVERVIEW This handbook describes how to install and configure the P300 Series Satellite Modems This includes the original P300 the P300 Turbo P310 L Band and P311 mixed L Band IF Modems Where ever reference is made to the P300 or P300 Series modem it applies to all products unless specifically noted The P300 Series may be supplied equipped with different feature sets to suit different applications This means that the mix of features available in any modem such as Drop Insert IDR framing etc may be tailored to suit any user requirement however typically they are grouped into one of four standard configurations as follows P300 P310 VSAT Features for use in VSAT applications P300 P310 IBS Features for IBS SMS use or thin route IDR below T1 services P300 P310 IDR Features for IBS SMS AND IDR services IDR at T1 or greater P300 P310 TCM Features for use in TCM TCM IDR IBS SMS and standard IDR services The table on page 11 summarises the different features and which features are available in the four standard configurations The P300 Series Modems are designed for operation in a typical ground station environment providing a data link between geographically distant sites via satellite Like its predecessors it is physically small light and of rugged construction allowing it also to be used in mobile and fly away terminals The P3
123. 3E 7 Monitor Distant Eb No amp BER Menu If the link is broken or the AUPC cannot communicate with the distant end via the ESC channel then both figures are replaced with Unavail P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 117 6 13 5 6 13 6 Monitor AUPC Menu This screen is only available when the AUPC feature is set to Maintain Eb No or Self Monitor refer to AUPC in section 8 11 1 on page 154 when the AUPC is controlling the Tx power The first line displays either Distant Eb No or Self monitor respectively the lower line shows the target Eb No along with its tolerance window and the current AUPC delta power If the delta power reaches the preset limit either up or down then it is prefixed with either a ft or arrow indicating that the power limit has been reached Distant Eb No 9 7dB 10 0 5 Delta power 1 5dB Monitor AUPC Menu The down arrow indicates that a subsequent screen Shown below shows the limits the AUPC has been constrained to work under Limits 3 5 1 0dB Slew 10dB min Comms lost action Nominal 1 Monitor AUPC Limits Menu Most of this is self explanatory except for the slew rate limit which limits the rate of change of Tx power it moves on 0 1dB steps at the appropriate rate to match the given slew rate A slew rate limit of zero however indicates no limit and step changes in power will be made on the Tx output Monito
124. 4 and N x 24 for ESF as DA ESF have 12 24 frames per multiframe relative to which RBS is placed As with the support for Odd values of N the CAS Multiframe is again used to provide support for these extended timeslot sets and hence support the Robbed Bit Signalling CAS Multiframe INTELSAT have defined a satellite CAS Multiframe to allow Channel Associated Signalling to be transferred across the satellite link between E1 PCM bearers within the IBS satellite overhead The P300 equipped with the Extended D I feature standard on P300 TCM uses the CAS Multiframe definition to support CAS and also to provide Timeslot ID Maintenance for Odd values of 7 9 11 13 etc which in turn allows the Modem to also support Robbed Bit Signalling RBS The CAS multiframe is entirely independent of the TS32 Multiframe which has already been described The CAS Multiframe consists of data amp frame alignment words in TS16 and TS48 of the IBS frame A CAS multiframe starts off as a unique word of 00001y11 in TS16 and comprises a further 15 signalling data timeslots in TS48 amp TS16 stretching over 8 frames When carrying CAS the 15 signalling data timeslots carry pairs of the abcd signalling nibbles from the terrestrial TS16 When not carrying CAS but where the CAS Multiframe format is being used for solely for timeslot ID maintenance for Odd values of N these 15 signalling data timeslots are available for the high rate ESC Similar
125. 6 5 Test Int BERT OFF CHANNEL Menu 126 6 16 6 Test Int BERT PATTERN Menu 0 128 6 16 7 Test Int BERT MODE Menu 0 cc eee RII IIl 128 6 16 8 Test Int BERT RESULTS Menu 129 SET PMN ise cometer tive treo att atta ru f acta fa 130 6 19 wen oen a d 130 6 19 HEEP MENU is ur eps ee ach ee CERA PESO SA e TUR CRUS UR DE UTE BUR e 131 6 20 SERVICE MENU iiu bob RE EY rco bee ee cb el 131 6 20 1 Service USER PARAMETERS Menu 132 6 20 2 Service FACTORY PARAMETERS 132 MENU SCREENS FOR SPECIALIST OPTIONS 133 7 4 CUSTOM FRAMING MENUS sse RR RR e eee 133 7 1 1 Change TX Rx Service CUSTOM Menu 133 7 1 2 Change Tx Rx Service Custom IBS Menu 133 7 1 3 Change Tx Rx Service Custom IDR Menu 135 7 2 IBS SMS OPERATION WITH 2048KBPS CONTINUOUS DATA 137 7 2 1 Change Tx Rx Baseband Continuous 2048k 9 732 Menu IBS 137 7 3 CUSTOM IDR OPERATION WITH 2048KBPS CONTINUOUS DATA 139 7 3 1 Change Tx Rx Baseband Continuous 2048k Menu IDR 139 8 10 APPLICATION NOTES 5 rasan pee Seis vi heed w
126. 8 11 1 on page 154 before enabling this facility AUPC 1 Mode 2 Max 3 Min 4 Slew rate 5 Target Eb No 6 Tolerence 7 Loss act Change Tx Modulator AUPC Menu Note that options 2 through 7 only display when the AUPC mode It is set to other than Off or Monitor Distant so initially only AUPC 1 Mode may be displayed P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 72 6 6 18 Change Tx Modulator AUPC MODE Menu 6 6 19 Set AUPC Mode Off 1 Off 2 Mon dist 3 Maint EbNo 4 Self mon Change Tx Modulator AUPC Mode Menu NOTE You probably need permission from the satellite operators to use AUPC unless you have a blanket power budget which you may use as you see fit The modes are as follows OFF The modem disables the Auto Uplink Power Control the Tx power will not adjust dynamically Any AUPC positive or negative delta power adjustment to the Tx output power It is removed instantaneously ie a Tx power step Any bandwidth within the ESC channel used by the AUPC It is released back for ESC usage MON DIST The local modem utilises the async ESC channel between the local and distant modems to regularly collect Eb No and BER data from the distant modem This can be displayed with Monitor Distant Eb No amp BER This It is not an active AUPC mode and the Tx power will not adjust dynamically it simply allows local monitoring and logging of distant performance MAINT Eb NO This It is full
127. 8 56kbps X 50 stuffed to 64kbps not raw 64kbps data Refer also to the Change User Operation Terr Sat X 50 AIS dialogue description for a discussion about AIS in X 50 modes HEEL line depends on the interface in use eg RS422 DCE TR V 35 DTR This is a DC control Top line which is used to indicate the terrestrial equipment is functioning properly The lt line gt switching off may be user set to cause this fault or be ignored Change Terr Int Control Lines See note 5 Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Other Rx Fault line off DCE not accp t Rx data Rx Fault No insert bearer generating line depends on the interface in use and is only available if the modem is fitted with a DTE Top interface card eg RS422 DTE CS V 35 CTS This is a handshake line which is raised in response to our RS RTS line if the modem interface is a DTE which in turn indicates the output data is valid ie demod locked and FEC deframing Ok It s status can be used to determine if the terrestrial device is accepting the modems output data The lt line gt switching off may be user set to cause this fault or be ignored Change Terr Int Control Lines See note 5 If the Rx Baseband is set to Insert Mux with the bearer Looped through from the Drop Mux dialogue T under Change Rx Baseband Insert then if the Tx input signal fails no bearer or AIS then this looped bearer onto
128. AUPC mode As with MON DIST above it uses the ESC channel to collect Eb No information from the distant modem but in addition it varies the Tx power within the constraints provided to maintain a specified distant Eb No SELF MON This It is ONLY used in Tx only applications typically point to multipoint to attempt to maintain the Eb No at multiple Rx only stations It requires the modem to be able to receive the its own carrier via satellite not by any form of IF loop In operation it monitors the Rx Eb No and adjusts the local Tx power to keep this local Eb No constant This means it can compensate for atmospheric changes which affect the Tx signal to the satellite and LOCAL atmospheric changes affecting the Rx signal from the satellite If however as It is common there are multiple Rx terminals over a wide geographical area then different atmospheric conditions over each terminal will still cause a variation in the Eb No for each terminal Note See AUPC in section 8 11 1 on page 154 regarding the async ESC channel requirements in order for local modem to distant modem communications in order for modes Mon Disf and Maint Eb NO to operate Note also that the distant modem must be set for remote reporting of Eb No with Change Rx Demod AUPC Change Tx Modulator AUPC MAX Menu Set AUPC max positive delta power 3 5dB 0 25 0dB dB Yes Change Tx Modulator AUPC Max Menu This allows the maximum addit
129. B performance improvement over 7 8 rate Viterbi and for links where the transponder space is fixed to accommodate a 7 8 Viterbi coded link switching from Viterbi to Turbo will give useable 1dB improvement It also provides significantly lower latency than subsequent Turbo schemes which offer a better 7 8 rate performance at the cost of significant latency If you re stuck with a channel that can only accommodate 7 8 Rate FEC then this will give you an extra dB over using Viterbi P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 67 6 6 12 Change Tx Rx Mod Demod REED SOLOMON Menu This option is only available if the INTELSAT Reed Solomon feature is available standard P300 IBS and above INTRODUCTION TO REED SOLOMON Reed Solomon FEC is a powerful scheme wrapped around the normal inner FEC which may be used to correct the remaining errors from the normal Turbo Viterbi Sequential or TCM inner FEC The code rate is specified by three values K and t These have a fixed relationship of n 2t so t is simply half the difference between n and A typical code rate may be specified such as n k t 126 112 7 RS error correction works on codewords blocks of bytes where is the length of the block of which there are bytes of original data and 2t bytes of error correction information The RS codec can correct any bytes in error up to a value of t so in the above example with t 7 u
130. BPSK requires P300 Tx amp Rx spectrum invert QPSK is OK without With Sequential FEC BPSK requires P300 Rx spectrum invert and both Tx amp Rx spectrum invert in QPSK OQPSK Compatibility Mode Software gt V2 12 Refer to the OQPSK Primer on page 66 before reading this section When using Offset QPSK OQPSK modulation the in phase and quadrature components of each symbol do not change together as with QPSK but instead one component is delayed by half a symbol compared to the other In order to be in accordance with general industry practises Paradise Datacom has changed which of the two components is delayed with respect to the other between the earliest of the P400 series modems and ongoing P400 P300 production If you experience difficulty interworking in OQPSK mode between equipments switch on this mode at the transmit end of the link which fails Inmarsat ISDN Backup Software gt V2 14 This additional feature allows an external equipment to provide an ISDN backup of the satellite circuit should the link fail or degrade beyond user set Eb No or BER parameters The ISDN backup being initiated from one end of the link only in response to a failure in either direction by the Receiver Ready line of the interface card being dropped Exact additions are A backward alarm is transmitted if the user Rx BER or Rx Eb No pass the user set thresholds normally these only activate the deferred alarm This signals the remote end that the
131. BUFFER SLIP Enter Slip interval below which Deferred alarm is raised DISTANT Eb No Option AUPC nter DISTANT Eb no threshold below which Deferred alarm is raised USER OPTIONS Alarm Thresholds Operation READ THE MANUAL 2 SEE SHEET 4 Analog o p CONTRAST ADJUST Interactive contrast adjustment P400 series only TIME DATE Interactive adjustment DISPLAY Contrast tatus display STATUS DISPLAY Upgrade mesages Traffic status SEE SHEET 7 Config summary UPGRADE MESSAGES isplay Use SETUP INITIAL CONFIG Inhibit S EE S HEET 2 to set check all relevant parameters proceed YES AGC OUTPUT Option Monitor AGC 2 digit numeric ent SEE SHEET 3 See handbook appendix E P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 42 6 2 2 Full Menu Structure Sheet 2 7 Main Monitor Info DEMOD PERFORMANCE Display of Eb No BER into inner FEC BER into RS decoder BER on FAW Final user BER SEE SHEET 1 TERRESTRIAL BER Display of BER into Tx Drop Mux BER of Insert Mux bearer CARRIER ID s Display of Station ID Channel ID Spare ID MONITOR Demod performance Terrestrial BER Carrier ID s Distant Eb No amp BER AUPC BUC DISTANT Eb No amp BER Display of parameters from distant modem Eb No Final BER MAIN Status Change Monitor Info Log Test AUPC STATUS Display of Current amp target Eb No AUPC delta power on subsequent screen Delta power
132. Change Terr Intfc Control Lines Active Screen 3 6 8 3 Change Terr intfc CARD SPECIFIC These screens are used for interfaces which have interface specific requirements such as the 64kbps G 703 interface With the standard P1440 interface this option is not shown on the Change Terr Int fc menu P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 98 6 9 CHANGE REM M amp C MENU Remote M amp C Local 1 Configure 2 Remote 3 Local Rem M amp C timeout 120s Change Rem M amp C Menu This menu allows the remote M amp C port to be configured and control of the unit switched between local and remote There are many different thoughts on how local remote switching should be provided The text Rem M amp C timeout 1206s is only displayed if Give Away is selected on the menu described below it indicates that the Local option is not available until the timeout which counts down when no remote M amp C messages are received has expired If Take Away is selected on the menu described below then there is no timeout and the user may take local control at any time 6 9 1 Local Control TAKE AWAY GIVE AWAY Selection Under SERVICE 0 FACTORY PARAMETERS REMOTE M amp Cthe following menu is provided Rem M amp C philosophy 1 Takeaway 2 Giveaway M amp C Timeout Service Factory Parameters Remote M amp C Menu TAKEAWAY When selected the operator can switch between Local and Remote control at will using the L
133. Closed Net plus ESC IF Ports External reference Modulator Specifications Output Power Level Output Level Stability Transmit Filtering Filter Implementation Occupied Bandwidth Recommended Channel Spacing Phase and Amplitude Accuracy Carrier Suppression Output Phase Noise Output Frequency Stability Synchronised to framing per IESS 309 With RS Coding synchronised to RS overhead No RS Coding non Turbo V 35 self synchronising No RS Coding Turbo Synchronous 2 1 sync to TPC block alignment 32kbps or above synchronised to ESC overhead Less than 32kbps as per Closed Network V 35 scrambler has CCITT INTELSAT FDC amp Linkabit modes BNC female 50Q amp 750 Return loss 18dB typical Clocking only 1kHz 10MHz in 1kHz steps See Station Reference Clocking amp Frequency 10MHz 0dBm 1dB P300 0 to 25dBm continuously variable in 0 1dB steps from front panel or via remote control P310 5 to 30dBm continuously variable in 0 1dB steps from front panel or via remote control 0 5dB at 25 C 10 C 6th order Butterworth aperture and group delay equalised INTELSAT IESS compliant 257 tap FIR digital filter 1 2 times symbol rate 1 4 times symbol rate 2 degrees 0 2dB max 30dBc min lt 1 0 degrees RMS double sided 100Hz to 100kHz As per internal reference from 0 C to 50 C See Internal Reference below P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook
134. DEM CONNECTOR PINOUTS 179 REMOTE M amp C RS485 RS232 CONNECTOR 179 Interconnecting Devices Using R8485 180 TIEOR TINTEREAGE iren x E RR RE es lta th aa 181 ALARMS amp AGC CONNECTOR er hr 182 ASYNG ESG CONNEGTORH iip secgeaitessUetelil Ad e ee stand poeta 183 ESC AUX amp BACKWARD ALARMS CONNECTOR 185 APPENDIX C UPGRADE INFORMATION 189 APPENDIX C1 MODEM CAPABILITIES amp UPGRADES 190 APPENDIX C2 FEATURE SCREENS 000 000 e cece eee teen n 190 APPENDIX FEATURES ON DEMO EXPIRE SOON 194 APPENDIX C4 ASYMMETRIC LOOP TIMING lssssssen RR eee eens 194 APPENDIX C5 UPGRADE AVAILABLE 194 APPENDIX C6 FEATURES NOT AVAILABLE 194 APPENDIX D REMOTE M amp C eee eee Re Reg ea 195 REMOTE M amp G PROTOCOL 2 km aor Mean hm RE en pax Da Apron RAO 195 SUMMA a oed ed ow tos AG LU o UAR UU o n ee uo UU e 195 Character Format Baud Rate 195 Electrical Interface siye ia E eee ete 195 Message inucturenn eis ec et RIDE eine Bea
135. Datacom products have always provided a Data Marginal warning where the incoming data phase is monitored with respect to the clock The Modem shows a Data Marginal warning on the front panel if the data changes at the instant where it should be stable and is sampled by the modem which would otherwise cause data errors with no fault indication On the P300 this is taken a stage further and if the data phase is incorrect with respect to the normal clock edge then the modem automatically switches to the other clock edge to sample the data A Data Marginal warning is only issued momentarily as the phase switches If regular Data Marginal warnings appear for example in the traffic log then the Tx data and clock phase are drifting causing the modem to switch repeatedly and you will be getting regular data errors This is not a modem fault it is a warning of a situation causing data errors of which you would otherwise be unaware For this reason it is not possible to simply disable the Data Marginal alarm instead you must investigate the external equipment to find why the Tx clock data phase is changing The Tx clocking menu is as follows Tx clock mode 1 Tx Clock In 2 Internal 3 Rx ref Sat Change Tx Clocking Menu This selects the clock source used to generate the signal towards the satellite The options are TX CLOCK The external clock supplied on the interface Clock In line will be used see interface card detail
136. Doc ref p p300 d wp p300h p3x0h wpd amp pdf Installation amp Operating Handbook for P300 Series Satellite Modems including P310 L Band and Turbo FEC options Handbook Issue 2 02 dated 23 February 2004 Covering software features up to and including V3 84 CE EN 55022 Class B EN 55024 EN 60950 WA PARADISE DATACOM Paradise Datacom Ltd Paradise Datacom LLC 1 Wheaton Road 1012 E Boal Avenue Witham Essex CM8 3TD England Boalsburg PA 16827 U S A Phone 01376 515636 Int 44 1376 Phone 814 466 6275 Int 1 814 Fax 01376 533764 Fax 814 466 3341 http www paradisedata com IMPORTANT NOTE THE INFORMATION AND SPECIFICATIONS CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT SUPERSEDE ALL PREVIOUSLY PUBLISHED INFORMATION CONCERNING THIS PRODUCT PARADISE DATACOM maintains a continuing programme of product improvement and therefore reserves the right to change specifications without notice Table of Contents EMC ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY NOTICES 7 did EMG apesan ea elencate aaa aca a tata as an aaa states afa ec ai et ea nece Stn tA RR dep a e t RUE cea 7 12 SAFETY uo iR ED rar era an oe DOCE A CUR UN RR AR US CPU ANS 7 INTRODUGTION 5 5 rro quu eru Pom T tea pue Iu uS Sure s etd 9 2 1 OVERVIEW uei eerte es eher hia e es ah T ee a d 9 2 2 P300 SERIES FEATURES s oce Ran Ra OR n nn fa 10 2 9 FEATURE SUMMARY o 1 nee ORO RR alah bce Real tar
137. E Ready In line TR switch to the inactive state It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line RS by selecting Change Tx Modulator Carrier RTS Controlled P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 168 P1440 IN V 35 MODE The P1440 is the standard interface supplied with the P300 Series Modem If V 35 is selected under Change Terr Intfc Electrical then the following interface description applies Min F V 35 Circuit 25 pin 37 pin Electrical Old Style Re Signal Description N Numb Level Winch q ame umber A B A B evels inchester ve E v Data In SD 103 14 P amp S Sig Valid In RTS 105 RS232 C FRANN IEA Sig Accpt d Out A s b pr 7 ES H v bus nel sevauon aso s Ee H rH iu acco TEH The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum rate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to
138. ETUP INITIAL CONFIG has been performed once can STATUS be selected from the main menu This ensures operation is not selected until all critical parameters are specified Setup 1 Initial Config 2 Check Memories 3 Store 4 Recall 5 Erase Setup Menu Other options on the SETUP menu are CHECK Which allow the setup to be checked and looks for unusual combinations of configuration parameters eg IBS with rate FEC coding multiple scramblers selected Check does not prevent operation with any configuration it is simply a convenience for the operator if there are configuration difficulties The Setup Check takes several seconds to run and displays a message when the process is complete MEMORIES STORE RECALL and ERASE which allows access to the configuration memories of the Modem The current configuration can be stored another recalled or an old stored configuration deleted This provides a fast method of switching between multiple configurations when required CHANGE MENU It is under the Change menu that individual parameters may be varied after an initial SETUP INITIAL CONFIG has been performed If the unit is operating under Remote M amp C the options on the change screen are limited to only the remote M amp C configuration amp the time date Normal Change Screen local control Change 1 Tx 2 Rx 3 Terr Intfc 4 Rem M amp C 5 User Opt 6 Time Date 7 BUC LNB Change Menu local control Option 7 BUC LNB onl
139. FACTORY PARAMETERS Menu Factory 1 Serial 01564 2 Debug 0 3 RemCont Giveaway 120s 4 Watchdog Service Factory Parameters Menu The options are SERIAL DEBUG REM M amp C WATCHDOG This menu allows the serial number to be both viewed and edited Used for Paradise internal procedures only Setting Debug to a value other than 0 is very likely to slow down the operation of the unit This option is used to set the timeout required before local control can be taken if the unit is in remote mode This is covered extensively in section Change Rem M amp C Menu on page 99 This provides an option to test the watchdog timer The watchdog timer is a timer which is regularly reset by the processor Should it ever reach its set time then the processor has failed to reset it and probably crashed Testing the Watchdog timer therefore will cause the unit to reset and corrupt both Tx and Rx traffic for a few seconds P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 132 7 MENU SCREENS FOR SPECIALIST OPTIONS The following sets of menu definitions are shown in this separate section in order not to complicate the earlier section dealing with basic menu operation 7 1 CUSTOM FRAMING MENUS These features are only available if the Custom Features feature is available together with the corresponding IBS or IDR options standard on P300 TCM Refer also to the section Closed Network Plus ESC via the Custom Service
140. Handbook Page 143 8 4 CHOOSING OPTIMUM CUSTOM VALUES OF RS N amp K Complete variable code rate Reed Solomon is available if both the INTELSAT Reed Solomon and Custom Features features are both available Note that there is nothing magic about the INTELSAT values except that they were approved by INTELSAT They were chosen because one modem manufacturer could not generate clocks which were not a multiple of 8kHz and these non optimum values make the satellite clock an 8kHz step Where maximum error correction capability is required chose t as high as possible eg 10 and choose as low as possible eg 60 to maximise the number of bytes than can be corrected per codeword without adding too much overhead In this extreme example it can correct one byte in six t n but the overhead is 50 overhead n k and k n 2t so k 40 gives overhead 60 40 Optimum values may in certain applications mean minimum delay particularly at low data rates and the final paragraph of this section deals with this aspect Due to the synchronisation method used for the interleaver amp de interleaver INTELSAT specified on 2 codewords blocks of n data bytes out of 16 the error correction capability is slightly reduced by the equivalent of t 1 It is therefore best to avoid choosing a very low value of t so this intermittent reduction in error correcting capability is minimised Note that in theory error correction codes 100 90 5 and 200
141. High Rate async channel Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Define IBS ESC Menu OFF HIGH RATE ASYNC The ESC port is disabled The ESC Channel provides the Paradise High Rate ESC which in a later menu may be configured to be compatible with earlier products such as the P230 P230D l and P1300 P1361 combination This provides an async channel with maximum Baud rate approximately the terrestrial rate 23 eg usable rates of 2400 Baud at 64 kbps and 9600 Baud at 256 kbps One of the prime uses for this ESC channel is to link it to the M amp C port of the Modem software controlled internal link and provide remote M amp C of the distant equipment from the local end of the link P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 78 The following menu s depend on the selections made for the Aux amp ESC channels If the ESC port is OFF and the Aux port is set to Sync Channel then the following menu selects the overhead assigned to the Aux port MAXIMUM CUSTOM Sync Aux circuit o h usage 1 Maximum 2 Custom Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Define IBS Aux usage Menu The maximum 21 32nds of the overhead is allocated to the Aux channel This comprises TS16 TS32 bits 1 amp 5 8 and TS48 Giving an Aux port synchronous data rate of 4 375 of the main data rate If used asynchronously ie oversampled as with the INTELSAT definition the async rate may be up to 196 of the main data channel rate ie approx 600 Ba
142. IBS IDR AH5 none none TE Multiframe Backward Alarm in PCM Multiplex eg G 732 TS16 frame 0 of multiframe 0000 1111 Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR AH6 none none Actions To Satellite SA AIS all ones framed and scrambled ad subject to RS coding if active Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR AK1 AD1 AD1 SB Frame Backward Alarm in IBS SMS this is direct in IDR or when multiple backward alarms are active it corresponds to the Rx Summary Fault Output which is externally patched back into the Backward Alarm inputs Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR AK2 AD2 AD2 SC AIS in CAS signalling carried in IBS SMS TS16 TS48 over satellite Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR AKS AD3 none SD Multiframe Backward Alarm in IBS SMS TS16 TS48 over satellite TS16 frame 0 of CAS multiframe 0000 1111 Equivalent to SMS IBS IDR none none none Actions Other BM BUC Mutes not a modem function Carrier Mute Tx carrier is switched off TF Tx Flow control the CTS Clear To Send line is switched off RF Rx Flow control the RR Receiver Ready line is switched off Notes 1 In response to a CAS multiframe sync loss from the terrestrial port the appropriate alarm to raise would appear to be the CAS MF backward alarm However as the bearer is normally looped there is no point in raising this alarm as a CAS multiframe is required to convey it ie the presence of the fault prevents the return alarm being sent There are only two circumstance where the return bear
143. IESS 310 INTELSAT IDR IDR Option Framing to IESS 308 amp IESS 310 Custom Framing Custom Features feature Provides custom framing based on IBS or IDR formats For example the use of 16 kbps ADPCM on the IDR audio ESC channels providing an IDR carrier with all normal facilities but with 32kbps of overhead spare for continuous traffic quality BER monitoring using built in PRBS tester with automatic results logging or external BERT Deframer includes extended threshold operation which improves performance when used with Reed Solomon in very poor BER conditions where a single uncorrectable RS codeword can contain enough corrupt frame alignment words to knock an INTELSAT specified deframer out of frame sync INTELSAT Reed Solomon Codec amp Custom Features Format Code Rate Processing Delay Custom Features Concatenated Reed Solomon outer codec to IESS 308 310 Default n t 126 112 7 depth 4 automatically switching to 225 205 10 depth 4 for 1544 kbps IDR mode 219 201 9 depth 4 for 2048 kbps IDR mode amp TCM lt 1544 kbps and 219 201 9 depth 8 for TCM gt 1544 kbps Combined Encoder amp Decoder 8 x 2n k 60 Combined Interleaver amp De interleaver 8 x n x depth Calculate delay time using data rate including RS overhead When available allows arbitrary selection of n amp to provide fully variable code rate n 60 255 K n 2 to n 20 step 2 Interleaving depth o
144. IS and the modem is set to ignore AIS Check that the AIS detector is not disabled with Change User Opt Operation Actions AIS ALSO there is an option to make the modem re seek frame sync if CRC sync is lost Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial PCM Bearer CRC CRC Frame Acq Check the modem is not set to expect a CRC and forcing frame re acquisition if CRC is lost but there is no CRC on the PCM signal Tx Fault TS16 MF sync lost on Tx input The modem only seeks TS16 Multiframe sync when the Tx baseband is set to use the Drop mux in a T TB TE SC G 732 mode and CAS signalling has been selected or 2048k IBS G 732 096 overhead mode with Note 1 CAS is enabled Check that a CAS multiframe is present on the PCM signal applied to the modem ie terrestrial TS16 contains the 16 frame multiframe sequence P300H P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 217 Other Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Tx Fault CRC sync lost on Tx input The modem only seeks Cyclic Redundancy Code CRC sync when the Tx baseband is set to use the Drop mux in G 732 mode or 2048k IBS G 732 096 overhead mode and when set by the user to process CRC s Change User Opt Operation Terrestrial PCM Bearer CRC Process If CRC sync is permanently lost check if a CRC is present on the PCM signal o CECE Tx Fault Dropped data is all ones AIS The specific timeslots dropped by the Dr
145. Installation and Operating Handbook Page 141 These require careful consideration based on the exact situation If you have questions relating to this subject and are willing to at least draw a diagram of the system you are implementing then you are welcome to contact us by fax for advice for your exact application 8 2 3 Determining Buffer Size Use the following calculation to determine the buffer size required for any application If Lc is the local clock accuracy e g 1 x 10 and Rc is the remote clock accuracy e g 1 x 10 and Ms is the Minimum slip period in days e g 40 days then the required Plesiochronous Buffer size middle to end in seconds is Bs Ms x 24 x 60 x 60 x Lc Re Simplifying allowing a factor of two end to end buffer not middle to end and allowing 2mS for the Doppler shift gives Bs 002 172800 x Ms x Lc Rc Seconds So using the example figures above gives 0 00898 seconds so 9ms is required to absorb the plesiochronous effects To this you must add any Doppler requirement ie 2ms for each satellite hop P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 142 8 3 PARTIAL INSERT AND MULTIDESTINATIONAL WORKING Partial Insert is only available if the Extended feature is available standard on P300 TCM In a typical scenario there may be a 2048kbps incoming carrier containing say 8 timeslots 512kbps for this destination When set to All the full 2048kbps has to be re
146. O RELATION to the terrestrial timeslots from which the data was dropped at the Tx site It should be read as First through Nth 64 kbps channel of the total sent For example in a 256kbps incoming carrier the Rx data is referred to as TS 1 TS 4 first second third and fourth 64kbps channel in the 256kbps whether it was originally dropped from timeslots 1 2 3 amp 4 or timeslots 13 17 19 amp 23 At the receive site whether partial insert is active or not there is no concept of Dropped timeslots there is only first 64kbps second 64kbps etc When he selection of data for this destination is complete the Insert Mux option on the Change Rx Baseband menu continues as with the Drop Mux option on the Change Tx Baseband menu The total number of timeslots inserted must match the number of 64kbps channels selected for this destination on the Sat TS screen above P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 88 6 7 3 6 7 4 Change Rx BUFFER CLOCKING Menu Refer also to the following applications sections for helpful notes 8 1 Doppler amp Plesiochronous Buffering on page 140 8 2 Determining Clocking Schemes amp Buffer Size on page 141 and P1440 in X 21 Mode on page 173 Buffer Clocking 1 Station clock input 2 Rx clock source 3 Buffer Size Change Rx Buffer Clocking Menu These three options lead onto the following three Menus Change Rx Buffer Clocking STATION CLOCK Menu F
147. ON _ ON 533 234 607 04 H 91 lt eH Z 890 lt eH 9 4 921 lt eH v ape lt eH 2 1 ON ON ogg4 PHY 934 50701 jj pegiusuej e Sq pepooeg LY 7 8 Sq popooog 8j 4 8 47 y Sq pepooed ALY v q pepooeg eje reyes 2334 Aq peonpei ejeJ ejeq S019 sjoeJ100 eyes ejep 19pooep 234 ogn NOL ayes jepooep 234 _ ON beg A je pesseJdxe esiou eubig 9333 ejes ea an pepooeq 243 xooqpueH Surje1od pue uonryyeysuy wopo saas 00 d Sdo gporz lt PN lt _ joquikg syg 607 OL S olz 9 Zrv 8 gpe MSdOO 4SdO 9 ON _ ON B sugg 607 OL ES joquis 4q peniuusueJ 4Sd8 joqui s Z 4SdOO 4SdO joqui s peniuusueJ 599 uoneinpouil y uo Buipuedep sq sjueseJdeiJ joquiAs uoe3 ej amp 1jq oN pesseJdxe esiou jeuBis 33 y ig pennusueil SP N N 0 ape aPor s ae HO00 d c gps 9 ejduiex3 NAN 0 9Jnseo N D Kieununs nrw Oh 20106 N Ajlsuap Jamod asion _ ON y loquiAs Jed Bjeu3 S3 S3 euiuuejeg riis tem
148. P300 VSAT level from a higher level only 5 Reduce the functionality to P300 IBS level from a higher level only 6 Reduce the functionality to P300 IDR level from a higher level only P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 166 APPENDIX A DATA INTERFACE INFORMATION GENERAL Unlike previous Paradise Datacom products the standard interface of the P300 Series Modem DOES NOT SIMPLY UNPLUG Instead to reduce the cost of the modem the interface is built as a standard part of the main PCB and includes RS422 V 35 and RS232 modes An additional G 703 interface may be fitted internally to provide front panel selection between RS422 V 35 RS232 and G 703 IT IS POSSIBLE TO FIT OTHER INTERFACES and in fact the whole Paradise P14xx range can be utilised in the P300 series modem However prior to fitting another interface the case must be opened the standard interface snapped off from the main PCB and a 48 pin connector fitted to the main PCB to accept the plug in cards It is advisable to return the equipment to the factory for this to be done although itis perfectly possible in the field 1 1 OPERATION The standard RS422 V 35 and RS232 interface does not require any resistor packs to be unplugged for 1 1 redundancy operation HOWEVER the G 703 option has a switch to set the mode Normal or 1 1 and the E1 G 703 card a second switch to select 1200 750 operation The Normal 1 1 switch on the G 703 option doubles the
149. PENDIX B MODEM CONNECTOR PINOUTS REMOTE M amp C RS485 RS232 CONNECTOR The selection of RS232 or RS485 must be made via the front panel Refer to Appendix D for an overview of the Remote M amp C protocol Connector type 9 Pin D Female pin compatible with SA bus Pin Direction Paradise RS232 i Ea Master B to modem ie RX B ra Slave B from modem SRD TX B EN Shield Gnd SG Shield Gnd Shield Gnd ra Slave A from modem ac TX A Tx data 231 NEM EM Pins 1 amp 5 are both grounded on the modem ie Shield and Ground are interchangeable il See also the M amp C Appnote available from www paradisedata com P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 179 Interconnecting Devices Using RS485 This page summarises the RS485 M amp C ports of many different equipments from multiple vendors and explains how to interconnect them all for M amp C operation Connect any of the following devices in parallel on a daisy chain cable for multi device operation Shige 2 5 12 and 18 1 Master A to product E 15 2 2 7 9 5 Master B to product 4 14 16 9 10 6 3 5 2 8 Slave A from product 15 13 3 2 7 2 5 9 gt Notes 1 For all Async ESC channels carrying M amp C data for distant end M amp C via the satellite the cabling depends on wh
150. Page 33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1E 1 Test Conditions FEC Viterbi Rate 128 kbps QPSK Ideal BPSK QPSK 140 0000 MHz 1E 2 RX 140 0000 MHz V 35 Scrambling Input Level 60 dBm 1E 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 Rate 7 8 1 8 R 4 Spec limit alea R1 2 Coding 1E 9 Eb No in dB P300 Modem Series Error Probability versus Eb No Viterbi Decoding P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 34 1E 1 1E 2 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 Ideal BPSK QPSK Spec limit R1 2 Coding Rate 3 4 9 10 11 Test Conditions FEC Sequential Rate 64 kbps QPSK TX 140 0000 MHz RX 140 0000 MHz V 35 Scrambling Input Level 40 dBm Rate 7 8 Eb No in dB 12 P300 Modem Series Error Probability versus Eb No Sequential Decoding at 64kbps P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 35 1E 1 1E 2 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Test Conditions FEC Sequential Rate 2048kbps QPSK Ideal BPSK QPSK TX 140 0000 MHz RX 140 0000 MHz V 35 Scrambling Input Level 50 dBm Sp
151. R Menu 65 6 6 9 Change Tx Rx Modulator IF FREQUENCY Menu 65 6 6 10 Change Tx Rx Modulator MODULATION Menu 65 6 7 6 8 6 9 OFFSET QPSK OQPSK PRIMER 66 6 6 11 Change Tx Rx Modulator FEC 66 6 6 12 Change Tx Rx Mod Demod REED SOLOMON Menu 68 INTRODUCTION TO REED SOLOMON 68 6 6 13 Change TX Rx Mod Demod SCRAMBLER Menu 69 6 6 14 Change Tx Modulator CARRIER 71 6 6 15 Change Tx Modulator POWER LEVEL 71 6 6 16 Change Tx Rx Modulator SPECTRUM INVERT Menu 72 NOTE ON BPSK SPECTRUM INVERSION 72 6 6 17 Change Tx Modulator AUPC Software gt V2 12 72 6 6 18 Change Tx Modulator AUPC MODE Menu 73 6 6 19 Change Tx Modulator AUPC MAX Menu 73 6 6 20 Change Tx Modulator AUPC MIN Menu 74 6 6 21 Change Tx Modulator AUPC SLEW RATE Menu 74 6 6 22 Change Tx Modulator AUPC TARGET EB NO Menu 74 6 6 28 Change Tx Modulator AUPC TOLERANCE Menu
152. RARY The letters shown represent the features that are temporarily enabled Temporary features along with how long the temporary features will remain enabled even if not required by the current configuration To determine if any of the features are in fact required for current configuration see FEATURES IN USE above FEATURES HARDWARE The letters shown represent the features that the hardware can support ie the capabilities of the hardware not all of which might be enabled in the software Features which the hardware is capable of but which are not software enabled are listed under upgrades below Note this list excludes features which require optional plug in boards or chips eg IDR or Sequential which are only available if the options are fitted FEATURES UPGRADES The first screen shows all the information required about this unit to enable a Feature Code to be supplied Record the information on this screen model serial number software and IDENT and contact the supplier or Paradise Datacom directly A subsequent screen shows letters representing the features that the hardware can support but which are not enabled in the software These are therefore features that can be gained without hardware changes by entering a Feature Code issued by Paradise Other features are available but may require a hardware upgrade ie a chip to be plugged in or a PCB to be added P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Pa
153. RdModQry Config gt ack Change TxBBRd Query TxBBQry Config ack Change TxModRd Query RdModQry Config gt ack Change gt UnitCfgRd Query UnitCfgQry Config gt ack Change AUPCRd Query gt ack Change TestResRd Query TestResQry Status UnitResRd Query UnitResQry Status UnitStatRd Query UnitStatQry Status gt QFaultRd Query QFaultQry Status UnitTestRd Query UnitTestQry Status gt ack Change Buffer ESC functions Descramblers Station clock current config or config memories Configuration of the Rx demodulator functions ie modulation IF frequency Reed Solomon parameters FEC coding amp FEC rate Spectrum inversion Sweep width current config or config memories Configuration of the Tx Baseband section ie Drop Mux Framer Clocking ESC functions Scramblers current config or config memories Configuration of the Tx modulator functions ie modulation IF frequency Reed Solomon parameters FEC coding amp FEC rate Spectrum inversion current config config memories The parameters which affect both Tx amp Rx paths including user alarm thresholds all user settings etc current config or config memories Settings related to Auto Uplink Power Control AUPC contains parameters for 16 AUPCQry Config both Tx and Rx paths including performance figures for the distant end of the link Test results from the internal PRBS tester The results of inte
154. SAT the Baud rate is limited to approximately 25 33 of the synchronous clock rate In IDR modes the Aux port provides either 32 or 64kbps data access in place of either one or both of the 32kbps ADPCM audio channels Typically this would be used synchronously but if required it could be used asynchronously amp oversampled giving maximum baud rates of approx 9600 Baud in place of one audio channel or 19200 Baud in place of both Audio channels P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 186 Audio Ports Pin Number Description 38 Tx Audio Channel 1 in A 39 Tx Audio Channel 1 in 40 Tx Audio Channel 2 in A 41 Tx Audio Channel 2 in B 34 Rx Audio Channel 1 out A 35 Rx Audio Channel 1 out B 36 Rx Audio Channel 2 out 37 Rx Audio Channel 2 out B 50 Ground All ports are 600Q with levels set independently from the front panel of 7dBm to 16dBm Audio is encoded as 32kbps ADPCM or 16kbps ADPCM in some custom modes lui The Audio ports be used in two applications In IBS modes if set to emulate a P1348 P1448 Audio Data mux card the ESC ports provide the equivalent of the two audio ports on the P1348 P1448 ie can transmit 64kbps 2 audio channels or 128kbps 2 audio channels plus 64 kbps data from main data port In IDR modes these are used to access the IDR Audio ESC channels One or both Audio ESC s may be dropped in favour of 32 or 64kbps access to the channel by the Aux p
155. SC Aux BA BACKWARD ALARMS Menu This screen is used to configure the four backward alarm inputs used in multi destinational IDR or for lower rate multi destinational operation in some of the Custom IBS modes Back Alm 1234 E Ext A Auto O OK 1 EEEE 2 AEEE 4 AAAA Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Backward Alarm Menu This screen is at first difficult to understand but is relatively simple It allows the four backward alarm input to be mapped in certain ways without any external backward alarm patching On the screen the letters mean as follows E Ext A Auto O OK External patch the state from the backward alarm connector on the rear panel connector will be sent open circuit OK Ground fail Auto the alarm will be sourced internally from the summary Rx fail signal The alarm will always send the OK condition So the menu choices are as follows EEEE AEEE AOOO AAAA All four alarms report the state from the Backward Alarm connector on the rear of the equipment Use when transmitting a multidestinational carrier but where the carrier we are receiving does not correspond to the destination allocated backward alarm channel 1 The Rx fail signals from the modems receiving the carriers from all the other destinations including this modems Rx fail signal must be externally patched into the corresponding external backward alarm inputs Alarm 1 is internally connected to the Rx Fail signal
156. SC facility 2400 Baud at 64kbps and the Aux channel either the INTELSAT low rate ESC facility 50 Baud at 64kbps or a variable rate synchronous Aux circuit However to use the Aux channel in a synchronous mode the IDR option must be fitted Without the IDR option which has separate ports for ESC amp Aux channels both ESC and Aux channels ie high rate async ESC amp INTELSAT low rate ESC cannot be used simultaneously In IDR Mode this port is not used as when the IDR option is fitted separate ESC and Aux ports on the IDR card replace this shared ESC Aux port Refer to the definitions of the ESC amp Aux ports on the 50 way IDR ESC Aux Backward Alarm connector on the following few pages SERIAL PORT FOR LOG PRINTING OR EMBEDDED M amp C UPDATE Update the embedded M amp C software See section 10 Boot Code Operation on page 165 For a description of updating the modems embedded M amp C software The lead described under PC connection below will be required to connect the modem to the PC Log Printing When the async port is used to print the traffic log it is set for 9600 Baud RS232 levels 8 data bits no parity one stop bit There are no serial configuration options although unlike previous products this port does now support XON XOFF flow control The printer carriage is assumed to be 80 columns wide PC Connection To connect the serial printer port to a standard PC serial port 25 pin D type female pins for the 9 pin
157. Signalling RBS Historically PCM bearers using Robbed Bit Signalling could not be used with Drop Insert as over standard IBS links the location of the signalling information ie which timeslots have a bit overwritten with signalling was lost Even with Timeslot ID Maintenance which preserved timeslot sequence and timeslot start end boundaries RBS was still lost To preserve RBS not only is TS ID maintenance required but also the timeslots required placing back into the correct frames within the terrestrial multiframe so in T1 D4 for example the timeslots containing the RBS are placed in frames 6 amp 12 of the terrestrial multiframe P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 210 INTELSATs IBS definition does not specify a mechanism to achieve this so the P300 equipped with the Extended D I feature standard on P300 TCM uses an extension of the Timeslot ID Maintenance scheme to provide RBS support with Drop Insert over thin route satellite links It does this by treating not just the timeslots from one frame as a group of N timeslots but the group from the whole terrestrial multiframe as a block within which timeslot identity has to be maintained In effect if two timeslots were dropped from T1 D4 and T1 ESF bearers with RBS support enabled although the aggregate data rate would be only 128kbps plus 6 7 overhead the frame and multiframe structure would be as to support N 24 and N 48 respectively N x 12 for D
158. Signalling Systems Introduction CCS CAS amp RBS on page 210 if required For G 732 bearer operation with the Extended D I feature available G 732 Chan Assoc Sig in TS16 1 Normal ignore 2 Transfer via sat o h Change Tx Rx Baseband Drop Insert CAS Menu NORMAL IGNORE TS16 does not contain CAS ie a terrestrial CAS multiframe and abcd signalling nibbles for each timeslot It is simply treated as a normal data timeslot and may be dropped inserted as with any other timeslot TRANSFER TS16 contains CAS and by implication a terrestrial multiframe in order to carry the CAS If selected the terrestrial multiframe will be acquired and CAS removed from replaced into the Drop Insert bearer The CAS will be conveyed transparently from end to end of the link within IBS or custom IBS overheads P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 59 For T1 D4 amp T1 ESF bearer operation with the Extended feature available T1 RBS over satellite 1zNormal or no RBS 2zMaintain RBS Change Tx Rx Baseband Drop Insert RBS Menu NORMAL OR NO RBS Robbed Bit Signalling RBS is not in operation or can be ignored MAINTAIN RBS Robbed Bit Signalling RBS is in use with the least significant bit of each timeslot being used for signalling in frames 6 amp 12 D4 or 6 12 18 24 ESF of the terrestrial multiframe When this option is selected the Drop Insert data is treated spe
159. The menu dialogue for this continues in section 6 6 5 on page 58 Other Function option is only shown if the IDR option is fitted as this includes the P1348 P1448 emulation mode standard on P300 IDR and above and the unit is set for IBS service It selects the two special modes of baseband operation which use the Audio ports normally used for the IDR audio ESC circuit as the main traffic data The unit can generate a 64kbps carrier comprising just the two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels or a 128kbps carrier comprising 64kbps data from the main data interface of the modem plus the two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels These modes are effectively an emulation of the popular P1348 P1448 voice data mux card used often in SNG applications The menu dialogue for this continues in section 6 6 6 on page 62 Change Tx Rx Baseband CONTINUOUS Menu Selecting CONTINUOUS DATA for the baseband interface leads to the following menu Enter the data rate with any leading zeroes required then press YES if the field is incomplete the unit will add the trailing zeroes to avoid having to enter three trailing zeroes when working with rates such as 64000 128000 etc When the field is full pressing YES enters the new data rate Set Tx terrestrial data rate 2048000bps Change Tx Rx Baseband Continuous Menu If the data rate is 2048000bps and the Modem is set for IBS SMS service or a Custom service based on IBS framing then this is a special conditi
160. UPC Feature v LAARS P300H AUPC via async ESC channel on IBS SMS IDR and Closed Net Plus ESC carriers ie overheads down to lt 1 Automatically Interleaves AUPC with distant end remote M amp C if active on ESC channel Monitor only option for distant end Eb No amp BER monitoring without power control Adds optional automatic regular logging of AUPC delta power and distant end Eb No Uni directional bi directional and broadcast Tx only self monitor modes P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 15 3 1 3 2 3 3 DESCRIPTION OPERATION The P300 Series modem are fully software controlled and with the exception of the optional G 703 interface option there are no links or switches used to configure the unit This enables all control and configuration to be performed either locally from the front panel or by remote M amp C Local control is by front panel keyboard and a large easy to read 80 character LCD display with clear intuitive menus for configuration and control All the set up parameters are stored in non volatile memory which will retain data for a minimum of 3 years with no power applied The receive and transmit functions of the Modem are independent so that they may be operated at a different data rates IF frequencies or different services if required Like all Paradise Datacom products the P300 Series includes a traffic log which stores the last 1000 events suitably time stamped I
161. a down to lt 1 to support the async ESC rate you set The exact overhead used can be viewed on the Info View Config Tx Rx screens It provides the following facilities gt Avariable rate ESC channel up to approx 70 of main channel rate An optional backward alarm facility At rates of 32kbps and above it provides a synchronous scrambler to replace the error multiplying V 35 normally used on closed network links f used with Drop Insert Yes Closed Network with Drop Insert it provides Timeslot ID maintenance across the link See the first few paragraphs of Appendix F where Backward Alarms Synchronous Scrambling and Timeslot ID Maintenance are discussed in relation to an IBS SMS carrier Note As the overhead affects the final composite framed data rate and the ESC amp backward alarm settings determine the required overhead then for two modems to interwork the following parameters must match on both pieces of equipment Main data rate Async ESC Baud Rate Character length and Parity Backward Alarm option ie both enabled or both disabled Baseband modes ie both Continuous Data or both Drop Insert P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 55 If No ESC is chosen then the dialogue ends here otherwise it proceeds with the Backward alarm option as follows Backward Alarm facility 1 Normal Back Alm 2 No Backward Alarm Change Tx Rx Service Closed Net Plus ESC BA M
162. a after the deframer back into the framer Tx input data is ignored Rx traffic continues as normal Incoming ESC amp Aux channel data is not looped back to the remote site P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 123 6 16 2 Test RF amp FEC Menu Test modes Off 1 Off 2 Tx CW 3 Tx Alt 1 0 4 RS corrections disable Test RF amp FEC Menu The test modes available are OFF All test modes are cancelled CW Selecting TX CW causes a pure carrier to be transmitted This is useful for evaluating phase noise and spurious but should not be used over a live satellite link IX ALT 1 0 Selecting TX alt 1 0 causes an alternating 1 0 1 0 pattern to be fed to the modulator at the symbol rate This produces two discrete frequencies to be generated spaced at symbol rate about the suppressed carrier This is useful for evaluating the carrier suppression of the modulator but should not be used over a live satellite link RS CORRECTIONS DISABLE This option allows the corrections being made by the RS decoder to be inhibited without the removal of the RS overhead This allows the true effect of the Reed Solomon codec to be seen without data rate changes which would affect Eb No and therefore the error rate 6 16 3 Test PSU S TEMP Menu PSU 5V 415V 15V 5V Temp Status 97 98 102 98 46C Test PSU s Temp Menu Power supply monitoring is only available if the Monitor AGC option
163. acom but the upgrade itself is performed in the field THE P300 SERIES MODEM HARDWARE The P300 Series is a massively redesigned and cost engineered version of our previous P480 modem It can provide every feature of the P480 except it has a lowest data rate of 4 8kbps not 2 4kbps but yet has only approximately one third the number of components It relies on the Paradise Datacom T1000 Baseband processing ASIC to provide many of its features To provide the cost reduction on the base unit ie the P300 VSAT wherever a feature required significant hardware the hardware has been made optional However as most of the processing is provided by the T1000 ASIC the optional hardware is limited to The Sequential FEC a plug in Xilinx chip or module The Turbo codec a plug in module The Viterbi TCM FEC a plug in chip normally fitted but can be removed for Sequential only operation The G 703 option card T1 or E1 variants The IDR ESC interface audio transformers PCM codecs full ESC amp Aux interfaces The Monitor AGC option Rx carrier level monitoring a constellation monitor point and a used defied analog output signal Although these are the only hardware options many of the features are considered options and are controlled by Feature Codes Basically this means the features can be turned on and off by a feature code entered into the front panel It may be difficult at first to understand the logic in providing the features w
164. ad 2047 25 1 2 1 compatible with common stand alone BER testers Display of error count amp average BER Automatic logging of average and 1 minute worst case BER at user specified intervals 1 min 24 hours Demodulator Rx carrier signal monitoring amp level display 5dB 0 10 V Analog output Signal level Eb No or Rx offset frequency Buffered constellation monitor port Sounder for audible feedback from keyboard Total 1000 entries P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 30 Entry Format Automatic Entries user defined interval Interrogation method Fault message with time amp date Separate entry when fault clears changes Average amp minimum Eb No Average amp minimum estimated user BER Buffer fill status Average amp 1 minute minimum measured BER from PRBS tester may run continuously through ESC or Aux channel for continuous traffic quality monitoring View on front panel LCD Print to rear panel serial port D gt type either all entries or just unprinted entries read over remote M amp C bus Auto Uplink Power Control AUPC Modes of operation Communication link User parameters Ancillary features Common Specifications Loopbacks Test Modes Alarm Relays Monitor of distant Eb No amp BER only Full distant Eb No maintenance amp Self monitor broadcast modes Unidirectional or bidirectional operation Utilises async ESC channel on IBS SMS
165. ad program winflash exe and select the serial port in use and the new firmware p300_s rec Both the PC and the modem will display the status of the download as it progresses The display should first indicate Waiting for PC to start erase cycle Boot Process Wait screen and will then proceed to Waiting for flash memory to Erase Boot Erase Wait screen When the Flash has erased which takes approximately 30 seconds the screen changes to P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 165 10 2 Programming Flash memory in progress FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF FF Banks VV VV Vue ee FF FF FF FF FF Boot Flash Program screen Each FF represents a blank 32k bank of memory The bar in the top right hand corner spins to show communications are continuing and the bar on each bank in turn spins first clockwise as information is loaded from the PC then anticlockwise as the bank is programmed When each bank is complete it shows either a tick when complete a if it is intentionally left empty or an X if it fails to program Any failure to program is automatically retried and an X should never reman on the screen Whilst the programming continues the PC report the status as messages are transferred and displays the percentage of the file that has been transferred When the programming is complete the unit prompts the operator as
166. adise Datacom Assuming however that the equipment has been received in perfect condition proceed with the installation of the equipment INTERFACE OPTIONS Unlike previous Paradise products this unit is fitted as standard with an interface that is AN INTEGRAL PART OF THE MODEM main board DO NOT TRY TO REMOVE THE CARD Customer specific interface options are available but these require the standard interface to be snapped off and a connector soldered to the board before the modem can accept other standard Paradise interface cards Note if fitting the additional G 703 options T1 or E1 that there are links and switches on the card and these should be set BEFORE the card is installed IF INTERFACE Connect the appropriate cables to the Transmit IF and Receive IF connectors at the rear of the unit Output power level can be controlled using the front panel menus The optimum input level for the demodulator is 45dBm 15aB POWER UP At power up the unit performs an initialisation procedure which lasts approximately 3 seconds If the unit was previously operational it will enter operating mode If the unit was previously non operational then the main menu will be displayed During the power up phase the unit will display the product number P300 with a V amp S suffix indicating the presence of the Viterbi and or Sequential codec plus the unit serial number The user should then select SETUP INITIAL CONFIG to define every parameter
167. an may be selected to be temperature controlled or permanently active ie the fact that it is not running does not indicate it has failed Use the test menu to display the internal unit temperature if in doubt the fan comes on at 26 C and off at 24 C Station Clock This connector is a 75O BNC female which accepts a 1 10MHz signal either a square wave of gt 1V p p eg a G 703 para 10 synchronising clock or a sinusoid at a power level of OdBm or greater An alternative Station Clock signal at RS422 interface levels can be applied to the Async ESC connector Either signal can be used by the modem as a reference for the receive output clock the Station Clock does not have to be the same rate as the data as an internal PLL converts between rates In addition if the Rx Clocking is set to use the Station Clock the Tx Clocking is set to Rx then the Station Clock also sources the internally generated Tx Clock Tx amp Rx data rates are independent Finally if a 10MHz signal is applied this signal may also be used in place of the internal reference for the Tx and Rx IF synthesisers 1 1 Redundancy connector The Modem has a built in 1 for 1 redundancy controller which connects to the corresponding port of another Modem via this 9 pin male D type connector A complete 1 1 redundancy system requires only two modems a 1 1 control cable on this port a data split Y cable and passive splitters combiners for the IF ports or
168. and SA bus Full details of the remote M amp C protocols and messages is provided in the Remote M amp C section in Appendix D NOTE Remote monitoring is possible with the selected protocol if the protocol is not set to OFF Remote control is only possible if the protocol is not Off and control has been selected as Remote on the Change Remote M amp C menu The options available here are RS232 or RS485 RS232 is only usable for a direct connection between a single device and a PC RS485 is required when more than one slave device is connected to the remote M amp C bus Again see the Remote M amp C section for complete details of the electrical interface The remote M amp C Baud Rate is selectable again see the Remote M amp C section for complete details of suitable Baud Rates for each protocol The bus address must be specified The valid range for the Paradise FDC protocol is 1 255 for the SA bus protocol the valid range of address is 49 to 111 31H to 6FH P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 100 6 10 CHANGE USER OPT MENU User options 1 Alarm thresholds 2 Operation 3 Display 4 Analog o p Change User Opt Menu This screen allows access to all the user options which are described in the following paragraphs 6 10 1 Change User Opt THRESHOLDS Menu Thresholds 1 Final BER 1 0E 5 2 Demod Eb No 6 0 dB 3 Buffer slip 24 hrs 4 DISTANT Eb No 8 5 dB Change User Opt Thresholds Menu This s
169. and looped testing will work but it can still be difficult to get your head round it It is much easier with no loopback and the 1 1 pair talking to a third modem P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 164 10 10 1 BOOT CODE OPERATION FLASH SOFTWARE UPDATE The Modem software is contained in a FLASH EPROM and can be updated without opening the equipment through the serial port on the Async ESC connector It is not even necessary to remove the equipment from the rack BUT it is necessary to route the traffic via another modem as loading the software requires a processor reset and will affect the traffic To access the Boot Menu power the unit up whilst holding in the MAIN key and the following menu will Serial Flash Update 1 Start Process 2 Reboot be displayed Boot Menu Option 2 allows the unit to continue as normal Option 1 leads onto the following menu Connect PC to serial port Press YES ENTER when connected Boot Start Process Menu At this point the serial cable supplied with the equipment should be connected between the PC ands the modems ESC connector then the YESkey pressed This leads onto the following menu Waiting for communications with PC Press YES ENTER key to abandon Boot Comms Start screen The bar in the top right hand corner spins whilst it waits for serial communications to begin On the PC under Windows start the downlo
170. ange Terr Intfc Electrical Menu Line Length if T1 G 703 This screen allows the signal to be pre compensated to cope with differing lengths of standard cable We would suggest you select option 1 less than 133 feet by default no compensation P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 97 6 8 2 Change Terr intfc CONTROL LINES This screen allows the operator to select whether the modem implements or ignores the interface handshake control lines Interface control lines 1 Ignore all 2 Active configure Change Terr Intfc Control Lines Menu IGNORE ALL All the control lines are ignored the dialogue ends here ACTIVE CONFIGURE The three following screens are presented in turn allowing each line to be individually controlled The line names change to match the interface type selected examples here are for V 35 Line DTR DTE Ready In 1 Ignore 2 Active Change Terr Intfc Control Lines Active Screen 1 Line RTS Tx input signal valid 1 Ignore 2 Active Change Terr Intfc Control Lines Active Screen 2 Note that if the carrier is set to RIS controlled under CHANGE TX MODULATOR CARRIER and the RTS line is set to IGNORE then there will be no alarms should the RTS line go off inhibiting the carrier This final screen is only shown if the modem is fitted with a DTE interface Line CTS Terr accepts Rx output 1 Ignore 2 Active
171. are shared between ESC amp Aux In Custom IBS modes without backward alarm or TS32 multiframe up to 8 84 2 2 1 1 1 1 bits 24 32nd of the overhead may be allocated to the ESC port the Aux port is as above for Standard IBS and 21 of these bits remain shared between ESC amp Aux When the overhead has been assigned as required press the YES key which provides the following screen Max ESC rate 2650 Baud YES Aux sync ratez1387bps async 346 Baud Change Tx Rx ESC AuxBA Define IBS ESC Aux Custom 1 This summarises the ESC amp Aux port rates based on the overhead assignments just made The Max ESC Baud Rate is the maximum continuous rate the ESC channel will support the ESC channel must be set to a standard async Baud rate equal or below this figure using the Async ESC menu selection The Aux Sync Rate is the data rate of the Aux port A DPLL generates this clock however obscure the rate The Aux async Baud is the maximum Baud rate that could be conveyed through this Aux channel if the Aux clock is ignored and the Aux port is used in oversampled async mode as defined by INTELSAT for the low rate IBS ESC The Aux Sync Rate and Aux async Baud information display is not available in early versions of the embedded M amp C code 6 6 29 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA ASYNC ESC Menu This menu allows the async parameters for the ESC interface to be defined Async ESC port 1 Baud rate 2400 2 Format 8 N 3 Set as M amp C por
172. are two modes of operation These modes are confusingly referred to as 1920 1984kbps and 2048kbps mode in the IBS SMS service definitions but both operate with a 2048kbps terrestrial data rate NORMAL G 732 2048K IBS mode 1 Normal 6 796 overhead 2 G 732 096 overhead Change Tx Rx Baseband Continuous 2048k G 732 Menu The content of the 2048kbps data is ignored ie it can be unframed and the normal 6 7 overhead is added bringing the rate to 2184 53kbps This is referred to as 2048kbps operation in the service definitions If NORMAL is selected then the dialogue returns to that covered in the main section of the handbook The data is G 732 formatted data ie it already contains a terrestrial G 732 frame comprising of 32 Timeslots TSO to TS31 Although the aggregate data is 2048kbps as only 30 or 31 timeslots are available for data TSO is framing and TS16 may be signalling the user data rate is 1920 or 1984kbps 30 or 31 x 64kbps This is referred to as 1920kbps or 1984kbps operation in the service definitions but the data rate at the terrestrial port is actually 2048kbps When selected instead of the unit inserting extra IBS SMS framing on to the data ie 6 7 it uses the similar G 732 framing already present 0 Some locations in the G 732 framing are changed over satellite such as TSO Odd bit 4 which is used by the IBS SMS TS32 multiframe word and so it is not entirely transparent to all the overhead Par
173. arm N O Deferred alarm N C Uncommitted analog output from processor If Monitor AGC option fitted Selectable Rx signal level Eb No IF offset freq etc see Appendix E Transmit inhibit Buffered direct AGC voltage This may be used as an antenna pointing signal when the demod is unlocked It responds to composite power in approximately a 2MHz bandwidth around the nominal Rx carrier frequency 14 Not connected 15 Ground n To externally inhibit the Transmit carrier either apply TTL CMOS signal to pin 7 or short pin 7 to ground for example with an external relay closure All relay contacts rated 30V DC 2A or 125VAC 0 4A The functions are as defined below Prompt Unit A unit fault exists i e an equipment failure Prompt Traffic A Tx or Rx traffic fault exists Deferred alarm One of the following conditions exists The receive BER is greater than the user defined threshold The receive Eb No is lower than the user defined threshold Buffer slips are more frequent than the user set threshold A Backward alarm is being received from either the satellite or terrestrial ports Note N O means normally open in the non fail state of the modem relays energised when power is removed the relays fall back to the non normal ie non energised alarm state Note The function of these relays can be changed See Relay Mode in Appendix E Customer Specific Features on page 201 for a description P3
174. astrophic failure such as a power supply etc the switching circuitry which is distributed between the two units will switch over to the operational unit All interface cards guarantee not to increase the load on signal lines in the powered down condition i e the pair will work and switch over successfully even if one unit fails totally SWITCHING PHILOSOPHY Both Modem s operate continuously with each providing a regularly updated status to their half of the 1 FOR 1 control logic There is no pre assigned master and slave unit Changeovers are minimised i e a unit taken off line due to a reported failure will remain off line even if it returns to the OK state If it does return to the OK state then it will act as the standby unit The software provides the necessary delays of status to the control logic to prevent unnecessary switching There is no delay in the case of catastrophic failures when the hardware performs the switching regardless of the software and its associated built in delays The 1 FOR 1 system has no memory i e a unit taken off line because of an indicated failure will be put on line again if it now indicates OK but only if the on line unit has now failed otherwise it would be an unnecessary changeover P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 163 9 3 Detected failures A failure is defined as either a detected failure of the unit or a catastrophic power failure The Modems w
175. ata rate framing FEC Modulation or 25 kHz whichever is the lower Assuming closed network QPSK rate 1 2 coding this means that for data rates down to 22 kbps the sweep will be 25kHz reducing linearly below this rate to 10 74kHz for 9 6kbps QPSK rate FEC or 4 8kbps BPSK See note 2 in the following paragraph for an explanation of why the sweep width narrows at lower data rates If USER is selected then the following menu is displayed Set user demod sweep 16kHz 1 31kHz normal 25kHz kHz YES Change Rx Demod Sweep User Menu The operator can configure the Demodulator to sweep up to 32kHz to compensate for errors introduced in the Tx frequency conversion satellite and Rx frequency conversion equipment Please note the following 1 Increased sweep width proportionally increases the carrier acquisition time 2 With low data rates and wide sweep widths ie wider than the recommended carrier spacing it is perfectly feasible to acquire the wrong carrier Typically low rate carriers are clustered together on a transponder and the modem has no way of telling which carrier is which other than it has to be in the sweep range and of the correct data rate Note Applicable to operation without FEC AND without framing only Part of the Rx carrier acquisition process when the Demod sweeps is for the Demod to temporarily lock onto false locks these are detected as false because although the Demod has locked
176. ate halves as the distance doubles ie 5Mbps to 20m 2 5Mbps to 40m etc The input clock data phase is selected automatically reporting a Data Marginal warning whenever it has to switch phase If the modem reports Data Marginal frequently then this is not a modem fault but an indication that you have a clocking problem external to the modem ie changing clock data phase a problem which would otherwise have caused untraceable data errors Check the phase of the Data In with respect to the Clock In line By selecting Change Terr Inffc Control Lines it is possible to configure the modem to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line I switches to the inactive state As there is no X 21 equivalent of the R8422 Device DTE Ready In line TR set this to Ignore It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line I by selecting Change Tx Modulator Carrier RTS Controlled P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 174 MIL STD 188 114A INTERFACE The P300 Series terrestrial interface is compliant with the interfaces defined in MIL STD 188 114A when set in RS422 mode This MIL STD document specifies three types of balanced generators Type 1 Low offset voltage for lt 100kbps Defined in this 1985 document for compatibility with older equipment Type 2 3V offset maximum for 100kbps to 10Mbps MIL STD 188 114A actually specifies this corre
177. ave unused inputs floating In IDR modes these are used for the 4 standard IDR backward alarms In IBS modes BA 1 indicates the normal single IBS backward alarm status mirrored by the unit deferred alarm For multidestinational BS carriers it is possible to operate the P300 in IBS mode but use 4 separate backward alarms as per IDR From the front panel select Service as Other based on IBS and follow the screen prompts P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 188 APPENDIX C UPGRADE INFORMATION INTRODUCTION To first explain the terms Software Upgrades Hardware Upgrades and Feature Code upgrades Software Upgrades normally involve a visit to our web site http www paradisedata com to download the latest version of the modems embedded software This is then loaded into the modem from a PC through the modems serial port on the Async ESC connector and the PC COM port Software upgrades can always be performed in the field Hardware Upgrades involve the replacement of printed circuit boards PCB s firmware such as the Boot Code or cuts straps to the PCB s to implement hardware changes Some hardware upgrades can be performed in the field and some require a return to the factory Feature Code upgrades require the user to enter a feature code into the front panel of the modem which then allows the modem to provides additional facilities Feature Codes can only be issued by Paradise Dat
178. b No Provided the limits are not reached the link performance will stay as it is subject to the tolerance window Limit only Best performance The power will increase when required by a fade bit it will not reduce Any especially good atmospheric conditions will improve the Eb No beyond the current level Limit only Power economy The power will not increase but it will reduce if there are any especially good atmospheric conditions that allow less power to achieve the target Eb No P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 155 AUPC Self Monitor ara 1 Cannot compensate for m differing distant conditions TX power is controlled by directly a N monitoring local Eb No and compensates for LOCAL Tx amp Rx 5 changes oa Y exe E Gomme BER RX EB No BER CH Gus 8 zug Qs E ame E ED Provides Change Tx Mod AUPC ez Ec Mode Self Monitor V control Tx Limits 2 5 1 0 dB Slew rate 10 dB min Target Eb No 8 5 dB Tolerence 0 2 dB EB No 10 Loss action freeze BER 1 9 Monitor Demod FEC Display of Local Eb No EB No 10dB BER 1E 9 Eb No 10 798 gt FEC 3E 4 gt RS 6E 7 FAW lt 1E 6 FINAL BER lt 1E 12 No Display of distant Eb No amp No local alarms on poor distant Eb No The AUPC can also be set in self monitor mode Self Mon This is used
179. bove Throughout the text the description of the feature Drop Insert is consistent and wherever it is referenced it also states which of the four standard configurations this feature becomes available as standard In the above example the Drop Insert feature is standard on the P300 IBS configuration and all models above i e the P300 IBS P300 IDR and the P300 TCM The P300 Series has been designed to make field upgrades as easy as possible and many features may be added by front panel entry of a Feature Code which can be issued by Paradise Datacom Some Options however may require extra hardware to be added eg extra boards or just IC s but this is easily performed by a competent technician The table on the following page indicates which features may be added from the front panel and which require the addition of extra hardware It might appear that the words Feature and Option are used interchangeably In practice however we have attempted to use Options to refer to functions which always require hardware to be fitted whereas we use Features to refer to functions which may be software enabled without extra hardware being fitted For example we refer to both IDR and G 703 Options as these each require an extra board to be fitted whereas we refer to Drop Insert and Reed Solomon Features as these are software enabled features within the basic modem hardware If you are new to the equipment it is worth confirming what featur
180. ceived and passed to the terrestrial When set to Partial only the 8 timeslots for this destination are selected and inserted onto the insert mux bearer avoiding overwriting a the data on the bearer This technique can be applied to lower rate carriers also Imagine four destinations which require mesh connectivity for simplicity say at 384kbps 6 x 64kbps although asymmetric operation up to any rate is possible Each site has a modulator transmitting 1152kbps 3 x 384kbps and three demodulators receiving the 384kbps from the other sites The satellite bandwidth requirement is for four 1152kbps carriers not twelve 384kbps carriers ie the same aggregate rate but possibly lower overall bandwidth when carrier spacing is taken into consideration gt Asingle T1 or E1 bearer is looped through three modems one operating as Tx Rx and two others in Rx only In this example we will assume it is a T1 PCM bearer The Tx data for all destinations arrives at the single Tx modem in each site the T1 bearer in 18 timeslots Note that the ability to re order the Tx amp Rx timeslots means the data can be in any timeslots and in any order Each of the four sites transmits a 1152kbps 3 x 384kbps carrier and all four destination sites receive the three carriers from the other destinations Ateach site all three modems are configured for Rx Partial Insert and the data for all but this site is discarded leaving a 384kbps to be inserted onto th
181. cially and is placed into the bearer by the insert mux in the same frames from which it came It is still possible to drop from and insert into different timeslots it is simply that the frames of data containing the RBS are replaced into the same relative positions within the terrestrial multiframe by the insert mux in order to preserve the RBS P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 60 Following either of these selections the Modem counts how many timeslots are being accessed and determines how to maintain the Timeslot identity Refer to the section on Timeslot Identity Maintenance in Appendix F on page 208 Wherever possible the Modem resolves the issues itself but where there might be a compatibility issue between different modem vendors the modem prompts the operator for input f operating with a G 732 bearer and CAS is selected then the timeslot identity will be maintained by the satellite CAS Multiframe used to convey the CAS signalling No user input is required If operating with a T1 D4 or TI ESF bearer and RBS is selected then the modem will maintain the Timeslot and RBS identity using the normal TS32 Multiframe if possible and if not it will activate a satellite CAS multiframe to support the RBS No user input is required signalling CAS or RBS are active then the Modem will maintain the timeslot identity by using the satellite TS32 multiframe where possible unless the number of droppe
182. circuit has degraded beyond the user thresholds although it is already mandatory to send a backward alarm IBS SMS when the user BER degrades below the fixed threshold of 1x10 When the user Rx BER or Rx Eb No pass the user set thresholds OR a backward alarm is received the interface card Sig Valid Out line is deactivated normally this line deactivates only in response to a prompt Rx alarm eg carrier loss This line can be used with certain ISDN equipment to initiate an ISDN call Used for internal Paradise testing of enhanced modes we are evaluating Not suggested for customer selection P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 204 UNCOMMITTED DAC OUTPUT CONTROL The output controlled by this selection in only available of the Monitor AGC option is fitted Refer to the Change User Opt AGC Output menu section 6 10 10 on page 106 for an explanation of this parameter This output is updated 10 times per second Note For antenna pointing AGC whilst demod unlocked see definition of pin 8 on alarms and AGC connector 0 P300H Coarse AGC voltage Rx Signal level default Scaled at 1V per 10dB with extremes of 0V2 100dBm and 10V 0dBm and a 1 0dB resolution This signal is forced to OV when the demod is unlocked Note that although the scaling extends from 0 to 100dBm the actual output range is limited to the range measurable by the software which is 21dBm to 83dBm except for when it is forced to OV if the
183. crambler Rx Fault Frame sync lost The modem cannot find the IBS or IDR frame sync on the receive data Check the Rx Service T TA TC SB RF settings Change Rx Service although as the service type affects the composite data rate over satellite it is more likely the demod will fail to lock rather than this message appear if the wrong service type is selected On Non Paradise Tx modems for IBS check the V 35 scrambler is not enabled in addition to the IBS SMS scrambler Rx Fault TS32 Multiframe sync lost The modem cannot find the IBS TS32 Multiframe sync on the receive data although it has found T TA TC SB RF Frame sync otherwise the message above would display This is only likely in Custom IBS modes where the operator has the option of sending a TS32 Multiframe or not Note that for low data rates the standard IBS SMS multiframe period can be long 1 sec at 32kbps and it may be best to use Custom IBS without a TS32 MF for rates of below 32kbps to improve the acquisition time if the carrier is momentarily lost P300H P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 221 Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Other Rx Fault CAS Multiframe sync lost Rx Fault Final data is all ones AIS Rx Fault X 50 de stuff sync lost Rx Fault Final BER gt 1E 3 AIS Forced Rx Fault lt line gt off lt DTE DCE gt not ready P300H The modem cannot find the IBS CAS Multiframe sync on the receive
184. creen allows the operator to set thresholds at which a deferred alarm is raised to allow action to be taken before the service degrades too far USER BER DEMOD Eb No BUFFER SLIP DISTANT Eb No The operator may enter a BER at which the deferred alarm is raised should the estimated USER BER degrade below this threshold The operator may also or alternatively set a deferred alarm threshold for the Eb No measured by the demodulator This is the Eb No as displayed on the screen whenever the demodulator status is displayed The operator may also instruct the modem to raise the deferred alarm if the interval between buffer slips is less than a preset threshold The threshold is set in hours and may be for example set to 960 hours 40 days or 1728 72 days to warn if the criteria for clock accuracies for a specific service are not being met If the AUPC feature is active in either Maintain Eb No or Monitor Distant modes refer to AUPC in section 8 11 1 on page 154 the operator has the facility to raise a deferred alarm if the DISTANT Eb No falls below the user set threshold This can be used in conjunction with the AUPC to indicate when the AUPC has reached the user set limit for maximum Tx power but the distant Rx Eb No has still fallen below the desired limit 6 10 2 Change User Opt OPERATION Menu User options 1 Default 2 Actions 3 Terr 4 Sat 5 Terr Sat 6 Alarms Change User Opt Operation Menu The operator has c
185. d Provides Clock and Data lines Provides 32 or 64 kbps access in place of one or both Audio ESC channels INTELSAT low rate ESC mode as previously but now via Aux port on IDR card not shared ESC Aux port of base unit IDR option also adds sync IBS mode configurable to use between 1 32nd and 21 32nd of the IBS overhead providing a full sync Aux port at between 0 2 and 4 3 of main data rate Aux port provides satellite timing information for P1500 Slave Frequency Standard when not configured for Aux data access The IDR Option includes the facility to emulate the more common modes of our popular P1348 P1448 voice data mux cards which are used extensively in SNG applications It uses the IDR audio ESC ports for the audio interfaces and can generate a 64 kbps carrier consisting solely of two 32kbps ADPCM encoded audio channels or a 128 kbps carrier comprising the two audio channels plus 64 kbps data from the main interface This is compatible with a PA00 Series modem fitted with P1448 card or a P230 Modem with a P1348 card alternatively Drop Insert can be used at the distant end to place the two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels in one timeslot and the 64 kbps data in another PRBS tester may operate through either main traffic ESC data or AUX data channels main traffic channel not available in Closed Net ie no overhead mode Use of ESC amp AUX data channels allow continuous real traffic BER performance monitoring on links with overhe
186. d Rx This is primarily for operation at low rates where the TS32 multiframe becomes long enough to affect acquisition time For example at 32kbps the multiframe lasts 1 second and hence TS32 MF acquisition may take 1 second on top of demod lock time This selection also frees up one additional bit of the overhead TS32 bit 4 to carry ESC information The disadvantage of operating without a TS32 Multiframe is that the synchronous IBS scrambler cannot be used and the Normal scrambler option selects P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 133 INTELSAT V 35 This results in an increase in the error rate as the V 35 scrambler multiplies any errors on the channel by a factor of three Both options lead on to the following question Backward Alarm 1 Normal 2 No Backward Alarm facility Change Tx Rx Service Custom IBS Backward Alarm Menu NORMAL A Backward Alarm is sent Tx or detected Rx as normal NO ALM No Backward Alarm is sent Tx or received Rx This is a very useful facility to have to lose but for maximum ESC operation this selection does free up one further bit of the overhead TS32 bit 3 to carry ESC information If both the TS32 Multiframe and Backward Alarm options have been selected as Normal then the following screen is displayed If either the Backward Alarm facility or the TS32 Multiframe have been disabled then this menu is skipped IBS Backward Alarm 1 Norma
187. d Solomon This is a useful combination to check on any data sheet as this will give you the Symbol Rate limits of the modem from which the Data Rate limits in all other modes and combinations can normally be derived P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 145 8 6 DETERMINING EXACT MAXIMUM ESC BAUD RATES Should you wish to determine the exact maximum ESC Baud rates in order to change the overhead allocation to achieve specific ESC rates with specific overheads then the following section may be useful For Standard IBS the exact maximum continuous rate is Baud Rate Main data rate 15 x O H bits allocated 32 x Bauds per Character 9 Where Main data rate The main modem data rate eg 64000bps 15 gives total overhead O H bits allocated The number of bits of the overhead allocated to the ESC for example if the ESC is set in P230 mode then 20 bits TS16 bits 1 8 TS48 bits 1 8 amp TS32 bits 4 8 are available 32 give the proportion of the overhead allocated to the ESC Bauds per Character The number of Baud periods per character eg for async character format 8 N there are 10 Baud periods per character start 8 data bits stop 9 as 9 synchronous bits are always used for each character Note that if the CAS Multiframe is active to transfer G 732 CAS then TS16 and TS48 are not available Note also that is the CAS Multiframe is active without CAS ie to maintain the timeslot ID for an Odd
188. d inserted timeslots falls into the category of Odd values of It will indicate as follows to which the operator just answers YES to accept the information TS identity will be maintained over satellite by TS32 Multiframe YES Change Tx Rx Baseband Drop Insert Ident Menu df no signalling CAS or RBS is active and the value of N of dropped and inserted timeslots falls into the category of Odd values of N then it is not possible to maintain the timeslot identity using the satellite TS32 multiframe The Odd values of N are N 7 9 11 13 14 17 18 19 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 31 If this is the case and the Extended feature is available standard P300 TCM then the modem prompts to see if timeslot ID maintenance is required TS identity over satellite 1 Normal maintain 2 Don t care Change Tx Rx Baseband Drop Insert Maint Menu NORMAL MAINTAIN The Modem will activate the satellite CAS multiframe in order to provide timeslot ID maintenance for the Odd value of selected Note that this mode may not be compatible with other manufacturers IBS SMS equipment as this is a special feature of the P300 and P400 series modems which is why it asks you the question instead of just getting on with it DON T CARE Timeslot ID will not be maintained and the Modem will be compatible with other manufacturers equipment for these Odd values of N This is the end of the Drop
189. d through by subsequent characters This P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 148 Delayed Character Mode is generally a show stopper but can cause issues with packet based communications At Paradise we have only been able to make the ESC channel enter this delayed character mode by setting up a pair of modems in intentionally mis matched configurations However now we have investigated and understood the mechanism we feel it is feasible that under repeated changes of configuration ESC channel might enter this delayed character mode although we can t get it into this mode ourselves by this method To avoid this possibility we have modified the modems embedded software from V3 56 or later to ensure that during normal reconfiguration the ESC channel should not get into this mode While we are confident that in general the ESC channel is not likely to get into this delayed character mode it is still possible to make it enter this mode if the modems are operated with intentionally mis match configurations For those that would like to understand why this happens the following text describes the operation in more detail The following text is NOT mandatory reading ESC channel delayed character mode very technical The Async ESC is carried in the satellite overhead by multiplexing it into the synchronous data of the satellite framing which is added to the main data Each Async c
190. dard RS422 levels at any frequency If the station clock is specified as 10MHz then a final screen is displayed as follows Use station clock as IF synth ref No 1 No use normal int ref 2 Yes READ Change Rx Buffer Clocking Station Clock Frequency Menu This allows the IF synthesisers to be locked to the station clock instead of the internal 1PPM reference This is normally not a requirement as the internal reference provides good enough phase noise performance for the lowest data rate the modem can support and at 1PPM results in a worst case IF error of 180Hz when the IF is tuned to 180MHz However if this option is used please be aware that the transmit IF spectrum purity is entirely dependent upon the quality phase noise performance of the supplied reference P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 89 6 7 5 If the external 10MHz reference fails totally then it will be automatically replaced with the internal reference If however it degrades level frequency or phase noise then until it fails totally the modem will continue to use it as the synthesiser reference Change Rx Buffer Clocking RX CLOCK Menu This screen varies depending on the configuration of the Rx path Normal non Insert Mux operation This selects the source of the clock which feeds the terrestrial output Rx output clock 1 Sat 2 Tx 3 Internal 4 Station 5 DCE Change Rx Buffer Clocking Rx Clock non In
191. dds the minimum possible overhead to the satellite data to provide the baud rate selected adding from 196 to 10096 overhead Closed Net Plus ESC mode also provides an optional backward alarm facility and above 32kbps a synchronous scrambler to replace the normal error multiplying V 35 self synchronising scrambler A high rate async ESC channel in IBS SMS overhead achieving 2400 Baud with a 64kbps carrier requires IBS SMS feature standard on P300 IBS and above Async access to the IDR 8kbps synchronous ESC channel requires IDR option standard on P300 IDR and above Software selectable RS232 RS485 or RS422 interface IBS SMS Feature Satellite Framing in accordance with IBS to IESS 309 and SMS EESS 501 including User assigned Tx and corresponding Rx display of Station ID Channel ID amp Spare ID within SMS overhead to aid carrier identification Ahigh rate async ESC channel in IBS SMS overhead see Async ESC above Drop Insert Feature The most sophisticated Drop Insert functions of any satellite modem whilst still maintaining simplicity of configuration and operation The Drop Insert feature provides 1544 kbps T1 D4 amp T1 ESF and 2048 kbps G 732 operation Arbitrary amp independent timeslot selection for Drop amp Insert Full support for CRC 4 in G 732 mode and CRC 6 in T1 ESF mode Terrestrial error monitoring based on Frame Alignment Words FAW or CRC 9 732 E bit processing allowing the display of the
192. de the low high window set View the current drawn and alarm settings with Monitor BUC change with Change BUC LNB Tx BUC Current Monitor Tx Fault BUC current connection fault The Modem is configured to operate with a BUC and the modems DC supply to the BUC has been activated but the DC switch indicates either an open or short circuit Hou HL P300H P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 218 Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Other TX WARNINGS line of display Tx Traffic warnings Deferred alarm relay only Tx Warn Reconfiguring Tx path The modem is reconfiguring the Tx path after a user parameter change Tx Warn Data marginal clock inv The phase of the input Clock and Data is checked to ensure the data is stable when it is actually latched into the modem This message means that the data is changing at this critical time and it WILL CAUSE DATA ERRORS Check the A amp B clock lines are not reversed Data A amp B should be stable on the rising edge of Clock B the falling edge of Clock A Tx Warn Line code violations det G 703 interfaces have several different line codes For 1544kbps they are typically AMI and B8ZS D and for 2048kbps they are AMI and HDB3 Normally the LATTER is the one which is used The interface must be configured to match the line code of the other equipment otherwise line code violations ie terrestrial data errors will occur See Note 3 Tx Wa
193. dem 5 Connect the data interfaces in parallel and configure the two units alike Suitable adapter cables are available from Paradise for all the standard interfaces 6 Connect the two transmit IF ports to the input ports of a suitable power splitter combiner of the correct impedance 50Q or 75 and the appropriate frequency range The combined output is then fed to the up conversion equipment Note that only one output is active at a time and because of the loss of most splitter combiners the power level at the output of each modem needs to be increased by approximately 3 5dB 7 Connect the two receive IF ports to the two output ports of a suitable power splitter combiner of the correct impedance 500 or 750 and the appropriate frequency range The output of the down conversion equipment then feeds the input of the splitter combiner so that both demodulators are fed with an identical signal Because of the wide dynamic range of the Modem AGC circuits there should be no need to modify the signal levels 8 Switch between units by using the menu option Main Actions Giveaway in 1 1 The pair will not Switch over unless the partner unit is operational ie indicates no faults Note Testing a 1 1 pair in loopback requires the IF s to be split combined and then looped Placing an external individual loopback on each modem will not work as the off line one who s output is muted sees a Rx fault as there is no carrier When split combined
194. demod is unlocked Note the absolute accuracy of this measured parameter and the unit to unit repeatability is relatively poor 4dB but on any one unit it will be consistent and so show trends accurately Rx Eb No Level Scaled at 1V per 20 with extremes of OV 0dB and 10V 20dB and a 0 1dB resolution This signal is forced to OV when the demod is unlocked Note that although the scaling extends from to 20dB the actual output range is limited to the range measurable by the software which is approx from a lower limit of 3 0dB demod unlock threshold to an upper limit of 13 19dB dependent on Modulation scheme FEC Rate amp Data Rate To Determine the upper limit at any mix of modulation FEC and data rate simply set the modem in IF loopback Rx IF Offset Frequency Scaled at 1V per 10KHz with extremes of 0V2 50KHz and 10V 50KHz and a 25Hz resolution This signal sweeps when the demod is unlocked The default demod sweep is 25KHz with a maximum of 32KHz Fine AGC voltage Rx Signal level In response to customer requests for a finer resolution signal level indicator Scaled at 3 33V per 10dB with extremes of OV 60dBm and 10V 30dBm and a 0 1dB resolution This signal is forced to OV when the demod is unlocked P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 205 6 15 P300H Distant end Eb No Software versions gt 2 12 Valid only when the AUPC feature is active this provides an output of the distant end
195. dently of the Tx path Note Temporarily setting Rx Tx is a convenient way of copying the Tx configuration to the Rx as when disabled again the Rx path keeps the Tx values and does not return to the old Rx values P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 95 6 8 6 8 1 CHANGE TERR INTFC MENU The Change Terr Interface Menu brings up one of two screens depending on the interface card fitted Terr interface 1 Electrical 2 Control Lines 3 Card specific Change Terr Intfc Menu Terr Interface Nothing to configure with card fitted YES Change Terr Intfc Alternate Menu If there are parameters to configure with the interface card fitted then the options are ELECTRICAL For interface cards which support multiple electrical interfaces eg currently P1440 P1441 and P1442 cards this option allows the interface to be selected For other cards the option may not be shown if the electrical interface cannot be changed CONTROL LINES This allows the interface control lines such as RTS and to be configured The operator has the option for each available control signal of ignoring the signal or raising a Traffic Fault alarm if the interface control line goes CARD SPECIFIC Some interfaces such as 64 kbps G 703 have specific faults they can monitor in the case of the 64 kbps G 703 interface it is the incoming octet timing or options on the outgoing signal supply outgoing octet timing o
196. der CHANGE USER OPT OPERATION ACTIONS BUFFER AUTO CENTRE This option can be disabled as for minor outages the errors or sync losses caused by centering the buffer may be larger than those caused by the outage In normal operation the buffer fill state can be viewed on the Received Detail Traffic Status screen accessible from the operate menu by pressing Down Arrow This screen also shows a count of underflows and overflows empty slips and full sips Approximately equal counts indicate the buffer is too small to accommodate the incoming Doppler shift 2ms is usually sufficient One count significantly higher than the other indicates that the buffer is slipping due to a large difference in the clock from the satellite and the buffer output clock With typical earth station clock accuracies buffers never need be larger than approximately 16ms The buffer can be manually centred by selecting ACTIONS BUFFER CENTRE P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 92 6 7 7 6 7 8 6 7 9 6 7 10 6 7 11 6 7 12 6 7 13 Change Rx DEMOD Menu The options available on this menu change if the Rx Tx function on the Change Rx Menu is active Tx Rx Not active Demod 1 Freq 2 Mod n 3 FEC 4 RS 5 Scr 6 Spect Inv 7 Sweep 8 AUPC Change Rx Demod Menu Rx Tx not active Rx Tx Active If the Rx Tx function is active only those parameters which vary between Rx amp Tx are displayed the screen appears as
197. dually emptying and filling to absorb the difference over the 24 hour period If the clock signals within the system all originate from one source then the buffer will never be exceeded it will simply slowing filling and emptying over this 24 hour cycle This refers to buffering needed when there is more than one clock in the system and a buffer is required to absorb the difference between the two clocks Typically data is placed into the buffer with one clock and removed with another thus causing a gradual continuous filling or emptying of the buffer causing slips on a regular basis The period between buffer slips when it is totally full or empty will be constant and proportional to the difference between the two clocks A buffer will provide both functions it simply depends on how the system clocking is arranged whether it provides Doppler buffering or a combined Doppler and Plesiochronous buffering if there are two clocks in the system Typically a buffer used for a Plesiochronous system is set larger than a Doppler only buffer as it has to accommodate a steady filling emptying plus a superimposed daily cycle The slips both underflows Ve and Overflows ve are displayed on the Detailed Rx Status screen Approximately equal counts indicate the buffer is too small to accommodate the incoming Doppler shift 2ms is usually sufficient One count significantly higher than the other indicates that the buffer is slipping due to a large d
198. e If both are active then the ESC interface is selected first NOTE that these are some of the few menus which appears on both Tx amp Rx menu trees but for which the setting is common to both ESC Interface Tx amp Rx ESC Interface Link R 1 RS232 2 RS422 3 RS485 4 Link to remote M amp C Change Tx Rx ESC AuxBA Cfg Interfaces ESC Menu All options except 4 are self explanatory Link R means Link Remote and Link L Link Local Option 4 leads onto the following menu Internal link to M amp C Port Local 1 Local M amp C PC end 2 Remote end Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Cfg Interfaces ESC Link to M amp C This instructs the Modem make an internal link between the ESC port and the remote M amp C port It must be set specifically for the end of the link the modem is located at When either of these options are selected the physical ESC port is disabled as it is linked internally to the M amp C port LOCAL Incoming messages on this modems remote M amp C port Rx lines from the M amp C Master device are routed directly to the Tx ESC channel and out over the satellite link Messages from the incoming satellite link on the Rx ESC channel are routed onto the Tx output lines of the remote M amp C port to return the responses to the Master M amp C device REMOTE Messages from the incoming satellite link on the Rx ESC channel are driven onto the remote M amp C port Rx input lines allowing any devices daisy chained to the
199. e IDR option in Closed net Plus ESC or IBS SMS modes provides a high rate asynchronous ESC interface eg 2400 Baud at 64kbps in standard IBS SMS mode any Baud rate for Closed Net Plus ESC Again typically used for distant end M amp C via the overhead Aux Port provides a front panel selectable RS232 and RS422 interface In IDR Mode it provides synchronous 32 or 64 kbps channel in place of one or both the 32kbps ADPCM ESC audio channels In IBS SMS amp Minimum Overhead modes it provide a synchronous port which can be configured to use from 1 32 to 21 32 of the IBS SMS overhead eg for internal or external BER testing When set to 1 32 and used asynchronously it provides the INTELSAT compliant Low Rate ESC channel PRBS tester feature The internal Pseudo Random Binary Sequence PRBS Bit Error Rate Tester BERT offers the following features PRBS pass through the main data channel or the ESC or Aux channels of the overhead in parallel with the main data channel in any mode where overhead is added BERT results can be logged in the traffic log at user set intervals providing continuous traffic quality monitoring and recording when operating through the overhead in parallel with the main data Compatible with patterns used by test equipment such as the Firebird etc P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 14 P300 P310 TCM Additional Features v v 8PSK with rate TCM 50 bandwidth of QPSK 7 rate
200. e PCM bearer has a CRC the options available are None Ignore or Process Default None Ignore E BITS If a G 732 Bearer with CRC set to Process as above then the additional option to process amp return E Bits is also available options for what happens when incoming CRC errors are detected are No Action or Return E Bit Default No Action CRC FRAME ACQ Again if a G 732 Bearer with CRC set to Process then the option exists to implement the strict letter of ITU G 704 and force a re acquisition of the terrestrial Drop Insert frame sync if CRC sync cannot be achieved within 8ms Options available are Normal or Reacquire frame if CRC sync lost Default Normal P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 103 6 10 6 Change User Opt Operation SATELLITE Menu Satellite 1 BER est 2 IBS MF period 3 Carrier ID s 4 Back alm map 5 1 50 750 Change User Opt Operation Satellite Menu BER ESTIMATE IBS MF PERIOD Carrier ID S P300H This selects the source for the USER BER estimate displayed on the Receive Status Screens and compared to both the Deferred USER BER alarm and BER 1x10 alarm thresholds The selection is from AUTO The unit selects the most appropriate source Note that the INTELSAT mandatory method is FAW although Aufo will select more accurate or more quickly updated methods if available The list of priorities is as follows The PRBS tester if in the main data channel The Re
201. e Remote M amp C port 2 For reliable operation ensure that when no slave devices are talking the Slave B line floats at least 200 300mV higher than the Slave A line If necessary provide 1k 4700 or even 2200 pullups Slave B to RS232 485 converter DC and pulldowns Slave A to Gnd to ensure lines float as specified This ensures idle state of slave lines when not driven is a mark as an idle state of space will cause the first and possibly subsequent characters of slave responses to be lost Due to the low speeds amp short cables it is not normally required to terminate RS485 async M amp C cables If it does prove necessary use 1200 between Master A and Master B at the end of the cable furthest from bus controller Between Slave A and Slave B try 4700 first farthest away from the controller then add 4700 at the controller end too If necessary reduce both to 2400 or even 1200 3 Conn is used for specifying cables For example a cable to connect a P300 at the distant end of a link with a Codan C5700 transceiver could be specified as A 500cm L ie connector A 5 metres of cable then connector L The 10 connector local RS485 bus daisy chain cable used in a 1 N switch to connect a backup P300 the P500 RS485 Out port and a further 8 P300 s could be specified as A 50cm E 8 x 30cm A P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 180 1 FOR 1 INTERFACE Connector type 9 Pin D male
202. e Station Clock is the same frequency as the Rx data rate then the Station Clock is used directly switching to the Satellite Clock whilst the demod is locked and finally the internal reference for backups If the Station Clock is at a different frequency to the Rx Data rate the Rx PLL converts the Station Clock to the correct rate to drive the Rx data towards the terrestrial Should the Station Clock fail then the modem will switch to the internal frequency reference in order to maintain the Rx traffic Again the buffer should be set large enough to accommodate the difference between the Station Clock and the incoming satellite clock PLUS the Doppler shift whilst providing the required interval between slips Note If the Rxis set to Station Clock AND the Tx Clocking is set to Rx ref Stn then it always operates as defined in the para above for the case where the Station Clock is at a different frequency to the Rx Data rate even if the are the same rate This option is only available if a DTE card is fitted to the modem The DTE card Ext Tx Clock ie the clock from the DCE see interface card details in appendix A for line names for other interfaces is used directly as the Rx output clock should the Ext Tx Clock fail the PLL sources the clock locked first to the Station Clock if available or the recovered satellite clock while the demodulator remains locked and finally the internal frequency reference in order to mainta
203. e duration after which the modem reverts back to its standard feature set Please refer to section C2 to further explain this topic and a description of how to determine which features are required in order to continue operation DO NOT IGNORE THIS MESSAGE If the features are still in use when the time limit expires then the modem will change it s configuration so it does not require the features which have timed out and if this in turn causes a change to the transmitted carrier then the carrier will be muted A message stating Features not available will then be displayed showing the letters corresponding to the features which are no longer available If for any reason you need to keep a modem configuration after timeout eg to re use it then use the configuration memories to store the current configuration before it times out and is changed and recall it after the features are available again eg if you instigate a feature test or have a feature code upgrade APPENDIX C4 ASYMMETRIC LOOP TIMING All P300 Series modems have this asymmetric loop timing facility APPENDIX C5 UPGRADE AVAILABLE Again this section is not applicable to the P300 series modems APPENDIX C6 FEATURES NOT AVAILABLE You have been directed to this appendix by a message on the equipment display as the unit has detected it has been configured to use features which it cannot provide This is as a result of one of the following 1 Ithas been programmed over the r
204. e including any Reed Solomon encoding RS and the final symbol rate including the effects of the inner FEC and modulation Sym Rates BB 2048000 Frm 2056031 O h 0 39 RS 2056031 Sym 1370687 Info View Config Tx Down Down There is of course a similar screen for the Rx path In addition a later screen summarises the ESC settings as show below Tx ESC AII Intfc RS485 Async set 4800 8 N Avail 6413 1 Info View Config Tx Down Down Down Down Down etc Note that the displayed available ESC rate Avail may well exceed the set ESC rate This is because the hardware can only provide overhead in 1 Nth increments eg 1 1 100 2250956 1 3 33 1 4 25 etc up to 1 256 0 39 and so the modem must pick the appropriate value of N which provides at east the required async ESC Baud rate P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 147 8 7 2 8 7 3 Closed Network Plus ESC via the Custom Service menu Early versions of the embedded code for the P400 Series of satellite modems did not directly provide a Closed Net Plus ESC option although the feature is still available under a different name from the Custom Service menu dialogue If you wish to use Closed Net Plus ESC on a P400 series modem it is probably easier to load the modem with the latest embedded code downloadable from our Web site and use the Closed Net Plus ESC facility directly This latest P400 software will also provide
205. e looped T1 bearer by each Rx modem In this way the data from each site for this destination can be re inserted into the original timeslot from which the Tx data was dropped Without Partial Insert if each Rx modem inserts all the received data 18 timeslots onto the T1 bearer then the second Rx modem could just about insert its 18 timeslots without stamping on the 6 timeslots for this destination from the first Rx modem However Rx modem 3 still has 18 timeslots to insert but 12 of the timeslots on the T1 bearer now contain receive information from Rx modems 1 amp 2 and so Rx modem 3 cannot insert all its data without losing data from another destination The traditional alternative without Partial Insert is to use separate bearers for each Rx modem and a DACCS to sort our the data but it s lower cost and less equipment to configure and maintain if the DACCS is not required at all Partial Insert becomes mandatory for multidestinational working when the total receive data at any one destination exceeds the capacity of the PCM bearers One final note The P300 Series can provide multidestinational operation at aggregate carrier rates below 1544 kbps using the IBS overhead but with four backward alarms So multidestinational working down to 64kbps between nodes become practical ie you don t have to use the 96kbps IDR overhead on the links to get multidestinational backward alarm facilities P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating
206. e maximum delay is 32ms at 128 001kbps and stays between 32ms and 16ms right down to 16kbps below which with the minimum 512bits of processing memory the delay increases again above 32ms The data rate used to determine the processing memory size is the receive rate including any framing and Reed Solomon overheads as this is the output rate of the sequential decoder See the separate note in section 8 4 on page 144 regarding minimising the Reed Solomon delay 4 Slow Sweep Poor Eb No Acquisition Satellite modems are one large compromise and part of this compromise is a trade off between poor Eb No acquisition performance and normal Eb No acquisition speed The modem is optimised for reasonably fast acquisition down to an Eb No of 5dB and the sweep speed is set to match goal This option reduces the sweep speed and hence increases the acquisition time by a factor of ten but improves the low Eb No acquisition by approx 0 5dB It is advisable when using this setting to narrow the Rx sweep width if you know the frequency of the Rx carrier to be fairly accurate to help speed up the acquisition while sweeping at this very slow rate 5 Post Reed Solomon V35 Scrambling Not available on the P300 6 Fast Eb No monitoring The raw Eb No information the M amp C reads varies significantly and so the Eb No displayed by the equipment is a heavily averaged to provide a steady result to display In some circumstances it is desirable to have a faster dis
207. e of the Tx main traffic channel and monitoring for errors on the Rx Main traffic channel Note that for Closed Network mode only ie no overhead at all the BER Tester cannot currently inject a test pattern into the main traffic channel a warning is issued on the screen It can however receive and monitor a test pattern injected by equipment at the distant end of the link On a link where it is necessary to use the BER Tester switch to Closed Net Plus ESC mode and if not using the ESC set it for the lowest possible Baud rate which will result in an overhead of lt 0 5 ESC amp Aux are defined below for the different service types If either ESC or Aux are selected but the channel has not been defined then the user is prompted to define the channel and must then re select the channel from this screen ESC amp Aux channels are not available in Closed Network mode as there is no overhead in which to carry them Closed Net Plus ESC Closed Net Plus ESC mode is only available if the Async ESC feature is IBS SMS available standard on P300 IBS and above The ESC channel Baud rate is used to determine the overhead added to the main data allowing the minimum possible overhead to be added ie the minimum bandwidth to be used to provide the Async ESC Baud rate required When the ESC channel is used for BER testing the Async ESC is disabled and whatever bandwidth was assigned to the Async ESC channel is used synchronously for BER testing
208. e will operate at either 16kbps of 32kbps only NO OTHER DATA RATES are supported The modem will generate a configuration error if configured for data rates outside the range 16 32kbps but note that only 16kbps amp 32kbps are valid rates for operation of the Eurocom interface For example configuring the modem for 20kbps will NOT cause an error but the Eurocom interface will not function correctly at this rate Links 25 pin Link to ground Signal Description centre tap of D transformer v Ground to Activate Eurocom G at 16kbps 20 n a a Ground to Activate Eurocom G at 32kbps 14 AND 20 n a Do Not Connect i m Signal Ground 2 7 18 15 22 25 v Shield Protective ground PM Vr 2 Re E us s All links settings are Centre tap grounded 1 2 link up with the PCB legend the right way up Centre tap floating 2 3 link down with the PCB legend the right way up The typical configuration would normally be to ground the outputs and leave the inputs floating ie Link 6 in pos 1 2 up and link 3 in pos 2 3 down This provides protection by ensuring the signal levels remain close to ground potential as might happen if both inputs and outputs were floating but avoid any ground currents between distant locations as might happen P300H if both inputs and outputs were grounded P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 178 AP
209. ec limit R1 2 Coding Rate 7 8 Rate 3 4 Eb No in dB 12 P300 Modem Series Error Probability versus Eb No Sequential Decoding at 2048kbps P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 36 P300 Modem Series Error Probability versus Eb No 8PSK TCM with without Reed Solomon P300H 1E 1 1E 2 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 1E 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 Test Conditions FEC Rate 2 3 Pragmatic TCM Ideal BPSK QPSK Rate 2048 kbps 8PSK TX 70 0000 MHz RX 70 0000 MHz V 35 Scrambling Input Level 45 dBm RS Concatenated Reed Sol Outer Coding 219 201 omon TCM no RS TCM plus RS Eb No in dB 12 P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 37 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1E H Test Conditio
210. ecreasing if the Eb No is better than the target but will increase the power if the Eb No falls below target To maintain a fixed Eb No set this as the Target Fb No set the Max power to the maximum increase you are allowed and set Min power to the limit of the power decrease you will accept The Tx power will increase and decrease within the limits to try and maintain a constant Eb No Set the Tolerance Window size to something practical say 0 2 to 0 5dB depending on how accurately you wish to try and maintain the Eb No Set the Slew Rate to something which can respond to a fast fade We suggest no less than 15dB min ie 0 25dB sec If there is no reason to set a particular slew rate then leave it set to zero no slew rate limit Set the Comms Loss Action after careful consideration The most advantageous setting is Maximum but note that anything which interrupts the link will cause the Tx carrier to increase to the maximum delta Tx power Freeze is probably the most sensible choice causing the carrier to remain at the current value until the link is restored Finally Nominal is the safest option with the AUPC returning the carrier to it s nominal power if the link is broken gt Optionally log the parameters gt P300H Use the Autolog feature to optionally record the distant Eb No and or the AUPC delta power This may prove useful in determining how often the AUPC is required and if it manages to maintain the Eb No within the parame
211. ected to the Rx fault status of this modem saves external patching in non multidestinational carriers This option is on the Tx menu only and again is not shown in Closed Net Plus ESC mode P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 76 IDR MODE ESC amp AUX PORT DEFINITIONS 6 6 26 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA DEFINE IDR Menu When operating in IDR or Custom IDR modes the Define selection is as follows IDR 8k ESC 1 Off 2 Sync 3 Async Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Define IDR ESC Menu OFF The ESC port is disabled and all ones is sent in the 8k ESC channel SYNC Normal 8k synchronous access is provided on the ESC port ASYNC This option is only available of the Async ESC feature is available standard on P300 IBS and above The ESC interface is set to be asynchronous The exact Baud rate it can support varies with the async character format set on the Async ESC menu Typically with 8 bits per character or 7 parity it will support 4800 Baud but with 8 bits plus parity it will operate to 9600 Baud The reason for this strange situation is as follows The async data is carrier synchronously across the 8k ESC link at 9 sync bits per async character start 8 data bits no stop or parity At 9600 Baud with 8 bits char there are a maximum of 960 async characters per second 9600 10 start 8 bits stop 960 async characters per second requires 9 x 960 sync bits per second to convey unfortunately 8 64kb
212. ection of ESC Baud rate TS32 bits 788 6 25 of o h from 50 to 38400Baud 7548 25 of o h when not CAS And on subsequent screen ASYNC ESC PORT TSO pt 1 841 of of Baud rate TS32 bit 1 3 1 of o h Format P ESC FORMAT TS32 bit 3 3 1 of o h when not Back alm Set as M amp C port Select 7 8 Data bits T532 bit 4 3 1 of o h when no TS32 MF Select None Odd Even parity ESC SET AS M amp C ESC set to match M amp C parameters to simplify over the satellite M amp C Setting is once only parameters do not track changes fo M amp C port ESC PORT 5232 RS422 RS485 Link to M amp C LINK ESC TO Local PC end Remote end AUX PORT 5232 RS422 AUDIO LEVELS Interactive adjustment of audio ESC input levels IACKWARD ALARMS 1234 EEEE 4 x External patch AEEE 1 Aulo 3 x Extemal patch 000 uto 3 x OK 4 x Auto P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 46 6 2 6 Full Menu Structure Sheet 6 6 Change Rx SERVICE Change Tx Service see page 5 6 CONTINUOUS DATA Interactive entry of data rate 2048K IBS MODE CHANNEL ASSOG Normal 6 7 overhead SIG CAS IN TS16 TIMES OT REORDER G 732 0 6 overhead Normal No CAS Normal linear Now e order End of Dialogue Custom IDR TIMESLOT RE ORDER 2048K IDR MODE 2048K IDR MODE Interactive timeslot re order Normal Normal entry Align frame for Rx TS re o
213. ed Solomon outer FEC Codec if active The Turbo Viterbi or Sequential inner FEC if active The PRBS tester in ESC or Aux channels if active The errors counted over one minute on the FAW if framed 6 No estimate of BER FAW An estimate based on the count of errors on the Frame Alignment Words FAW received by the deframer over a 1 minute sliding window Only available if operating in a framed mode FEC An estimate of the output error rate from the FEC decoder based on the count of errors into the FEC and the FEC code rate Note that if FEC is manually selected but Reed Solomon is active the BER estimate will not include the significant error improvement of the RS codec gv eso mo RS An estimate of the output error rate of the RS Decoder based on the number of uncorrectable words passed by the decoder PRBS The real BER as measured by the PRBS tester whether it be in the ESC or Aux channel or the main data channel Default AUTO This option is only applicable to Custom IBS Minimum overhead modes In this mode the overhead is varied to accommodate any ESC requirements and if the ESC and main data rate are very low the overhead multiframe structure might be very long Whenever the Rx carrier is re acquired the multiframe alignment also has to be re acquired and this option allows the maximum multiframe period to be specified in order to prevent excessively long multiframe periods affecting carrier re acquisition times By
214. ee so Bad 140 8 1 DOPPLER amp PLESIOCHRONOUS BUFFERING 140 8 2 DETERMINING CLOCKING SCHEMES AND BUFFER SIZE 141 8 2 1 Clock Loop ATONG End i45 een ERA See ea tha berate eae 141 8 22 No Clock LOOP ok IR tto Re et e tee ede ee e 141 8 2 3 Determining Buffer 142 8 3 PARTIAL INSERT AND MULTIDESTINATIONAL WORKING 143 8 4 CHOOSING OPTIMUM CUSTOM VALUES OF RS N amp K 144 85 NOTES ON DATA RATES amp SYMBOL RATES 145 8 6 DETERMINING EXACT MAXIMUM ESC BAUD 146 8 7 CLOSED NETWORK PLUS ESC 0 0000 cece 147 8 71 Overhead hates cera a ee i ek eec e 147 8 7 2 Closed Network Plus ESC via the Custom Service menu 148 8 7 3 ESC channel with mis match configurations 148 8 8 CROSS REFERENCE TO SDM300 D I amp FRAMING MODES 150 8 9 M35 SERAMBEUERS 6 tered seas iren 152 8 10 INTERWORKING DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS EQUIPMENT 153 8 11 INTRODUCTION TO AUPC AUTOMATIC UPLINK POWER CONTROL 154 8 11 1 Introduction cud eee een lige ed eae E bn Ese Mr Me E 154 8 11 2 Configuring AUPC for operation 157 8 12 TUTORIAL ON CARRIER NOISE amp Eb No MEASUREMENTS
215. ee the description of the Async ESC connector under the rear panel description which starts on the next page Green Modem itself OK Status LEDs Red Modem internal fault LED Indicators Five LEDs on the front panel provide summary fault O STATUS Green Rx traffic OK information so that even when the LCD is unavailable Rx traffic fault external to modem for status display Such as when the operator is O TX ok Green Tx traffic OK reconfiguring the unit and a menu is displayed the test Tx trafic fault extemal tomodem current status can always be assessed If any of the stanpBy LED s indicate a fault press MAIN then select Status Oft Normal Tx carrier on to display the current fault condition Amber Tx carrier off or Standby of 1 1 Off Normal Amber Loopback or Test mode active n normal operation there should be three GREEN LED s showing Y If the Status is RED the unit has failed due to internal or possibly external conditions Refer to the text on the LCD Status screen and rectify if possible If the TX OK or RX OK LED s are off then the Tx or Rx traffic has failed due to an external fault again refer to the text on the LCD Status screen and rectify if possible Ifthe TEST LED is AMBER a test mode or loopback is active press MAIN and select Jest to query or change the test settings STANDBY LED is Amber the Tx carrier is off It may be i
216. elf to providing timeslot ID Maintenance for Odd value of N ie values which the fixed length TS32 multiframe cannot accommodate This is an efficient use of the overhead as when not sending signalling information 15 out of every 16 TS16 TS48 locations are still available for high rate ESC even when the CAS multiframe is required to support Odd values of N or Robbed Bit Signalling CAS MULTIFRAME SUMMARY TS Identity Maintenance Method amp Length of CAS Multiframe in frames ON Any Drop Insert mode G 732 Drop Insert T1 D4 T1 ESF without signalling with CAS RBS mode RBS Mode 1 TS 32 CAS 8 TS 32 TS 32 2 TS 32 CAS 8 TS 32 TS 32 3 TS 32 CAS 8 CAS 24 CAS 24 4 TS 32 CAS 16 TS 32 P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 211 5 TS 32 CAS 8 TS 32 TS 32 6 TS 32 CAS 8 CAS 24 CAS 24 7 CAS 56 CAS 56 CAS 56 CAS 56 TS 32 CAS 32 CAS 8 CAS 16 CAS 24 CAS 24 CAS 72 CAS 72 TS 32 CAS 8 TS 32 TS 32 11 CAS 88 CAS 88 CAS 88 CAS 88 TS 32 CAS 16 CAS 24 CAS 24 13 CAS 104 CAS 104 CAS 104 CAS 104 CAS 56 CAS 56 CAS 56 CAS 56 TS 32 CAS 8 CAS 24 CAS 24 TS 32 CAS 64 CAS 16 CAS 32 17 CAS 136 CAS 136 CAS 136 CAS 136 CAS 24 CAS 24 CAS 72 CAS 72 19 CAS 152 CAS 152 CAS 152 CAS 152 TS 32 CAS 16 TS 32 CAS 8 21 CAS 56 CAS 56 CAS 168 CAS 168 22 CAS 88 CAS 88 CAS 88 CAS 88 23 CAS 184 CAS 184 CAS 184 CAS 184
217. em number serial number and software version Pressing Down Arrow leads to further screens which give the identity of the sub boards and interfaces fitted to the equipment SUPPLIER This screen together with screens accessed by the down arrow give the manufacturer with contact fax and phone numbers and e mail addresses VIEW CONFIG This screen allows the configuration of the modem to be displayed After selecting between Tx Rx Interface Common and Remote M amp C subsequent presses of the down arrow display every parameter in that group TERR INTFC This option displays information relating to the terrestrial interface card fitted into the modem The information includes Card type and what card it is emulating when it is a multi standard card the data rate limits and a list of every interface line the card provides along with a brief description of the function of that line example follows Tx path input SD Main Tx data input Stable on rising edge of TT B line Info Terr Intfc sample interface line description FEATURES This option allows the current feature set of the modem to be checked and also further features added by entering a Feature Code Refer to Appendix C for further details BUC LNB This menu is only available on the P310 L Band modem It provides information on the current BUC amp LNB connected BUC Type Std Ku Software ver 2 Power Class 2W 33dBm Info BUC LNB Menu BUC Type This may be
218. emote M amp C to use features which it cannot provide This cannot happen with local control as locally the configuration screens do not show features which are not available 2 Itwas configured to use a certain feature which is no longer available see Temporary Features or Test Features in Appendix C2 Please refer to Appendix C2 previous page for a description of the feature list shown as a series of letters on the equipment display P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 194 APPENDIX D REMOTE M amp C REMOTE M amp C PROTOCOL Summary The P300 Series Modems support two separate remote M amp C protocols these are 1 Paradise FDC protocol compatible with all previous Paradise equipment 2 SA bus protocol as defined by Scientific Atlanta The protocols should co exist without adverse effect on the same M amp C bus provided the unit addresses are unique Both protocols assume one Master device and multiple Slave devices The Master device initiates all communications and Slave devices only ever send a message in response to a request from the Master Character Format Baud Rate The character format amp Baud Rates are as follows Paradise FDC 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit selectable 300 19200 Baud SA bus 7 bits even parity 1 stop bit specified only at 1200 amp 9600 Baud The SA bus protocol definition specifies that the characters the Body of the message should
219. enu NORMAL A Backward alarm facility is provided causing a deferred alarm to be raised on this local equipment if the distant end Rx fails for any reason eg local Tx failure or distant Rx failure The proportion of the overhead assigned to the ESC drops slightly 68 to 65 so the overhead may increase marginally to provide the same async ESC rate NO BACK ALM No Backward Alarm is sent Tx or received Rx and so slightly more of the overhead is available to the async ESC lowering the total overhead marginally See Overhead Rates in section 8 7 1 on page 147 for details of the overhead percentage requirements for differing mixes of main data and async ESC data rates P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 56 6 6 3 6 6 4 Change Tx Rx BASEBAND Menu This menu allows selection of the Baseband mode of the Modem Tx BB 1 Continuous data 2 Drop Mux 3 Other function Change Tx Rx Baseband Menu Continuous Data Selects normal continuous data interface operation the menu dialogue for this continues in the next section Drop Insert This option is only shown if the Drop Insert feature is available standard on the P300 IBS and above It selects the Drop Tx Insert Rx mode of baseband operation where a T1 or E1 PCM bearer is routed through the equipment with Tx data being dropped from specific timeslots of the bearer and Rx data being inserted back into the same or other timeslots
220. er is not dependent upon the bearer into the Insert Mux either when the Insert Mux is generating the bearer or when the Rx path is receiving an independent 2M stream which contain a CAS multiframe In these two circumstances the CAS MF backward alarm is sent TE in all other circumstance the TSO backward alarm is sent TB P300H P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 227 P300H Normally an incoming TS16 Multiframe backward alarm causes the modem to transmit a Satellite Frame Backward Alarm SB to be sent However if the user control Thin Route Spoof Change User opt Operation Terr Sat Thin Route Spoof is set to On to spoof full bearer connectivity when passed over a Thin Route satellite circuit ie not the whole bearer data rate then an incoming TS16 Multiframe backward alarm causes the modem to transmit a Satellite Multiframe Backward Alarm SD instead of SB to keep the Frame and Multiframe backward alarm functions separate Line code setting For P1431 32 cards check the switch on the card itself For P1440 41 42 cards which are configured from the front panel check with Change Terr Int Electrical then reselect G 703 which is followed by the line code configuration All ones the Alarm Indication Signal AIS is a means of signalling to downstream equipment that the data being sent is not valid It is advised to leave AIS detection enabled so the modem can inform you when there is a fault with the traffic
221. er format may be edited by pressing 1 or 2 to select 7 or 8 bits and 3 4 or 5 to select No parity Even parity or Odd parity respectively Note that as described in the last paragraphs shortening the async character reduces the maximum continuous Baud rate as the ESC channel is limited to a finite character rate per second and the more bits in each async character the higher the effective Baud rate allowed without exceeding the ESC channel character rate limit Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Config Async SET AS REM M amp C This option sets the ESC channel async parameters to match the settings on the Remote M amp C port This is specifically intended to simplify remote M amp C within the IBS SMS overhead via the ESC channel Note this is a one time setting and if the remote M amp C parameters are varied the ESC channel will not follow them If the remote M amp C Baud rate exceeds the maximum continuous ESC rate then the following warning will be issued although the copying of the parameters will go ahead NOTE ESC channel not guaranteed above 2962 Baud YES Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Set as Remote Warning Menu P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 82 6 6 33 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA INTERFACES Menu This leads to the selection of the ESC and Aux interfaces The interface selection screens are only shown for active ports and so either or both may show in turn depending on how the ports are defined for us
222. eries Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 66 For Turbo FEC the FEC rate selection screen is as follows Select Turbo Mode Code rate then YES 0 750 Industry de facto 3 4 rate Change Tx Rx Mod Demod FEC Rate Menu Turbo The Turbo FEC code rate may be selected from the scroll list of preset rates displayed on the screen pressing YESwill accept the current FEC rate and return to the Change Tx Modulator menu This list can contain up to 31 different rates but currently only the following are defined Mu Description Exact Delay Modulation Schemes from rate BPSK QPSK OQPSK 8PSK 0 3125 Industry de facto 5 16 rate 0 3125 2662 vas7 0 477 Industry de facto 21 44 rate 21 44 4056 va s7 0 493 Paradise v2 rate 2028 4116 4056 va 4o n a 0 666 Paradise 2 3 rate 2499 3748 4998 57 va s7 V3 57 0 750 de facto 3 4 rate 0 750 4446 v3 40 Ia 0 789 0 789 Paradise 3 4 rate 3 4 rate 3249 4116 6498 v3 40 n a 0 875 Paradise 7 8 rate 0 875 450 V3 40 n a Low Latency yes 450 Note on processing delay Use the data rate before the FEC to determine the delay in milliseconds from the delay in bits For example at 1Mbps using Rate 0 789 Turbo FEC the FEC delay is 6498 1000000 seconds which is 6 5ms Note on Low Latency 7 8 Rate Turbo As Turbo FEC schemes go this is a relatively poor performer BUT it does provide about a 1d
223. ernal options are possible Reference oscillator options several of varying stabilities An internal 100W PSU to provide a DC feed to an external BUC An optional FSK communications board to enable a modem and BUC to bo operated from the modem front panel and to provide closed loop power control to the BUC flange P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 16 3 4 FRONT PANEL FEATURES srarus PARADISE RX OK DATACOM e p Tx path OK for 3 7days 1 Rx path OK for 2 1days BER lt 1 12 1 P300 Series O TEST C Satellite Modem STANDBY P300 Modem front panel view Keyboard The keyboard is of the membrane type an integral part of the front panel which provide a direct tactile feel There are 15 keys in total number keys in the range 0 to 9 an up arrow key t down arrow key 1 MAIN key YES ENTERkey and NO PREV key LCD display This backlit display provides 2 lines of 40 characters each and is highly legible even in conditions of high ambient light The LCD provides detailed information about the status and configuration of the unit and when appropriate prompts the user to enter data via the keypad Monitor port The circular monitor port available on the front panel of previous products has been moved to the rear panel and is now combined onto the Async ESC connector a D type connector instead of the difficult to obtain 8 pin din audio type connector S
224. es and options are available in the equipment you have If it is one of the four standard configurations then a copy of the next page might be useful as you work through the manual to prevent you having to refer back to it If itis a user defined feature set then refer to Appendix C2 which explains how to determine the features available on any P300 Series modem When specifying the feature set of a modem an Excel spreadsheet which mimics the following table is available on request The spreadsheet directly calculates the cost of the varying features you may specify and when printed may be used to order modems It also directly generates an order code for any user feature set you may specify and lists any warnings with the feature set you have specified P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 10 2 3 FEATURE SUMMARY Es aes Series pu h ti Description means h w option vsar TCM iae Base Modem BPSK QPSK OQPSK 4 8kbps to 512 kbps modem RS422 V 35 RS232 interface with 25 amp 37 pin connectors 50MHz 90MHz IF interface with 100Hz resolution Viterbi FEC v v v v Viterbi FEC rate 12 34 amp 7 in BPSK QPSK and OQPSK Sequential FEC Sequential FEC rate 34 amp 7 BPSK QPSK OQPSK Turbo FEC TPC Turbo FEC various preset code rates inc V5 34 7 amp 0 789 INTELSAT Reed Solomon outer FEC with n k t 126 112 7 Reed Solomon switching to 225 205 10 or 219 201
225. eslots not already in the selection are toggled on and placed on the end of the selection Enter any single timeslot as a single or dual digit eg 0 5 05 23 31 Enter groups of timeslots as two pairs eg 02 5 two through five 11 17 12 2 For those familiar with other manufacturers equipment which use the term mapping to relate the terrestrial timeslot selection to the order in the satellite frame The terrestrial timeslots are mapped into the satellite frame in the order listed on this timeslot selection screen If you want to revise the mapping simply re order the timeslots on this screen For the example shown above the mapping would be as follows Terrestrial 1 3 4 5 17 16 15 23 1 ot to Satellite 1 2 39 4 5 g 7 8 Y NOTE If the Extended D I feature is available standard on P300 TCM timeslots can be arbitrarily re ordered and so group selections may be down as well as up eg 11 17 means send in order 11 12 13 17 whereas 17 11 means send in order 17 16 15 11 NOTE In G 732 mode whilst TSO can be dropped it must always be replaced in TSO at the distant end otherwise there is the possibility of frame alignment ambiguity P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 58 The Modem hardware is capable of duplication and omission of timeslots although the operator interface described above does not allow such selections If this is a requirement please contact the
226. f four or eight The Custom Features Feature allows use of shorter codewords to reduce interleaver de interleaver delay on low data rate circuits For example switching from n k t 126 112 7 to 64 56 4 provides approximately the same correction ability 7 in 126 5 596 and 4 in 64 6 2596 respectively with similar overheads 126 112 12 5 64 56 14 3 but with interleaving amp decoder delays reduced from 5632 to 3104 bits 156 ms to 85 ms at 32 kbps P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 27 Drop Insert Feature Bearer Types Timeslot Selection Bearer Generation Bearer Backup Terrestrial CRC Timeslot ID Maintenance T1 D4 T1 ESF and G 732 Independent selection of arbitrary timeslots for both Drop and Insert The terrestrial bearer may be looped through the Drop mux then Insert mux or terminated after the Drop mux and a new blank bearer generated by the Insert mux The bearer generated within the Insert mux provides full multiframe and CRC support and may be generated from the Tx Clock Station Reference Satellite Clock or Internal reference In the event that the Insert mux bearer clock is lost or AIS is supplied then the Insert mux will switch temporarily to bearer generation mode in order to preserve the receive traffic The backup bearer may be generated from the Station Reference Satellite Clock or Internal reference Fully supported with front panel display of terrest
227. factory to discuss your needs After the timeslot selection the following prompt appears Dropped TS 1 Leave 2 Replace with idle code Change Tx Rx Baseband Drop Insert Idle Menu When data is Dropped from the bearer there is the option to either leave the Tx data on the bearer or to replace it with an idle code If the Rx data is to be inserted into the same timeslots as the as the Tx data has been dropped from then the Rx data will replace the Tx and it is of no consequence if it is first replaced by Idle code or not LEAVE The Tx data remains on the bearer and will be accessible to downstream equipment unless Rx data inserted over it REPLACE The Tx data is replaced as follows MSB LSB G 732 Timeslots 01010101 G 732 CAS in TS16 0101 if CAS signalling mode active T1 ESF amp T1 D4 Timeslots 10000000 Note that in G 732 mode TSO is never replaced with idle code even if it is part of the Drop selection and Idle is selected If the modem is set for CLOSED NETWORK or standard IDR operation the dialogue finishes here If the modem is set for CUSTOM IDR Low rate format then skip to the on page 62 If the Extended feature is available Standard on P300 TCM and is set for Closed Net Plus ESC IBS or CUSTOM IBS then the following two prompts appear depending on the PCM bearer selected Note that Channel Associated Signalling CAS amp Robbed Bit Signalling RBS are described in para 10 2
228. ffer Clocking BUFFER SIZE Menu 92 6 7 7 Change Rx DEMOD Menu 93 6 7 8 Change Rx Demod IF FREQUENCY Menu 93 6 7 9 Change Rx Demod MODULATION 93 6 7 10 Change Rx Demod FEC Menu 93 6 7 11 Change Rx Demod REED SOLOMON Menu 93 6 7 12 Change Rx Demod SCRAMBLER Menu 93 6 7 13 Change Rx Demod SPECTRUM INVERT Menu 93 6 7 14 Change Rx Demod SWEEP Menu 94 6 7 15 Change Rx Demod AUPC Menu 95 6 7 16 Change Rx ESC AUX BA Menu 95 6 7 17 Change Rx RX TX Menu 20 000 c cece n 95 CHANGE TERR INTFC MENU eees 96 6 8 1 Change Terr intfc ELECTRICAL 2 000000 0 ccc eee 96 6 8 2 Change Terr intfc CONTROL LINES 0 98 6 8 3 Change Terr intfc CARD SPECIFIC 0000s 98 CHANGE REM M amp C MENU so tte eens 99 6 9 1 Local Control TAKE AWAY GIVE AWAY Selection 99 6 9 2 Change Rem M amp C CONFIGURE Menu 100 CHANGE USER OPT MENU
229. follows Demod 1 Freq 2 Sweep 3 AUPC most of Rx follows Tx as Rx Tx active Change Rx Demod Menu Rx Tx Active Each of this is now discussed in turn referring back to the Tx path screens where operation is identical Change Rx Demod IF FREQUENCY Menu See Change Tx Rx Modulator IF Frequency Menu on page 65 Change Rx Demod MODULATION Menu See Change Tx Rx Modulator Modulation Menu on page 65 Change Rx Demod FEC Menu See Change Tx Rx Modulator FEC Menu on page 66 Change Rx Demod REED SOLOMON Menu See Change Tx Rx Modulator RS Menu on page 68 Change Rx Demod SCRAMBLER Menu See Change Tx Rx Modulator Scrambler Menu on page 69 Change Rx Demod SPECTRUM INVERT Menu See Change Tx Rx Modulator Spectrum Invert Menu on page 72 P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 93 6 7 14 Change Rx Demod SWEEP Menu Demod sweep range Normal 25kHZz 1 Normal 2 User Change Rx Demod Sweep Menu The operator has control of the sweep range of the Demodulator but under normal circumstances Normal should be selected Normal is defined as BPSK QPSK amp 8PSK 80 of the recommended carrier spacing or 25 kHz whichever is the lower The recommended carrier spacing is 1 4 times the symbol rate ie data rate framing FEC Modulation See note later when operating without FEC AND without Framing OQPSK 25 of the receive symbol rate ie d
230. follows and the PC returns to the DOS prompt Programming complete Press YES ENTER to continue Boot Programming Complete screen At this point the processor re boots The first reboot with a new main code the unit performs a checksum test on each bank displaying the results as follows Checksumming main code Banks VV VV V EEERRNNNNNNNNNNNNNNNN Boot Flash Checksum screen Finally when the checksums are verified the processor jumps into the new Flash code and begins execution of the latest version of the embedded M amp C code Should the code fail to execute properly hold down the No Prev key to clear the memory Should the program ever crash or be otherwise reset other than from power up it will automatically do an extensive checksum test as above However from a normal power up where it may be critical to restore the service as quickly as possible only an abbreviated test is performed and the screen above will not be displayed OTHER BOOT CODE OPTIONS The other options available from power up by holding in a key on the keypad are MAIN Stay in boot code for serial download NO PREV Clear the non volatile memory 0 Set the LCD contrast to mid scale 1 Display Boot Code software version The following options allow a fully equipped P300 to act as a model with fewer options to enable testing of a lower specified product to see if it provides the facilities required 4 Reduce the functionality to
231. for 1 is concerned providing receive data Full traffic will switch back to the first modem which has no faults ie where the modem has a good receive signal and the ACU indicates not blocked When both ACU s indicate not blocked ie most of the time the normal modem 1 for 1 redundancy operates This might take a few reads to fully understand but it is an elegant solution to the problem requiring nothing other than a data cable a standard 1 for 1 cable and a two wire link ground amp plocked from each ACU to the corresponding modem A word of advice on installation DO NOT put the modems at opposite end of the ship and run the 1 for 1 and data cables along the entire ships length Instead co locate the modems keep the 1 for 1 cable and data Y cable short and run the modem IF along the length of the ship If the P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 203 12 13 14 15 P300H ACU s are located at the ends of the ship with the antennas use coax cable to connect the blocked signal from the ACU to the modem along the ships length screen ground centre block Comstream Sequential Mode Software gt V2 12 This switches the Sequential encoder and decoder to be Comstream compatible at Rate in Rate 1 it is already compatible and this flag has no effect plus there is no Rate on the CM701 Note that when interworking with Comstream equipment with Viterbi FEC
232. g too high now lt 19dBm gt The Receive RF signal level is above the range specified for this equipment Decrease the level to ensure specified performance is met Rx Warn Eb No below user threshold The Receive Eb No derived from the Carrier to noise ratio is worse than the user threshold set for a deferred alarm Change User Opt Thresholds Eb No This may be used as an advance warning of service degradation P300H P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 225 Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Other Rx Warn Rx BER below user threshold Rx Warn Buffer slips too frequent YES Rx Warn Ins bearer BER gt user threshold Rx Warn Buffer overflow amp recentre Rx Warn Buffer underflow amp recentre Rx Warn Ins mux slipping data to sync Rx Warn RS Decoder FIFO slip Rx Warn Insert mux sig FIFO slip P300H The final Bit Error Rate is worse than the user threshold set for a deferred alarm Change User Opt Thresholds User BER This may be used as an advance warning of service degradation The source for the BER measurement is user defined Change User Opt Operation Satellite BER est Normally this should be set to Auto however it may be user set to other BER sources if required It is possible to manually set the source to the inner FEC Turbo Vit Seq even when the outer FEC RS is active thereby not including the effects of the RS error correction
233. ge 191 If you contact Paradise Datacom directly we will supply within a few minutes by fax a Feature Code to provide the extra features you require eg addition of Reed Solomon etc This will be a temporary code valid for probably 30 days to enable you to raise and place a purchase order on your supplier When you place a formal order on the supplier for the features a Feature Code will be provided to make the features permanent If you are unable to contact Paradise Datacom for some reason use one of the 5 day Feature Tests to give you all the features for 5 days while you contact us Each modem has only 3 Feature Tests of 5 days each but when you enter a valid Feature Code the number of Feature Tests will be reset to again FEATURES TEST These screens give the user access to start and monitor the user enabled Test features facility This enables the user to test all the features the modem can provide for a period of 5 days up to three times on each modem P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 192 ALPHABETIC FEATURE LIST Included as standard rhs lL EY Ee P300 VSAT P300 IBS P300 IDR P300 TCM P300 User Feature Letter Description of Feature 0 8 0 Tx path without this the modem can be Rx only Rx path without this the modem can be Tx only Variable rate Variable data rate if enabled see R fixed if not See Q
234. gle 196 Message Categories Perses xe saul eor e ea dee m el de a eed a den Rs 197 List of All Remote M amp C Messages 198 APPENDIX E CUSTOMER SPECIFIC FEATURES 201 RELAY MODE SETTING xu ede eee hv RE RR EE RI dr wo Rosada 201 FAULT MODE PER RP dhe ew ee dda ewe PA 202 UNCOMMITTED DAC OUTPUT CONTROL 2 00 00 cee esr 205 APPENDIX F FRAMING AND DROP INSERT OVERVIEW 207 IBS SMS FRAMING togata tee han eg ap ed alee e ra pan eter d pate ene rd ma aa 207 IBS SMS Service Features 207 IBS SMS Definition a eed 207 Implementation of Timeslot ID Maintenance 209 Signalling Systems Introduction CCS CAS amp RBS 210 signalling Over Satellite rose eR RR blr RESERVE 210 CAS MultlfEamig s oed oe ege e se S o A ete LA o Ag 211 IDR FRAMIN G 25 2 25 rtr rr e ere DH Re bar Ee ei rb s 213 IDR Service Features hh 213 APPENDIX G FAULT MESSAGES AND ACTION TABLE 214 1 1 1 1 2 EMC ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY AND SAFETY NOTICES IMPORTANT PLEASE READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE INSTALLATION AND USE EMC ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY The P300 Modem Satellite Modems have been s
235. guring the Rx path after a user parameter change Rx Warn Backward alarm from satellite A Backward Alarm is detected at the Rx Input This indicates that equipment downstream of the D TB TRANSMIT path ie from our modem Tx output though the Tx chain through the satellite and then through the whole distant end Rx path or even further downstream has failed and is returning an alarm This may be due to a receive downstream equipment failure this Tx chain failing the satellite itself but also possibly the modem Tx output failing Check the modem Tx path indicates OK Check the Tx IF output from the modem is connected to the upconverter equipment and onwards monitor the Tx carrier or distant Rx if possible with a spectrum analyser Rx Warn CAS MF Back alm from sat Rx Warn Back alm 1234 from satellite Rx Warn O p clk fail lt source gt now PLL P300H A Multiframe Backward Alarm is detected at the Rx Input this indicates that equipment downstream D TE of the TRANSMIT path has failed to find CAS Multiframe sync and is returning an alarm Note 7 Realistically while this could be caused by any equipment from the Tx modulator onwards it is unlikely to be other than the Tx mod the Rx demod or further down the Rx path as other failures would result in a more catastrophic failure and the correspondingly more significant backward Alarm above The Modem only detects this alarm when the Rx baseband is set to use the I
236. hange User opt Operation Terr Sat Thin Route Spoof is set to On to spoof full bearer connectivity when passed over a Thin Route satellite circuit ie not the whole bearer data rate then a CAS backward alarm incoming on the Rx Input is passed to the terrestrial as a terrestrial Multiframe backward Alarm SD If Thin Route Spoof is not active the warning is still displayed but no actions are taken ie SD is not generated You might try to clear the units non volatile memory then reconfigure the unit from scratch From the main menu select 0 then User Parameters Clr All Reset If this fails contact the factory for an RMA number then return the unit for repair If the unit will not boot to allow you to select from the screens you can also clear the memory by powering up the unit while holding in the NO key but you have to hold the key in until the unit gives its normal three beeps If you wish to use Drop Insert and pass the incoming satellite timing to the downstream network this is only possible by setting the Rx Insert bearer to Generate not Loopthrough Change Rx Baseband Insert dialogue and selecting Rx Clock as Satellite Change Rx Buff Clock Gen Bearer Clock If the downstream equipment requires a terrestrial TS16 Multiframe you must configure the modem to use CAS so the generated bearer has a TS16 multiframe P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 228
237. hannel will suffer significant character errors as the backward alarm status is output as ESC data 2 More significantly the extra data routed to the ESC channel decoding circuitry from the overhead in our example one bit per frame which carried the backward alarm from the distant modem is NOT limited to 2400Baud by the sending modems physical Async ESC port and may exceed the rate at which the UART in the receive modem can output these spurious ESC characters Specifically the small FIFO between the framing overhead circuitry and the UART can get massively overrun and after such an overrun this may lead to the ESC operating in delayed character mode When in this mode only a total modem reset will restore normal ESC channel operation In summary it is possible by mis matching the configuration of a pair of modems to set them so that they continuously output spurious or errored characters from the ESC channel or force the ESC channel into the delayed character mode where a major power down type reset is required to restore normal ESC operation As the modems at each end of the link are simply operating as set and don t know that the configurations are mis matched it is not possible to automatically prevent or recover from such a configuration P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 149 8 8 CROSS REFERENCE TO SDM300 D I amp FRAMING MODES The P300 Series Modems are equipped with the Drop In
238. hannels This is an emulation P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 19 of the most popular modes of the P1348 P1448 voice data mux card used often in SNG applications An RS232 RS422 RS485 Port for sync async ESC traffic this port replaces the shared ESC Aux access via the Async ESC connector on the main unit Used to provide access to the 8kbps synchronous IDR ESC channel If the Async ESC feature is available standard on P300 IBS and above then Async access to the 8kbps channel is also available Again if the Async ESC feature is available this port also provides the high rate Async ESC on IBS SMS or Closed Net Plus ESC services An RS232 RS422 port for sync async Aux traffic this port replaces the shared ESC Aux access via the Async ESC connector on the main unit The Aux port provides 32 or 64kbps access to the IDR overhead in place of one or both of the IDR 32kbps ADPCM Audio ESC channels If the IBS SMS feature is available then this port may be configured to provide either the IBS low rate INTELSAT oversampled ESC facility or a higher rate synchronous channel within the IBS SMS overhead Pinout details are provided in Appendix B Terrestrial Interface Connectors The P300 provides as standard both 25 pin EIA530 and 37 pin RS449 female DCE connectors NOTE that these are simply wired in parallel and you should not connect both simultaneously The electrical interface is front panel selectable to be
239. haracter is converted into a byte buffered through a small FIFO and then sent synchronously into the bits available in the frame for the ESC channel using a leading 0 to indicate that the next 8 bits of overhead available to the ESC carry the 8 bits of a character These 8 bits might be at one bit per satellite frame or if a high proportion of the overhead is assigned to the ESC such as in Closed Net Plus ESC mode they could be successive bits eg the whole 8 bits of satellite TS48 This works fine and normally if you mismatch the configuration of a pair of modems then the modems will not talk to each other as they calculate different overhead percentages to accommodate the Async ESC channel the symbol rates do not match and hence they will not communicate However once the overhead reaches the 0 39 minimum changes to the ESC configuration do not change the overhead percentage it is already at minimum and the modems will communicate with mismatched ESC settings For example if one modem is set to provide a ESC and a backward alarm facility and the other ESC only then the modem without the backward alarm facility will route the parts of the overhead which carry the backward alarm from the distant end to the ESC channel decoding circuitry because that is what it has been configured to do This can result in two problems 1 When the configurations are mis matched there will be spurious characters output from the ESC channel or the ESC c
240. he Modem reads the BUC U TF BM range now xx temperature by FSK and the BUC is outside it s operating temperature P300H P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 215 Unit Fault Rx IF synth failure The synthesiser which generates the LO to receive the Rx carrier has failed An external 10MHz station reference may be used as the synthesizer reference so if the station reference is in use check the it is present and has clean enough phase noise for its intended use D HEC E EEEN D Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Other BUC Fault PLL in Block UpConverter lock fail The Modem is configured to operate with a Paradise BUCand the PLL generating the SHFcarrier in U TF BM 10M ref to BUC On the BUC has failed The state of the reference feed to the BUC is also reported Warning TX CARRIER IS MUTED as power The Tx carrier is set to mute after a power fail The power has failed and returned and the operator is D It is the carrier mute outage CARRIER 1 Restore 2 Mute offered the option to restore the Tx carrier status to ON The Tx carrier is set under Change Tx which causes the Mod Carrier warning Warning Int temp lt nn gt C Tx CARRIER This message refers to the internal unit temperature Check the modem vent slots are clear and the D WILL MUTE outside operating range 0 60C rear fan has not failed This Tx Mute may be disabled
241. he following paragraphs Change BUC LNB TX BUC Menu Tx BUC 1 BUC Type 2 DC amp References 3 SHF Frequency 4 SHF Power Units 5 BUC Control Change BUC LNB Tx BUC Menu fewer option when not L Band Options for BUC Type DC amp References amp BUC Control are only offered on L Band modems BUC Control is offered subject to the BUC Type and the Modem BUC control mode selected Each option is defined in the following paragraphs P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 108 6 12 2 Change BUC LNB Tx BUC BUC TYPE Menu This screen is only available on P310 L Band modems BUC Attached 1 None 2 Other 3 Std Ku 4 Ext Ku 5 Std 6zINSAT C 7 PALAPA Change BUC LNB Tx BUC BUC Type Menu 1 Options other than None or Other are only displayed if the FSK communications option is present within the P310 and refer to standard Paradise BUC s with which the modem can communicate by FSK If you are using a non Paradise BUC then please select Other and manually configure the BUC parameters The table below specifies the parameters for the listed BUC types BUC Type Lower Frequency Limit Upper Frequency Limit Frequency Shift None Other Std Ku Ext Ku Std C INSAT C PALAPA C Modem IF limits around user set SHF Frequency Shift Modem IF limits around user set SHF Frequency Shift 14 000 GHz 14 500 GHz 13050 MHz 13 750 GHz 14 250 GHz 12800 MHz 5 800 GHz 6 4250 GHz 4900 MH
242. he same PCM bearer is cascaded through several modems Again as it affects what happens when power is removed this is SET BY A SWITCH ON THE CARD not by software Finally for special customer requirements it is possible to fit a different interfaces to this port Note that UNLIKE PREVIOUS PRODUCTS the interface does NOT simply unplug Instead it is constructed as part of the main modem and requires snapping off and a connector to be soldered in place before a replacement card can be fitted Standby LED This LED mirrors the front panel standby LED so that from the rear of the equipment the operator can tell if the carrier is off or more importantly which unit of a 1 1 pair is the offline unit P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 20 BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 6 Jojejnpouieq 23 14 Joje npojw Oa4 OL M9019 NOILLWLS NI X90719 XL gt Wddl TWNYSLNI H3AVATHALNI H3Wvedaa 34408 XH SH xnv 253 N39 aus Wod NVI HadlisadL TVNSLENI WNHYALNI Xnv 253 MSAVSTYALNI SORT A ayey 4 19 Y NI X00790 XL AOVAYALNI S87 cvIZECSU NOILdO osa LNO dovJH31NI xi NOILdO INI 0 6054 IS Ncc VS Hod ou Sy
243. he satellite link The exact implementation of the loop is interface dependent On G 703 cards it is a copper loop on other cards the loopback is provided by a multiplexer at TTL levels If an INTERFACE LOOP doesn t make the sync light on the firebird come on your looking in the wrong place its not the modem try the cables For the remote loopback to function when this loopback is selected the clocking must be configured in a mode where it would work if the loop were made in the cables Rx clocking must be set to something other than 7x Clock switch to Satellite if this is the normal setting and the Tx clocking must the set to 7x Clock In FEC L The data is looped back after the FEC just before it enters the modulator providing a local loop only The Tx data continues to be transmitted and the Rx data from the satellite is ignored ESC amp Aux channel data which is present in the data stream at the FEC is also looped LF L The Tx IF signal is looped back within the modem a IF Tx data is transmitted as normal and the Rx RF signal is ignored The Rx IF Frequency is automatically adjusted to match the Tx IF Frequency so the loop will function ESC amp Aux channel data which is present in the data stream at the IF port is also looped When the loopback is switched off the RX IF Frequency is restored NOTE The TxIF Level needs to be set to above 10dBm for the loopback to function reliably Do NOT change the Tx IF Level f
244. heir original V 35 attempts as well To maximise compatibility with other manufactures equipment in addition to both INTELSAT and CCITT Paradise modems implement two of these other V 35 schemes these modes are referred to as FDC and Linkabit P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 152 8 10 The following table defines what happens when differing scramblers are interworked Scrambler CCITT INTELSAT FDC Linkabit Descrambler CCITT OK 1x10 error rate Hopeless Data invert and 1x10 error rate INTELSAT 1x1 110 error rate error rate Hopeless Data invert FDC Hopeless Hopeless Hopeless Data invert Data Invert Hopeless 1x1 1x10 error rate error rate Linkabit ii Pattern Dependent INTERWORKING DIFFERENT MANUFACTURERS EQUIPMENT Unfortunately not all manufacturers use the same terminology and so this complicates circuit set up To the best of our ability the following table shows the equivalence between manufacturers This table will be extended as information on other products is forthcoming Equipment Scramblers in the columns below are determined to be equivalent Paradise P300 Series Modem CCITT INTELSAT Linkabit Paradise P200 series closed net Scrambler on BPSK requires P300 Tx Spectrum invert i Paradise P230 IBS SMS Uses synchronous IBS Vale so V 35 type not issue FDC SM290 SM
245. her the data is framed or not Adding framing to a Closed Network link would increase the bandwidth decrease the Carrier Noise decrease the displayed E N as it does not compensate for framing and therefore degrade the BER However when brought back to the same E N you do of course recover the same BER Framing therefore does not degrade the BER for a stated E N but it does require more power and bandwidth to achieve the same E N P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 160 19 ased L ZLL 9ZL lt GPLS O apsg e ON ON 607 OL xic O0L soz szz 6 L0Z 6LZ 1 21 921 gP 0 0 lt 60 lt gPISO lt ON Su 607 OL pepooeg SZZ Sq uoneuuojul SOZ 0L SOZ SZZ pepooeg 6LZ Sq uoneuuojul LOZ 6 LOZ 6LZ 9z Sq uoneuuoiul ZL Z ZLL 9ZL eyes eyep Y x u se pesseJudxe ejeJ epo y S19jeJ 9 Se oN d3 A Jo uoniuJep 1VS T3 LNI 18jeJ epoo SY Aq peonpeij eyeJ ul si sJo4o sj294J00 9jeJ 0 enp SH _ ON ye pesseJdxe esiou q3 SNIAV3J3Q Su uoneuuoju aysodwog aY v apso e lt SPSZ I apor z
246. hoice of default status display selected with Change User Opt Display Status SEE SHEET 5 ELECTRICAL INTFC G 703 LINE CODE V 35 AMI Renae B8ZS HDB3 SEE SHEET 6 em T1 LINE LENGTH T1 G 703 only 135 266 t TERR INTERFACE 267 399ft Electrical 400 533ft Control Lines 534 655ft Card Specific IGNORE ALL CONTROL State of all control lines Ignore all ignored by Modem Active configure CHANGE ib ee SGONFIGURE Terni CARD SPECIFIC or ignore for ines Rem M amp C Questions depend on interface DGE interface TR amp RS User Opt eg for 64k G 703 octet monitor amp DTE interface DM amp RR MAI N octet generation All Status CONFIGURE Change Protocol T3 PROTOCOL nterface Monitor Baud Rate Paredise FDC Address bus Info Log REMOTE M amp C Configure REMOTE INTERFACE Test remo Command switches to RS232 remote control local RS485 Setup monitoring still possible Action BAUD RATE Help LOCAL Select by scroll list In Take Away mode Service Command switches to local control remote monitoring still possible ADDRESS In Give Away mode 3 digit numeric entry Can only take local control if user set timeout of remote M amp C activity expires FINAL BER Enter BER threshold below which Deferred alarm is raised DEMOD Eb No THRESHOLDS Enter Demod Eb No threshold below Demo Eb No which Deferred alarm is raised Buffer Slip Distant Eb No a Nass
247. hown to comply with the following standards Emissions EN 55022 Class B Limits and methods of measurement of radio interference characteristics of Information Technology Equipment Immunity EN 50024 Information technology equipment immunity characteristics Extensive testing has been performed to ensure that the unit meets these specifications when configured with any or all of its available options such as IF band impedance IF synthesiser step size data rates etc To ensure that the P300 Modems will maintain compliance with these standards please ensure that the following points are observed 1 The equipment MUST BE OPERATED WITH ITS COVER ON AT ALL TIMES If it is necessary to remove the cover for any reason then you must ensure that the cover is correctly refitted before normal operation 2 Damage to the front panel keyboard membrane or mechanical damage to the chassis could invalidate compliancy Please contact the factory if damage occurs for advice on continued operation 3 Forthe baseband data interfaces all D type connectors must have grounding fingers on the plug shell to guarantee continuous shielding The back shells must comply to the requirements of VDE 0871 and FCC 20708 providing at least 40dB of attenuation from 30 MHz to 1 GHz A good quality cable with a continuous outer shield correctly grounded must be used 4 Connections to the transmit and receive IF interfaces must be made with double screened coaxial cable
248. ich end of each separate M amp C link the device is Devices routing M amp C data to the satellite are considered to be at the Local end of the M amp C link and devices bringing M amp C into a site from the satellite are considered the Remote end of the link For example at a Hub co located with the system M amp C computer every device would be considered the Local end of any M amp C links via satellite However at a node the device providing the incoming M amp C link from the satellite would be considered the Remote of the link but any additional devices taking the M amp C back to the satellite on a second hop to a more distant station would be the Local end again ocal because they are the end of that specific link nearest the M amp C computer Pin numbers for Async ESC ports in the table above are shown as local end pin remote end pin and the cable must be made accordingly taking into account which end of each M amp C linkthe particular ESC connector is For user convenience the P300 amp P400 can provide an internal link from the M amp C port to ESC port avoiding having to cable M amp C to both the M amp C connector and then the ESC connector if distant end control via satellite is to be used When using this internal link you set the ESC interface to Link to M amp C on the modem and specify whether it is Local end or Remote end and the device internally routes it correctly without pin number changes on th
249. ifference in the clock from the satellite and the buffer output clock With typical earth station clock accuracies buffers never need be larger than approximately 16ms P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 140 8 2 8 2 1 8 2 2 DETERMINING CLOCKING SCHEMES AND BUFFER SIZE Please note that unless the clocking scheme has been discussed and agreed by both ends of the link it is unlikely to work reliably You need to know the following things Incoming Rx carrier 1 Is your Tx clock looped back to you at the distant end 2 If not what is the accuracy of the clock they are transmitting Outgoing Tx carrier 1 Are you looping the incoming Rx clock Tx Clock Rx or clock looped by the equipment or cables your end 2 If not what is the accuracy of your Tx clock Follow these guidelines Clock Loop At One End The end with the clock loop requires Buffer disable Rx Clock Sarellite If there is either a cabled clock loop or the equipment loops the Rx clock back to the modem Tx input then set Tx clock Tx In If there is no physical clock loop set the Tx clock Rx The end without the loop requires the buffer active and set for 2 x Doppler shift only as there is no Plesiochronous effect with a clock loop The Buffer size required depends on the satellite orbit or rather the accuracy with which it s position is maintained currently 2ms end to end buffering is enough for the Doppler shif
250. igh rate format T2 E2 Change Tx Rx Service Custom IDR Format Menu The frame format definition for IDR operation varies with the data rate For rates of 1544 or 2048 kbps T1 E1 one format is defined and for rates of 6312 and 8448kbps T2 E2 another is defined there is even a third definition for rates gt 10Mbps In CUSTOM IDR mode you have a free choice of format whatever the data rate and note that IDR operation is not limited to T1 E1 rates but can be used at any data rate even down to 64kbps although INTELSAT define that IBS framing should be used on IDR carriers below 1544kbps LOW The 12 bit overhead defined for T1 E1 operation in IESS 308 is used HIGH The 4 bit overhead on each of three subframes defined for T2 E2 operation is used Whichever format is selected the following prompt appears IDR o h 1 Normal 96k 2 1xAudio 64k 3 No Audio 32k 4 16k ADPCM modes Change Tx Rx Service Custom IDR Overhead Menu If 16k ADPCM MODES are selected the following further prompt appears IDR o h 1 96k 2x16k Audio 32k BER 2 64k 2x16k Audio only Change Tx Rx Service Custom IDR O H 16k Menu P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 135 The modes selected by these two menu s are as follows NORMAL 96K IXAUDIO 4K NO AUDIO 32K 16k Modes 96K 64K The normal IDR overhead is used The overhead is reduced to 64kbps the 32kbps defined for Audio ESC channel 2
251. iguring the Modem Service 1 User Parameters 2 Factory parameters Service Menu P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 131 6 20 1 Service USER PARAMETERS Menu User 1 Lock Kbd 2 Clr Cfg 3 CIr All Reset 4 Fan Auto Service User Parameters Menu The options are LOCK KBD CLR CONFIG CLR ALL RESET FAN This locks the keyboard after displaying a screen showing the unlock code As with all Paradise equipment the unlock code is simply the product number eg 300 The unlock code is displayed before the keyboard is locked on the Modem as we had quite a few calls to the technical support line which start off I ve just selected Lock Keyboard from the menu and This clears the current configuration down to its default blank state This clears the entire non volatile memory including current configuration all configuration memories and the traffic log then resets the processor Normally the fan is temperature controlled switching on at 26C and off at 24C The internal temperature can be monitored on the TEST PSU TEMP menu A Unit Warning deferred alarm will be activated if ever the internal temperature reaches within 3 degrees Centigrade of the operating limits of OC and 60C Should the internal temperature exceed the limits of OC and 60C then a Unit Fault Prompt Alarm is activated The Tx carrier is muted outside the operating temperature range 6 20 2 Service
252. ill changeover if one fails and if the other unit indicates that it is still operational If both units fail simultaneously which is likely to be caused by external circumstances then no changeover takes place Both unit and traffic faults can cause a 1 1 switch over However traffic faults caused externally to the equipment which would affect both units simultaneously do not force a spurious changeover due to the design of the 1 1 switching logic Manual changeovers The Modem is able to give away operation to the other unit of the pair if instructed to do so from the front panel as described earlier The switch over will only occur if the other unit indicates that it is OK and is performed by momentarily simulating a failure in the on line equipment PRACTICAL 1 FOR 1 IMPLEMENTATION To implement 1 FOR 1 switching between any two Modem s the following steps need to be performed 1 Check that both Modem s have the same software issue 2 Connect a 4 way screened cable between the 9 pin 1 FOR 1 connectors on the two Modem s to be used refer to Appendix B for details of the connector as well as the lead required 3 If the modem has the G 703 option fitted ensure the switches on the G 703 options are set for 1 1 operation 4 Plug in the 9 pin 1 1 control lead first this should force one of the Modem s to indicate that its outputs are tri state the standby LED on the front and the Hi Z LED on the rear should illuminate on one mo
253. illator option chosen to compensate for ageing of the quartz crystal To calibrate the internal oscillator either monitor the 10MHz reference if set to be output up the coax OR OFF SATELLITE set the Tx carrier to the highest possible frequency engage CW Carrier Wave from the test menu and measure the carrier centre frequency itself Needless to say Ensure whatever you are measuring the frequency with is itself calibrated warmed up and significantly exceeds the stability of the reference option fitted to the modem viewable under nfo This Unit P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 115 6 13 MONITOR MENU Monitor 1 Demod performance 2 Terrestrial BER 3 Carrier ID s 4 Distant Eb No amp BER 5 AUPC 6 BUC Monitor Menu Each of these options is now discussed in turn 6 13 1 Monitor DEMOD PERFORMANCE Menu Eb No 10 3dB To FEC 6 8E 4 To RS 7 8E 7 FAW BER 1 0E 12 Final BER 1 0E 12 RS Monitor Demod Performance Menu This screen which is regularly updated provides the following information Demod Eb No This is the effective signal to noise ratio the USER sees ie Ebi No the energy per information bit This is also shown on several of the Status screens To FEC This is the measured uncorrected BER before any FEC It is the raw uncorrected bit error rate into the FEC and it is not representative of the User BER after forward error correction Displayed only if the
254. in the Rx traffic P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 91 6 7 6 Change Rx Buffer Clocking BUFFER SIZE Menu This menu is only available of the Rx Clk is not set to Satellite ie Buffer Disable Refer also to the following applications sections for helpful notes 8 1 Doppler amp Plesiochronous Buffering on page 140 8 2 Determining Clocking Schemes amp Buffer Size on page 141 Buffer size end end 16 ms 0 99ms ms YES Change Rx Buffer Clocking Buffer Size Menu The operator enters the end to end buffer size in milliseconds INTELSAT documents typically specify the buffer in terms of its end to end size Should the capacity ever be exceeded and the buffer slip then it will slip by exactly half its capacity back to the mid position For rates of 1544 kbps and 2048 kbps where the data is framed the buffer is usually made to slip integer multiples of the frame length 3ms and 2ms respectively A user option sets if the buffer capacity should automatically be incremented to the nearest integer multiple of frame length at these rates This option is available under CHANGE USER OPT OPERATION TRANSFER BUFFER MF SLIP A second option is available to automatically force the buffer to its mid position whenever the receive traffic switches from failed to OK This takes advantage of any outage and ensures the buffer is centred every time normal operation begins This option is available un
255. in the displayed user BER Check this remains set to Auto unless there is good reason The minimum period between buffer slips is less than the user threshold set for a deferred alarm Change User Opt Thresholds Buffer Slip This is used as an advance warning that the clock accuracy is less than expected causing the buffer to slip more frequently in turn causing data errors The alarm may be muted by pressing YES Check the system clocking to see if a clock has degraded If the clocks are correct but the buffer is slipping too frequently increasing the buffer size will increase the period between buffer slips but at the cost of increased delay This fault will only be displayed if the modem if fitted with an interface which provides four ports for separate input and output of separate Tx Drop and Rx Insert PCM bearers The Bit Error Rate at the Rx bearer input measured on the PCM Frame Alignment Words is worse than the user set threshold for a deferred alarm Change User Opt Thresholds User BER See note 3 The Doppler Plesiochronous buffer has filled and automatically slipped to position itself back in mid position Half the buffer capacity will have been discarded but for framed data eg T1 E1 only frame sync will not be lost if the user option Change User Opt Operation Terr Sat Buffer MF Slip is set to Adjust to ensure buffer slips are an integer multiple of the multiframe length The Doppler Plesiochronous buffer ha
256. ing Handbook Page 28 ESC Aux Port Electrical Interface Aux Data Channel IBS Async ESC Feature Closed Net plus ESC IBS SMS IDR Option IDR ESC Audio Interface Backward Alarms ESC Aux Ports ESC Port IDR P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook A single port provides the interface for optional high rate async ESC IBS SMS or Closed Net plus ESC or the INTELSAT low rate async IBS ESC channel RS232 RS422 or RS485 external interfaces or internal link to Remote M amp C port software selected No external cabling required between the ESC and M amp C ports for M amp C via ESC channel within overhead Other devices externally wired in parallel with M amp C port can also be accessed remotely INTELSAT low rate async ESC definition carried in bit 1 of TS32 providing a synchronous channel at 1 480th of the data rate allowing up to one quarter of this rate for oversampled async data Compliant with INTELSAT IESS 403 low rate ESC definition Overhead scales to provide any user specified async ESC Baud rate whatever the satellite data rate ESC limit is approx 70 of main channel rate overhead varies from lt 0 5 to gt 70 High rate async data using from 1 32nd to 22 32nd of the IBS overhead providing async baud rates from 0 2 to 5 1 of the terrestrial rate eg up to 22400 Baud at 64 kbps Includes modes compatible with the P400 Series P230 amp P1300 P1361 using 20 32nd of the o
257. ing service circuits of the FDM service An 8kbps digital ESC circuit Four independent backward alarms to signal to up to four sites receiving a multidestinational carrier that there is trouble with the link in the other direction Additional Features Paradise products gt P300H Where many IDR carriers exist between sites the Audio ESC on the second and subsequent carriers are not required as the mandatory station to station ESC is met with the first carrier The P300 equipped with the IDR option standard on P300 IDR and above allows 32 or 64kbps access to the bandwidth occupied by these audio channels on the Aux port Allowing either one or both of the ESC channels to be replaced with either revenue bearing data or possibly a PRBS for on line BER measurement with either the internal or an external BERT A far more useful asynchronous interface to the synchronous 8kbps digital ESC circuit allowing for example M amp C information to be conveyed providing the possibility to provide distant end control via the satellite channel The use of 16kbps ADPCM instead of 32kbps allowing both audio ESC s to be compressed into 32kbps not 64kbps This allows either All normal IDR facilities in 64kbps overhead normal IDR facilities plus a 32kbps Aux channel in the normal 96kbps overhead which allows an internal or external PRBS test to run in parallel with the traffic to monitor the service quality Reduced IDR facilities w
258. ional power that the AUPC can use to maintain the distant Eb No to be set Set this so that the total maximum power ie the nominal power set with Change Tx Mod Power PLUS the AUPC Max positive delta power It is within the constraints put upon your carrier by the satellite operators P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 73 6 6 20 6 6 21 6 6 22 6 6 23 Change Tx Modulator AUPC MIN Menu Set AUPC max negative delta power 1 0dB 0 25 0dB dB Yes Change Tx Modulator AUPC Min Menu This allows the minimum delta power that the AUPC can use to maintain the distant Eb No to be set Normally the maximum delta power It is set to give the distant Eb No a boost in poor atmospheric conditions with any improvements in Eb No caused by particularly good atmospheric conditions being considered a bonus It is it not normally necessary to set the minimum delta power to any figure other than zero otherwise any beneficial gain in Eb No caused by good atmospheric conditions will be negated by a decrease in Tx power This facility only exists so if as a condition of being able to use AUPC the satellite operator has asked you to provide a reduced power in particularly good atmospheric conditions at your geographic location This may be in an attempt to balance out any increase in power required for other locations where there may be poor atmospheric conditions with the AUPC in those locations requiri
259. ipment which also inverts the spectrum Note that apart from the fact that the modem will not lock onto an inverted spectrum on a spectrum analyser the carrier is to all appearances unchanged The operator is warned if SPECTRUM INVERT is active when SETUP CHECK is requested NOTE ON BPSK SPECTRUM INVERSION True spectrum inversion does not affect BPSK signals and so in BPSK mode there is no requirement for a true spectrum invert feature Instead in BPSK mode to be compatible with other manufacturers equipment the Tx Spectrum Invert option reverses the ordering of the pairs of Tx data symbols from the FEC encoder to the modulator The Normal option is compatible with other manufacturers BPSK equipment The Invert option ie reverse pairs of Tx symbols is compatible with earlier Paradise products such as the P200 which we consider to have the correct symbol pairing On the Rx path the symbol pairing is automatically determined and so the Rx Spectrum Invert feature has no effect in BPSK If interworking with other manufacturers equipment it is worth reading the notes in the section Interworking different manufacturers equipment on page 153 which covers primarily scrambling but also the requirements for Spectrum Invert with Viterbi Sequential in BPSK and QPSK Change Tx Modulator AUPC Software gt V2 12 This menu is only displayed if the AUPC feature is available It is advisable to refer to the introduction to AUPC in section
260. irstly the operator is asked to specify is a station clock is available Station clock connection 1 None 2 Via BNC 3 RS422 Change Rx Buffer Clocking Station Clock Available Menu Provided None is not selected the display continues to the next question where the frequency of the clock is specified Station clock frequency 0 kHz Change Rx Buffer Clocking Station Clock Frequency Menu This screen allows the operator to set the frequency for the Station Clock if one is available This may be any integer value of kHz eg 1544k 2048k 5000k 10000k or arbitrary values such as 2500k or 4321k Values down to 1kHz not 1MHz are accepted a frequency of 0 indicates there is no station clock When a Station Clock is present the Modem will use it in preference to its internal frequency reference for clock generation of any backup clocks required See the notes in the Rx Clock section on the following page as to where the modem sources the Rx clock from under fault conditions The station clock frequency can be any integer multiple of 1kHz and the 75O BNC will accept any sinusoid gt OdBm or a square wave gt 1Vp p eg G 703 Para 10 synchronising clock The operator should be aware that the losses associated with the coupling transformer on this BNC input increase below 1MHz and at frequencies below this higher levels of input signal may be required The RS422 input is located on the Async ESC connector and requires stan
261. is only available if the Monitor AGC option is fitted when the modem has an uncommitted 0 10V DC output on the alarms connector sourced from a 10 bit DAC This has been specifically provided to allow customer access to internal signals such as the AGC level or the Eb No value The exact signal output on this port is user controlled by entering a number from 0 15 at this menu The full list of options available are described in Appendix E on page 201 Default 0 standard AGC voltage P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 106 6 11 CHANGE TIME DATE MENU Now 11 29 35 on 12 06 97 OK yes 1 Time adjust 2 Date Adjust Change Time Date Menu This menu is self explanatory and allows the user to set the correct time and date so that events added to the traffic log are correctly time stamped The product is Year 2000 compliant P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 107 6 12 6 12 1 CHANGE BUC LNB MENU BUC LNB 1 Tx BUC 2 Rx LNB 3 Tune Ref Change BUC LNB Menu This screen allows access to all the features relating to the BUC LNB or RF chain that follows the modem Although most of these facilities relate to the P310 L Band version of the modem certain options such as Tx Rx Frequency Offsets which allow the IF frequencies to be entered and displayed as final SHF frequencies are also relevant and useful on the standard 70MHz 140MHz P300 Each option is described in t
262. ith 64kbps or 32kbps overhead P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 213 APPENDIX G FAULT MESSAGES AND ACTION TABLE The table on the following pages lists the faults which can be shown on the modem display along with a description of what the fault means and the actions the modem will take if such a fault occurs It also shows relevant checks the operator might make to try to eliminate the fault condition To find a displayed fault in this large table check only the relevant section depending on the first few words of the displayed message For Unit Fault Check UNIT FAULTS section For Warning Check UNIT WARNINGS section For Tx Fault Check TX TRAFFIC FAULTS section For Tx Warn Check TX TRAFFIC WARNINGS section For Rx Fault Check RX TRAFFIC FAULTS section For Rx Warn Check RX TRAFFIC WARNINGS section There are also other screens relating to configuration errors and warnings and screens which are displayed simply for user information Most of these are self explanatory however if you find you need help understanding a message not described here please WRITE DOWN the EXACT TEXT and call us for support Finally many messages also show READ or Note and display further information if the down arrow is pressed this is usually worth reading P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 214 Actions see notes at end of table Tex
263. ithin the ASIC but not having them enabled on every modem Quite simply the ASIC which allows us to provide these features was very expensive to develop and this is a cost we have carried in order to provide the competitive product we offer When we are paid extra to enable a feature which may already be in the ASIC in the modem you already have it is not money for old rope it is simply helping us to recover the very large up front costs of developing the ASIC in the first place Without the prospect of recovering the ASIC development cost by charging for the additional features it provides the ASIC would not have been developed and the modem would be only half the product it is today Upgrading a P300 Series modem may then involve the entering of a Feature Code into the front panel or the addition of one of more of the optional hardware items listed above in addition to entering of a Feature Code into the front panel P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 189 APPENDIX C1 MODEM CAPABILITIES amp UPGRADES DETERMINING THE HARDWARE CAPABILITY OF AMODEM Normally where a Feature Code upgrade is available ie one that does not require a physical hardware upgrade then the screens show Nofe at locations where extra features would appear These notes can however be turned on and off by selecting Change User Opf Display Upgrade Messages Display or Inhibit on recent software so if no message is shown do n
264. l single 2 Four independent alarms Change Tx Rx Service Custom IBS Back Alm mode Menu NORMAL A single backward alarm operates as normal FOUR ALARMS The modem transmits or receives four independent backward alarms using the form outputs and backward alarm inputs normally used for IDR operation This allows a single IBS Tx carrier feeding multiple Rx sites each site receiving part of the data in the Tx carrier to individually indicate to each site a failure of the return carriers from those sites The sequence in which these four alarms are carried in the IBS overhead may be changed under Change User Opt Operation Satellite Back Alm Map Finally all paths through these menus arrive at the following question Overhead Mode 1zNormal 2zMin o h to provide set ESC Change Tx Rx Service Custom IBS Overhead Mode Menu This final option is the most powerful of the features in Custom IBS NORMAL The standard 16 15 6 796 IBS SMS overhead is used The ESC rate available is a fixed proportion of the main data rate but may be manipulated within limits by allocating more or less of the overhead to the ESC When the ESC Baud rate is set too high a warning will be displayed if the overhead cannot provide the requested ESC rate MIN O H The overhead varies to provide the ESC Baud rate set on the ESC menus The following two examples explain typical scenarios At 2048 kbps with a 9600 Baud ESC channel the ove
265. ld press the YESkey to accept the new value Mistakes made when entering data can be corrected by using the NO PREV key On later software if the operator has set the SHF Frequency Change BUC LNB Ix BUC SHF Frequency then the BUC Upconverter chain frequency shift is added to the IF range of the modem and the frequency on this edit screen is displayed and entered directly as the final SHF frequency at the antenna Change Tx Rx Modulator MODULATION Menu Set modulation 1 BPSK 2 QPSK 3 OQPSK 4 8PSK Change Tx Rx Mod Demod Modulation Menu The modulation may be selected from BPSK Bi Phase Shift Keying QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying OQPSK Offset QPSK and if the 8PSK TCM feature is available standard P300 TCM 8PSK Eight Phase Shift Keying Except for the very lowest of data rates where BPSK reduces the effects of system phase noise QPSK or preferably 8PSK is virtually always used for bandwidth efficiency When the demodulator is set to OQPSK it will take approximately twice as long to acquire a carrier for the same sweep width as QPSK due to the lack of power nulls in the OQPSK modulated carrier The allowable combinations of Modulation and FEC mode Rate are BPSK QPSK OQPSK None Viterbi or Sequential at rate 1 2 34 or 7 8PSK TCM only at rate See the OQPSK primer below and also refer to Appendix E Fault Mode 12 for interworking OQPSK between early and later P400 series modems P300H
266. lected 8 Configure the receive path similarly if Rx Tx is active then only the timeslots need selecting Note the P300 Modem equipped with the Extended D I feature standard on P300 TCM can support any value of N not just N 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 30 as listed for the SDM300 E1 CAS 2048kbps G 732 with Channel Associated Signalling As above but there is no CCS timeslot to select in step 3 and at step 5 when G 732 Channel Associated Signalling is asked select CAS whereupon the dialogue terminates Note the P300 Modem equipped with the Extended feature standard on P300 TCM can support any value of N not just those listed for the SDM 300 E1 IBS 2048kbps with no assumed G 732 frame format 1 Select Change Ix Service IBS SMS 2 Select Change Ix Baseband Continuous 2048000bps 3 When asked the question 2048k IBS Mode 1 Normal 2 G 732 answer Normal E1 31 TS 2048kbps G 732 with no CAS 31 timeslots used for data Assuming the intent of this mode is to provide a carrier with a satellite framed rate of 2048kbps Select Change Tx Service IBS SMS Select Change Tx Baseband Continuous 2048000bps When asked the question 2048k IBS Mode 1 Normal 2 G 732 answer G 732 When asked the question Channel Assoc Sig in TS16 1 Normal No CAS 2 CAS select Normal When asked the question Timeslot re order option 1 Normal linear 2 Re order select Normal gue Con Unlike the SDM300 this mode
267. ler The synchronous IBS scrambler is restarted at the beginning of every multiframe Note this is not every frame as it requires a reasonable length of the scrambling pattern to be used to ensure the final data appears random The scrambling pattern itself is 2 1 32767 bits long and runs throughout the frame Scrambling is however disabled for TSO amp TS32 otherwise the distant end could never find the frame sync then TS32 multiframe sync in order to find out where the scrambler starts Backward Alarm The backward alarm is a single bit of TS32 which is connected to a summary Rx Fail signal from the demodulator deframer If at either end of the link the Rx path fails for any reason then this backward alarm bit of TS32 is raised on the outgoing Tx signal indicating to the distant end that there is a Rx failure this end This could be caused by any manner of Rx fault LNA downconverter demod at this end but it is a warning that the fault might equally exist at the Tx end modulator upconverter HPA etc The backward alarm is normally a deferred alarm meaning it should be checked but it is not necessarily a failure of the traffic path at this end Low Rate ESC Channel The low rate ESC channel is a very low rate One bit of TS32 is allocated to carry the ESC information and so the rate is one bit per frame ie 1 64x8 one 512th the framed data rate or 1 480th the unframed rate For example at 64kbps the ESC channel is a synchro
268. ll BUC parameters available over FSK and option to provide closed loop power control to BUC flange User set hi low current monitor window on DC supply to BUC With FSK all BUC alarms integrated into modem alarm handling P300 1 U chassis 355 mm deep P310 1 U chassis 440 mm deep P300 3 kg P310 3 8Kg up to 4 35Kg with options P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 32 Power Supply Safety EMC Environmental Supporting Products 100 240 Volts AC 10 15 47 63 Hz P300 40 watts maximum P310 240W maximum extra PSU for BUC Rated maximum supply current 1A at 100V 0 3A at 240V Fused IEC connector Double pole Neutral fused Fuse rating T3 15AH 250V 3 15A fuse time delay high rupture current for 250V supply Maximum rating of fuse in supply plug or at the supply distribution board is 5A P310 Option P324 for 48V DC primary input power EN 60555 2 EN 55022 Class B emissions EN 55024 Part 1 immunity Operating temperature range 0 to 50C The P300 Series are supported by the following products P500 series 1 8 redundancy controller which includes the facility to mix electrical interfaces within a redundancy group Alphawave CAM Monitor amp Control software allows monitor and control of many different products including non Paradise products Specifications are subject to change without notice P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook
269. lling AIS Signalling b 1 Signalling ab 11 PCM BEARER Bearer CRC 3 BEARER CRC E Bits None Ignore CRC Frame Acq Process TX DROP BER MON E BITS Auto No action FAW E Bits to be returned CRC E Bits CRC FRAME Normal CRC loss forces frame acq BER ESTIMATE Auto FAW FEC inner Reed Solomon PRBS tester IBS MF Period 4 digit numeric entry ms CARRIER ID s Station ID gt Carrier ID Spare ID BACK ALARM MAP Normal 64Fr cycle 32 Frame cycle 16 Frame cycle 8 Frame cycle 4 Frame cycle CARRIER ID S 3 digit numeric entry IF IMPEDANCE 50 Ohm 75 Ohm BUFFER MF SLIP NES normal o THIS ROUTE SPOOF Normal off Spoof X 50 AIS 64k AS normal 48 56k AIS IBS 2M G 732 SPARES Fix high Transparent RELAY MODE 2 digit numeric entry See handbook appdx E FAULT MODE 2 digit numeric entry See handbook appdx E Page 45 6 2 5 Full Menu Structure Sheet 5 7 Change Tx From sheet 1 CHANGE TX Service Baseband Clocking Modulator ESC Aux BA SERVICE CLOSED NET MODEJ BACKWARD ALARM Network N14 poe ESE No backward aln IDR Plus ESC min o h Custom u IBS MULTIFRAME BACKWARD ALARM gt IBS BACKWARD ALARM OVERHEAD MODE CUSTOM BASED ON Normal with 7 s with o single J Normal Option Custom Features Without TS32 multiframe No backward alarm Four independent alarms Min ofh to provide ESC IBS IRL
270. lots selected Configure the receive path similarly if x Tx is active then only the timeslots need selecting T1 amp T1 S 1544kbps D4 Framed S Special The P300 Modem do not require the S Special mode to support N 9 and N 18 as the P300 Modem equipped with the Extended feature standard on P300 TCM can support any value of Simply configure as for T1 ESF amp T1 ESF S as above but select T1 D4 not T1 ESF in step 2 T1 IBS 1544kbps in the same bandwidth as Normal 1536kbps IBS This is the standard INTELSAT definition for non Drop Insert 1544kbps over IBS 1 2 Select Change Ix Service IBS SMS Select Change Tx Baseband Continuous 1544000bps P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 151 8 9 V 35 SCRAMBLERS In all cases setting the P300 Modem scramblers to Normal will implement the correct scrambling to match the configuration you have the modem in ie Closed network IBS or IDR with or without Reed Solomon Only read this section if you are having trouble interworking two manufacturers equipment which you think is scrambler related or just for interest Note that there are no known incompatibilities between any manufacturers synchronous IBS or synchronous Reed Solomon scrambling The issues relate only to V 35 scrambling used typically on closed network or IDR links without Reed Solomon History Note This is the authors understanding from 15 years working in the industry
271. me therefore has 64 timeslots with special functions for TSO P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 207 TS16 TS32 same as G 732 TSO odd and TS48 same as G 732 TS16 odd which leaves 60 timeslots available for normal data An IBS Frame is constructed as follows TSO consists of a spare bit X followed by a 7 bit frame alignment word ie X001 101 1 TS16 amp TS48 are defined to convey Channel Associated Signalling CAS when required and are normally forced to all ones 11111111 when CAS is not being transmitted CAS is covered separately later TS32 conveys the Low rate ESC E the Backward Alarm B and the TS32 Multiframe sequence M If IBS satellite link encryption is in use very very rare then it also conveys the encryption control vectors otherwise these bits are spare X as shown One bit is also forced to a logic 1 for frame alignment resulting in a content of ET BMXXXX A standard IBS frame then is 64 x 8 ie 512 bits long TS32 Multiframe A 64 bit multiframe pattern is placed one bit at a time into the bit of TS32 When the 64 bits have been sent one bit at a time over 64 frames the sequence restarts indicating the end of one multiframe and the beginning of the next The 64 bit TS32 multiframe sequence also contains 3 eight bit user fields nominated names of Station ID Channel ID amp Spare ID The TS32 multiframe then is 64 x 512 ie 32768 bits long Synchronous IBS Scramb
272. mplify normal IDR menu operation but Custom IDR can be selected with all the possible custom features set to Normal to allow normal IDR operation but with Timeslot ID Maintenance amp Re ordering The following screen is displayed when configuring the Tx path 2048k IDR mode 1 Normal 2 Align frame for Rx TS re order 3 Tx TS re order Change Tx Baseband Continuous 2048k IDR Menu NORMAL Any format within the data is ignored and data is randomly aligned within the IDR frame as per normal IDR operation ALIGN FOR RX A terrestrial G 732 frame format is acquired and is aligned within the IDR frame to allow the receive equipment to re order the timeslots if so set Other than aligning the terrestrial frame within the satellite IDR frame the Tx data is unaffected TX TS RE ORDER This selection leads onto a screen identical to that for IBS G 732 re ordering as described in the last screen shot and paragraphs of the previous section which allows the timeslots to be arbitrarily re ordered prior to transmission The final re ordered G 732 frame is frame aligned within the satellite IDR frame allowing the receive path also to re order on reception as well although if both end re order it might get just a tad confusing The corresponding following screen is displayed when configuring the Rx path 2048k IDR mode 1 Normal 2 Re order Rx TS if Tx TS frame aligned Change Rx Baseband Continuous 2048k IDR
273. mum Custom RS N amp k Values on page 144 6 6 13 Change Tx Rx Mod Demod SCRAMBLER Menu Scrambler 1 Off 2 Normal 3 Other Change Tx Rx Mod Demod Scrambler Menu The Scrambler selection is made from OFF NORMAL and CUSTOM OFF P300H Turns off all scrambling and whilst this may be used for testing or carrier line up it is not normally used over satellite P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 69 NORMAL Selects the appropriate scrambler based on the current configuration and enables it see table below FEC No Reed Solomon Reed Solomon Active Service type Non Turbo Turbo Non Turbo Turbo Closed Net No ESC Closed Net ESC lt 32kbps IDR amp Custom IDR V 35 Scr Turbo Scr RS Scr RS Scr Custom IBS without TS32 MF IBS SMS Closed Net ESC gt 32kbps IBS SMS synchronous scrambler Custom IBS with TS32 MF The rationale behind this NORMAL option is deceptively simple Following Intelsats example of using Reed Solomon with IBS or IDR we have simply used the first synchronous scrambler in the transmit chain even when two or more are available Also any synchronous scrambler is used in preference to the V 35 self synchronising scrambler as this will multiply received errors degrading performance Other This allows non standard scrambler operation to match the configuration of other non standard equipment which leads onto the following menus Toggle Scramblers
274. n and Operating Handbook Page 74 6 6 24 This sets a tolerance window on the monitored Eb No The AUPC will only attempt to restore the monitored Eb No to the target Eb No when the monitored Eb No moves outside the tolerance window This It is to prevent the AUPC continuously adjusting the power to compensate for minor normal Eb No variations When the monitored Eb No moves outside the tolerance window the AUPC will attempt to restore it back to the target value ie not just back inside the tolerance window again Change Tx Modulator AUPC CARRIER LOST ACTION Menu Set AUPC power on carrier lost Nominal 1 Freeze 2 Nominal 3 Maximum Change Tx Modulator AUPC Comms lost action Menu This screen sets what action the AUPC It is to take locally if it looses communications with the distant modem ie presumably there It is a significant fade and the distant demod has lost lock FREEZE The carrier power It is frozen at its current value NOMINAL The AUPC delta power It is reset to zero so the carrier returns to its nominal power MAXIMUM The AUPC delta power increases to the maximum power limit as set on the AUPC Max positive delta power screen P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 75 6 6 25 Change Tx Rx ESC AUX BA Menu This dialogue is not available when the service is set at Normal Closed Network and differs between Closed Net Plus ESC IBS SMS and IDR services The IBS SMS and IDR menu a
275. nACKed and need resending This allows multiple messages to be sent without having to wait for each to be ACK d individually which is useful in very distributed systems with long message transit times Slave devices will respond with the original format ACK when requested originally defined allowing common code in the slave devices to support both variants P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 196 SA bus The SA bus message structure has a different format for messages from Master to Slaves and from Slaves to Master Master to Slave The message format is ah eect r idle STX Address Instruction I Body Body ETX Checksum 02H 31H 61H 30H 7FH 1st char other chars last char 03H STX The fixed character 02H Address Slave Address range 31H to 6FH 49 111 ie 63 usable addresses Instruction Range 30H to 7FH An ACK or NAK is automatically returned if the instruction is received or there is no response if the message is not received Body From zero to 128 characters resulting in a maximum message length of 132 characters ETX The fixed character 03H Checksum The Exclusive OR of the chars from the STX to ETX inclusive Slave to Master The message format is qeeeeMMMA idle ACK NAK Address Instruction Body y Body ETX Checksum 06H 15H 31H 61H S0H 7FH tst char id Ma Fm last char 03H m
276. nal ref Synths use Station Clock RX OUTPUT CLOCK Satellite Tx clock in Internal Station clock DEC Clock Continuous data Rx Baseband lode Insert mux RX OUTPUT BEARER BACKUP CLOCK Satellite Internal Station clock Bearer RX OUTPUT BEARER CLOCK SOURCE Saremo BUFFER SIZE internal Rx Clocking NOT satellite Station clock Entry of end end buffer size 0 99ms in 1ms steps FREQUENCY Entry of IF frequency MODULATION BPSK QPSK OaPSK 8PSK Option 8PSK TCM FEC TYPE FEC RATE None uncoded 1 2 Rate iterbi Option Viterbi 3 4 Rate Sequential Option Seq 7 8 Rate Rate 2 3 Opt PSK Turboj Option Turbo REED SOLOMON INTELSAT Option Intelsat RS Modem maintains n k t amp ot Interleaver depth as specified Intelsat nk by Intelsat even if user changes TURBO FEC RATE Scroll Up Down preset rates includes 1 2 3 4 7 8 amp 0 789 amp others as added mmm Other Service FEC type or Data rate DEMODULATOR requency gt E Modulation OTHER RS n k t FEC inner Option Custom Features Reed Solomon Entry of n 60 255 and rambler k n 2 to 20 step 2 INTERLEAVER DEPTH Spectrum Invert Depth 4 Sweep Width Depth 8 AUPC NORMAL maintains correct SCRAMBLER scrambling automatically Normal switching between V 35 Other IBS and RS scramblers OTHER SCRAMBLER V 35 SCRAMBLER SELECTION Manual control of scrambler CCITT
277. nd IF signals but only one Modem enables its output and drives the signals towards the terrestrial device and towards the satellite For P310 L Band modems by default the standby modem also disables and DC amp 10MHz reference it might be feeding to a BUC LNB up the coax this can be changed See Relay Mode 4 in Appendix E Customer Specific Features on page 201 for a description The diagram on the right illustrates the equivalence of a standard Modem and a 1 FOR 1 redundant pair The pair of units with suitable DATA MOD UC cables may be used as a direct E replacement for a single unit with all connectors and pin assignments remaining the same A particular advantage of this arrangement is that one unit of the pair may be replaced without interrupting traffic SINGLE P300 SERIES MODEM PAIR OF P300 SERIES MODEMS DATA PASSIVE RX IF SPLITTER COMBINER PASSIVE TXIF SPLITTER COMBINER To enable the parallelling of all the interfaces the off line unit provides no terminating load so the correct impedance is maintained even when two are connected in parallel All interfaces also have the facility DATA to disable the outputs either by making the outputs high impedance or by relay switching EGUIVALENTST enabling one of a parallelled pair to drive the outputs without line contention Y CABLE DATA In the event of a cat
278. nd can degrade the performance of a satellite link It does this by monitoring the distant end Eb No and automatically adjusting the local Tx power of a satellite link to try and maintain the specified distant end Eb No figure To be able to monitor the distant Eb No the local modem needs to be able to interrogate the distant modem and request the current Eb No value It does this by sending messages through the asynchronous ESC channel which is carried over the satellite multiplexed with the main data channel For AUPC to operate an async ESC channel must be defined and on the P300 Series this is available in Closed Network Closed Net Plus ESC IBS SMS and IDR modes 6 ESC AUPC uses ESC AUPC Monitor Distant Tx power constant See 0 Sma pan BEER ee BO0A gels O 000A moe 0 ge B capo Em toma R Provides Distant Eb No Monitor Demod FEC Display of Eb No 10 798 gt 4 gt 6E 7 Ep No changes Local Eb No FAW lt 1E 6 FINAL BER lt 1E 12 4 amp BER um TR i L Monitor Distant end Valent Display of Distant end Eb No 8 3dB EC d Distant end final BER lt 3E 10 Deferred alarm threshold Change User Opt Alarm threshold Dist Eb No Rx Eb No changes due to Local Deferred alarm when DISTANT Eb No 9 6 dB atmospheric conditions E NC 0 1 to 25 0dB 0
279. ndicates that equipment downstream of the RECEIVE path has failed and is returning an alarm This may be due to any receive downstream equipment but could be due to the modem Rx output failing Check the modem Rx path indicates OK Check the Rx data output from the modem is connected to the downstream equipment Rx Warn MF Back alm Rx d at ins mux This fault will only be displayed if the modem if fitted with an interface which provides four ports for D separate input and output of separate Tx Drop and Rx Insert PCM bearers It indicates a Multiframe Backward Alarm is detected at the Rx bearer Input this indicates that equipment downstream of the RECEIVE path has failed to find Multiframe sync and is returning an alarm The Modem only detects this alarm when the Rx baseband is set to use the Insert mux in a G 732 mode and CAS signalling has been selected On the Rx path if the Insert Mux bearer is set to Generate then check the Rx path is also utilising CAS otherwise it will generate a bearer without a TS16 Multiframe Rx Warn X 50 Back alm from satellite This indicates the distant end equipment has an X 50 fault and is returning an X 50 backward alarm D See the description for the message Rx Fault X 50 de stuff sync lost for a further description Rx Warn RF sig too low now lt 71dbm gt The Receive RF signal level is below the range specified for this equipment Increase the level to ensure specified performance is met Rx Warn RF Si
280. ng DC amp References P310 L Band modem only Software gt 3 62 In a 1 1 L Band system if the modems are configured to supply DC and or the 10MHz reference up the coax to a BUC or LNB then when a 1 1 changeover occurs the modem which becomes the standby switches off the DC amp Reference feeds and these are now supplied by the new On Line modem which switches them on This is the NORMAL state without this relay mode active This assumes the L Band feeds are split combined through an L Band splitter combiner which passes the DC and reference out of the common port from either split port When this relay mode is active the modems DO NOT SWITCH OFF the DC amp Reference when in standby to accommodate 1 1 systems where each modem is coupled to one of a redundant pair of BUC s or LNB s This means that both BUC LNB s continue working whichever modem is on line however the standby modem does of course inhibit the Tx carrier Obviously if a splitter combiner as described above is used with this Relay Mode active then the two slightly different frequency 10MHz references will beat together and cause the common BUC LNB to fail Undefined at present P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 201 FAULT MODE SETTING 0 Default normal fault detection 1 ISDN Backup lt V2 14 ISDN backup AND OQPSK Compatibility gt V2 14 Software V2 14 Exactly as defined for Fault Mode 13 but available in earlier versions
281. ng Handbook Page 130 6 19 HELP MENU Help 1 Emergency Tx Carrier Off 2 Menu operation 3 Glossary Action Menu The options on this menu are as follows EMERGENCY TX CARRIER OFF MENU OPERATION GLOSSARY 6 20 SERVICE MENU This provides a short route to switch off the Tx carrier in an emergency It is operational even when under Remote M amp C and normal access to the carrier on off control is disabled along with most other local control A single further submenu provides the are you sure type check pressing 1 at this next menu will Switch off the Tx carrier Note the key sequence to switch off the carrier is therefore 911 from the main menu So the key sequence Main 9 1 1 will kill the Tx carrier whatever screen was left active on the display NOTE This is an OFF only selection to switch the carrier on again you must use the normal sequence Change Tx Mod Carrier On Although 911 is available in both local and remote M amp C access to the normal carrier on off control is only available under local control So if a unit is set for remote control either the carrier must be switched on by remote M amp C or the unit must be returned to local control A short and simple guide to menu operation A sequential glossary of some of the standard telecomms abbreviations used during menu operation The service menu is available by selecting 0 from the main menu It provides options not normally required when conf
282. ng additional power from the satellite Change Tx Modulator AUPC SLEW RATE Menu Set maximum power slew rate 10 dB min 0 1 99 9dB min 0 no limit 2 YES Change Tx Modulator AUPC Slew Rate Menu This facility allows the changes in Tx power to occur at a controlled slew rate to prevent step changes in Tx power at the IF output A value of zero indicates no limit and step power changes will occur Whatever the slew rate limit the power changes will remain within the Max and Min power limits set on the previous two screens Use caution when setting this parameter so that the slew rate you impose It is not too great to prevent the AUPC system responding to rapid fades eg 10dB fade in 10 seconds Change Tx Modulator AUPC TARGET EB NO Menu Set target Eb No to maintain 8 5 dB 0 to 25 0dB dB Yes Change Tx Modulator AUPC Target Eb No Menu This screen allows the target Eb No to be set This It is the distant Eb No when the AUPC mode It is set to Maint Eb No and the local Eb No when set to Self Mon This It is the target Eb No the AUPC will adjust the Tx power within the Max Min and Slew rate limits once the Eb No goes outside the Tolerance window Set below to try and restore this figure Change Tx Modulator AUPC TOLERANCE Menu Set Eb No tolerance before AUPC action 0 5dB 0 1 25 0dB dB Yes Change Tx Modulator AUPC Tolerance Menu P300H P300 Series Modem Installatio
283. ng is all ones Ao This is normally used to indicate an upstream equipment fault such as a lack of input clock at the Tx end it is not a modem fault See note 4 In IBS modes at 48kbps or 56kbps the IBS specification IESS 309 specifies that the 48 56kbps T data is bit stuffed up to 64kbps according to X 50 prior to IBS framing The bit stuffing adds an 80 bit repeating pattern which is detected at the Rx end then removed to return the data to 48 56kbps pt Bos The User final Bit Error Rate is worse than 1x10 AIS Forced is only shown if the user option of T gt Boot what action to take when the BER is bad is not set to Ignore Change User Opt Operation Actions BER Action The fault is always displayed although the actions be cancelled by selecting Ignore The source for the BER measurement is user defined Change User Opt Operation Satellite BER est Normally this should be set to Auto however it may be user set to other BER sources if required It is possible to manually set the source to the inner FEC Turbo Vit Seq even when the outer FEC RS is active thereby not including the effects of the RS error correction in the displayed user BER Check this remains set to Auto unless there is good reason P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 222 This message indicates the modem cannot find the 80 bit pattern in order to remove it Check the data is intended to be 4
284. ning for up to 27 hours or to run continuously using a 1 minute sliding window When Auto Logging of the BER Tester results is enabled the tester executes a test for the user set BER Auto Log period 1 9999 minutes and records both the average and 1 second worst case BER s in the traffic log of the modem at the end of the period It then automatically re starts a new test for the following period It may operate independently or in conjunction with external BER equipment as the test patterns it uses are intentionally Firebird compatible For example at one end of a link the internal BERT may be used to inject the PRBS and measure the Rx BER while at the other end a Firebird is connected to the Main data port or the ESC Aux ports on the IDR Option if fitted Each of the menu options is described in turn with most other options appearing in a subsection below along with a description of the submenu they display OFF This disables the internal BER Tester removing it from the channel in use ie the Main ESC or Aux channel restoring normal operation P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 125 6 16 5 Test Int BERT OFF CHANNEL Menu Channel for BER Test ESC 1 Main data 2 ESC 3 Aux Test Internal BERT Channel Menu The test may run through the Main ESC or Aux channels MAIN ESC AUX Closed Network This first generates an are you sure screen before substituting the PRBS in plac
285. nk which is by definition unlikely to be multi destinational Partial Insert makes no sense and the option is not displayed Is all Rx data for this destination 1 All 2 Partial Change Rx Baseband Insert Mux Partial Insert Menu See the applications section para 8 3 Partial Insert and Multidestinational Working on page 143 for a discussion of this facility If Allis selected the dialogue continues as with the Drop Mux on the Tx path P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 87 If Partial Insert is selected the following screen is displayed Total data rate for ALL dest from satellite Change Rx Baseband Insert Mux Partial Total Rate Menu Normally when using Drop Insert the modem determines the expected data rate from the satellite from the number of timeslots specified However when using partial insert the data rate from the satellite has to be specifically set as there is more data coming from the satellite than will be inserted It must be N x 64kbps N 2 to 32 minimum of 2 not 1 as you cannot have a multidestinational carrier with only 1 x 64kbps incoming The screen is then displayed Sat TS 1 3 10 12 Toggle YES Change Rx Baseband Insert Mux Partial Data Select Menu On this screen the data for this destination is selected from the total receive data The incoming data from the satellite is labelled as timeslots 1 N NOTE this labelling bears N
286. not switch the traffic to the other antenna as the external Tx inhibit is not considered a fault by the 1 for 1 logic Without Fault Mode set to 10 then it would be possible for the ACU to indicate block muting the Tx carrier because the antenna has just passed the ACU movement limit where the beam is approaching the ship and for the Rx carrier to remain OK until the receive signal is fully obstructed by the ship If this happens there will be a break in transmission from the ship until the receive totally fails finally causing a Rx fault which will make the modems 1 for 1 partner take over switching both Tx and Rx to the other antenna When Fault Mode is set to 10 the External Tx Inhibit is additionally considered as a fault by the 1 for 1 logic although it has no effect on the normal LCD display of modem faults Now apart from the ACU block signal immediately muting the Tx carrier the 1 for 1 modem pair will also change over to the standby modem causing the traffic to be immediately routed to the other antenna provided the standby modem has no faults and the ACU of the other antenna is not itself indicating block causing the standby modem External Tx Inhibit to be active Only when the ACU indicates not blocked can the traffic switch back to the first antenna Should both ACU s indicate block then Tx from both antenna will be muted with the last one to indicate not blocked remaining on line as far as the 1
287. nous rate of 133bps However INTELSAT did not define a synchronous interface to the channel only an oversampled asynchronous interface ie a data line without a clock line This means that the Baud rate of the async channel must be one third to one quarter of the synchronous rate to ensure each Baud period of the async word is sampled 3 or 4 times necessary otherwise the reconstructed async character cannot be read at the far end This is a very poor use of the bandwidth but the definition was made to allow the facility to be added to then current equipment with minimal hardware implications The INTELSAT defined limit is 1 2000th of the data rate but in practice this can be pushed to about 1 1500th of the data rate not quite enough to get a reliable 50 Baud with a 64kbps carrier Timeslot ID Maintenance Timeslot identity maintenance is the facility to maintain the identity of individual data streams when multiplexed together into one aggregate rate carrier eg in its simplest form two independent 64kbps circuits in one 128kbps carrier Typically such individual data streams comprise of 64kbps data channels from N timeslots of terrestrial PCM bearers interfaced to the IBS SMS framing via the Drop Insert multiplexer P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 208 Operating over satellite without TS ID maintenance is comparable to using an external Drop Insert mux interfaced in our 2 x 64kbps example to the modem at 1
288. ns FEC Turbo Ideal BPSK QPSK Rate 2048 kbps QPSK 1 2 TX 140 0000 MHz RX 140 0000 MHz Scrambling Normal Turbo Input Level 60 dBm 1E 3 1E 4 1E 5 1E 6 1E 7 1E 8 Rate 1 2 Rate 3 4 Rate 7 8 Eb No in dB 1E 9 P300 Modem Series Error Probability versus Eb No Turbo Codec P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 38 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION UNPACKING Prior to unpacking inspect the exterior of the shipping container for evidence of damage during transit If damage is evident contact the Carrier immediately and submit a damage report Carefully unpack all items taking care not to discard packing materials particularly the moulded foam inserts Should the unit need to be returned to Paradise Datacom USE THE ORIGINAL PACKING CARTON This is the only approved shipping container that Paradise recognises VISUAL INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT Once unpacked visually inspect the unit for damage The shipping carton in which the Modem is shipped has been used by Paradise to ship our products worldwide for a number of years It has shown through experience that it can withstand very rough handling Therefore if the equipment received is damaged there can be no doubt that it has been subjected to abnormal or abusive treatment please file a claim with the Carrier immediately and then contact Par
289. nsert mux ina G 732 mode and CAS signalling has been selected or 2048k IBS G 732 0 overhead mode with CAS is enabled Read the text corresponding to Rx Fault CAS Multiframe sync lost to determine why a CAS multiframe is in use over satellite and Check the three items listed against this message on the Tx path of this modem The display may show numbers or dashes eg 2 4 corresponding to which of the four backward D alarms are active at the Rx Input This indicates that equipment downstream of the TRANSMIT path ie the distant end Rx path or further downstream has failed and is returning an alarm In Multidestinational circuits this may NOT correspond to the Tx path of THIS MODEM The fault may be due to any receive downstream equipment but could be due to the relevant modem Tx output failing Check the relevant modem Tx path indicates OK Check the Tx IF output from the modem is connected to the upconverter equipment and onwards monitor the Tx carrier or distant Rx if possible with a spectrum analyser The clock selected as the Receive data output clock where Source shows the specified clock D has failed The modem has switched to using a backup clock generated by the Rx PLL to preserve the receive traffic This fault only occurs if the source is the same frequency as the Rx data rate otherwise the clock is not used directly instead it is rate converted by the Rx PLL and it s failure results in the fault described
290. nt configuration but which are only temporarily enabled and expire in the period shown Temporary features The modem will cease to be able to provide these features when the period expires unless a Feature Code issued by Paradise Datacom is entered If you have no means to get a feature code from Paradise Datacom eg lack of comms public holiday etc use one of the 5 day user activated Feature Test periods to provide cover until you can contact us Pressing down arrow a further time shows features which are in use with the current configuration but which have been enabled as a result of a user option to test all the features of the equipment and which expires in the period shown Test features Again the modem will cease to be able to provide these features when the period expires unless a Feature Code issued by Paradise Datacom is entered or another 5 day feature test is activated by the user if available FEATURES STANDARD The letters shown represent the features that are permanently enabled in the equipment Standard features even if not required by the current configuration To determine if any of the features are in fact required for the current configuration see FEATURES IN USE above Pressing down arrow shows two data rates Low Rate and High Rate also controlled by feature codes issued by Paradise Refer to the alphabetic feature list in the table that follows to determine how these two data rates are used FEATURES TEMPO
291. ntentionally switched off or it may be muted due to either a fault an external mute signal or if in a 1 FOR 1 redundant pair it may be the standby unit P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 17 3 5 REAR PANEL DESCRIPTION At the rear of unit are all of the connectors necessary for the user to interface the Modem to the outside world IF input and output to frequency conversion equipment terrestrial data connection station clock alarms amp AGC output remote M amp C AC power and so on PARADISE DATACOM 3 ESC AUX amp 1097 of Je CE oume ARMS MULTI STANDARD INTERFACE mue STATION CLOCK REMOTE M8C Rx ASYNC ESC P1440A P300 Modem rear panel view IDR amp G 703 options fitted 5 From left to right the rear panel connectors IEC mains power connector voltage selector fuse The Modem is designed to operate from a mains AC supply of 100 240V 15 10 ie 85V to 264V at the connector The IEC connector incorporates two fuses independently fusing both live and neutral lines Access to the fuses are provided by a slide out tray Both fuses are standard 20 mm type rated 2A of the slow blow time delay type ALWAYS REPLACE THE FUSE WITH ONE OF THE SAME TYPE AND RATING Chassis ground stud This is an M4 stud for connecting a safety earth conductor directly to the chassis of the unit Fan The f
292. nveyed primarily PCM audio as it made a negligible difference to the audio quality However when the PCM network was later used to convey data not just PCM encoded voice only 56kbps of data could be conveyed using 7 bits per timeslot as it was difficult to guarantee the signal would not pass through a link using Robbed Bit Signalling where the 8th bit would be overwritten every 6th frame causing errors on the 64kbps data Signalling Over Satellite Common Channel Signalling CCS With Common Channel Signalling the whole 64kbps signalling channel timeslot must be conveyed from one end of the link to the other and typically this is done on sub primary order satellite circuits thin routes by selecting the timeslot carrying the CCS for Drop Insert as with other data timeslots Special action is required with CCS as the equipment at both ends of the link needs to be configured for the thin route over the satellite so it does not dynamically allocate traffic to a timeslot which is not passed over satellite link Channel Associated Signalling The IBS specification includes an option for equipment to support CAS and defines a mechanism whereby the CAS the 2kbps signalling channel per timeslot can be carried within the 6 7 IBS satellite overhead This option is fully implemented within the P300 equipped with the Extended D I feature standard on P300 TCM and is further explained in the following section on CAS Multiframe Robbed Bit
293. o LOG CLEAR Final user BER On subsequent screen BER from Internal BERT Yes No Confirmation prs x Terr LOG AUTOLOG On subsequent screen Option AUPC 4 digit numeric entry Distant Eb No of log autolog interval AUPC Delta Power Interface L R BER CHANNEL Status fa Hes Safe A anne atus SDN Screen Aux Channel Change kremen osiramer 1 eed Solomon Monitor Remote BER PATTERN Info 201 2047 Log RF amp FEC 220 1 TEST los E BERT Mode Setu p Tom PSU RS Decoder correct disable One Minute Manual Action Int BER Tester Bel Hana ace isplay a as Service Option Monitor AGC Boa RESULTS Internal Temp in Deg C Sync Sync loss count Error count tat 1 t INT BER TESTER Satus running stopped reset Option PRBS Tester On subsequent screen Sync No Syne Channel Sync loss count Pattern Data rate of test BERT Mode Error count Results Control Elapsed time BER SETUP INITIAL CONFIG cor inject Guides user sequentially through ap en the complete modem configuration SETUP Initial Config Check Setup SETUP CHECK Memory Store Runs a background check of Mermory Recall the complete configuration and Memory Erase notifies user of any unusual combinations of settings takes 10 secs ACTIONS orce buffer centre Slip counter reset MEMORY ACCESS Giveaway in 1 1 Store Recall or Erase the 10 memories of complete modem config
294. o Q460 board ID_Dig 0 with Xilinx IFU ID_IFU 0 and 4M code storage Boot_Code will be V1 x for 4M P460 build P460Vxxx No Build applicable only to Q460 board ID_Dig 0 with ASIC IFU ID_IFU 1 or 2 and 4M code storage Boot Code will be V1 x for 4M P480 build P480Vxxx Yes Build applicable to all Q480 boards ID_Dig 1 all of which have 8M code storage with any IFU OR a Q460 board ID_Dig 0 modified to have 8M code storage Boot_Code will be V2 x for 8M fitted with any IFU P300 build P300vxxx Yes Build applicable to all P300 s P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 200 APPENDIX E CUSTOMER SPECIFIC FEATURES This appendix lists the customer specific options available on the P300 Series Modems Refer to the Change User Opt Operation menu section 6 10 8 on page 106 for explanations of how to use these parameters RELAY MODE SETTING 0 5 15 P300H Default normal relay operation Cable amp Wireless Alarms Summarise This feature remaps the external alarm relays to summarise the Traffic amp Unit faults Normally these are separated as Traffic faults relate to faults external to the equipment Prompt Traffic and Unit faults relate to faults within the equipment itself Prompt Unit Fault When this option is selected the three fault relays map as follows Prompt Unit Fault Any unit fault or Tx traffic fault ie Tx summary alarm Prompt Traffic Fault unit fault or Rx traffic fa
295. ocal amp Remote options on the Change Rem M amp C Menu GIVEAWAY When selected a subsequent screen is displayed which allows a timeout of up to 255 seconds to be specified Normal switching between Local and Remote is then by Giveaway philosophy ie once in Remote M amp C local control is only granted by a remote M amp C command giving back local control The timeout ensures that if the remote M amp C fails the operator can take local control when the timeout expires if necessary NOTE it does not automatically switch to local it remains in remote mode unless the local operator specifically selects Local after the timeout has expired There is no option for Give Away withouta timeout otherwise the operator could find control of the modem locked out if this option was active without remote M amp C operating The subsequent timeout menu is as follows its function is described above Rem M amp C timeout before user can take local control 120s 1 255secs s YES Service Factory Parameters Remote M amp C Timeout Menu P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 99 6 9 2 Change Rem M amp C CONFIGURE Menu Remote M amp C 1 Protocol Paradise 2 Intfc RS485 3 Baud rate 2400 4 Addr 123 Change Rem M amp C Configure Menu This menu configures the remote M amp C port The options are PROTOCOL INTERFACE BAUD RATE ADDRESS P300H This allows selection between OFF PARADISE FDC
296. oftware for specific customers As most special requests relate to either alarm handling or relay operation we have defined two user variables which we can test in the main code and if necessary perform special functions This might include for example delaying the fault relays under specific alarm conditions as requested on our previous modem products The specific functions available are listed in Appendix E on page 201 RELAY MODE A value from 0 15 where 0 is Normal Default 0 FAULT MODE A value from 0 15 where 0 is Normal Default 0 Change User Opt DISPLAY Menu Display 1 Status screen 2 Upgrade messages notes Change User Opt Display Menu The options are STATUS SCREEN This selection are covered in the section Status Screen Display on page 49 The options available are Tx amp RX TRAFFIC SUMMARY or CONFIGURATION SUMMARY Default Tx amp Rx Traffic Summary UPGRADE MESSAGES The unit will by default display notes on the LCD typically Note 1 when there is an upgrade option available to add extra facilities at this point in the menu Structure At such a point pressing the Down Arrow will explain what extra facilities are possible The operator has the choice to either ENABLE or DISABLE the display of these messages Default Enable 6 10 10 Change User Opt AGC Output Menu Analog output 0 0 15 YES 0 AGC 1 15 refer to handbook appdx E Change User Opt AGC Output Menu This option
297. om timeslot alignment happens to be correct Implementation of Timeslot ID Maintenance The requirement is to provide 1 Timeslot boundary maintenance start end of each timeslots 8 bits within the data stream 2 Timeslot identity ID maintenance ie which 8 bits relate to which timeslot first second third etc within the data stream The data from each timeslot appears as a set of 8 bits from each terrestrial frame Timeslot boundary maintenance is provided by placing the data into the IBS frame timeslot aligned after TSO When TSO is located the next 8 bits represent 8 bits from one terrestrial timeslot the following 8 from the next etc Timeslot Identity Maintenance again relies on relative position to TSO Data from the first timeslot of the group of timeslots is always placed in the first timeslot after TS0 the second of the group in the second TS and so forth Once the 8 bits of data from every timeslot have been placed in the frame the process repeats until the frame is full For the following frame to be similarly formatted the timeslot data must fit into the 60 available data timeslots of the satellite frame exactly so that the next data is from the first TS again This brings in a complication Each IBS frame has 60 timeslots available for data and so in order to provide timeslot ID maintenance the number of timeslots N must fit into 60 This limits the values of N to 1 Frame ie 60 available data timeslots N
298. ompatible with however INTELSAT might define it Default four alarms in a 64 frame cycle The IF Impedance is selected on this menu There are no electrical changes made when this option is changed as the IF ports are matched to both 50O and 75Q operation there is simply a slight adjustment of the internal power calibrations amp readings to maintain accurate level control amp indication 6 10 7 Change User Opt Operation TERR SAT Menu Terr Sat 1 BufferMF slip 2 Thin Route Spoof 3 X 50 AIS 4 G 732 spares Change User Opt Operation Terr Sat Menu BUFFER MF SLIP THIN ROUTE SPOOF X 50 AIS G 732 SPARES P300H For data rates of 1544 kbps and 2048 kbps where the data is framed the buffer is usually made to slip integer multiples of the frame length 8ms and 2ms respectively This option sets if the buffer capacity should automatically be incremented to the nearest integer multiple of frame length at these specific rates Options are Adjust Normal or Don t Adjust Default ADJUST This interestingly named option is to allow full connectivity of a PCM bearer to be spoofed even if the link is connected over satellite via a thin route ie less than the full PCM bearer using Drop Insert If enabled the following features of the PCM system appear transparent end to end AIS all ones Backward Alarm CAS Backward alarm G 732 only NOTE When enabled AIS is forced over the whole PCM bearer and so this option sho
299. on In this situation there are two modes of adding IBS framing either normal with 6 7 overhead G 732 mode where the embedded framing in the G 732 is used and no overhead is added These modes are often referred to in the service definition specifications as 1920kbps or 1984kbps operation Refer to section 7 2 1 Change Tx Rx Baseband Continuous 2048k Menu IBS on page 137 for the description of the dialogue in this case Similarly if the data rate is 2048000bps and the Modem is set for a Custom service based on the IDR Low rate format the Modem can provide additional features if the data is G 732 framed In such a case it can either allow the transmit timeslots to be arbitrarily re ordered or frame align the Tx data within the satellite IDR frame so that the distant receive equipment may arbitrarily re order the timeslots Refer to section 7 3 1 Change Tx Rx Baseband Continuous 2048k Menu IDR on page 139 for the description of the dialogue in this case P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 57 6 6 5 Finally for data rate of 48kbps or 56 kbps in IBS modes the Modem automatically activates the X 50 bit stuffing to convert to from 64kbps as defined for IBS operation However in Custom IBS modes the operator is offered the option of not using this facility In Normal IBS modes then with 48 or 56kbps data the satellite rate is 64kbps x 16 15 but in custom modes this can be reduced to just 48
300. on to the Transmit path replaced with a more detailed two line description of any traffic faultwarning condition if it exists Pressing down again selects the Demodulator Detailed Status DETAILED DEMODULATOR STATUS Demod Stat Eb No 8 5dB User BER 4E 3 Offset 18kHz Level 48dBm Stat Detailed Demodulator Status This screen shows the estimated Eb No This is the composite Eb No including framing overheads as used by INTELSAT when specifying modem performance figures The BER is the final USER BER which is being passed to the customer The Offset is the measured error of the received carrier relative to the nominal position expected which is useful for determining the frequency drift due to the satellite and frequency conversion equipment The Level is the level of the desired carrier estimated by the demodulator and is only shown if the Monitor AGC option is fitted From this screen the Down Arrow leads back to the selected Status screen Back to the selected Status Screen Config Summary or Tx amp Rx Traffic Summary P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 52 6 4 6 5 SETUP INITIAL CONFIGURATION MENU When delivered or if the non volatile memory should ever be cleared the unit must be completely configured using the SETUP INITIAL CONFIG option This takes the operator through all the sections of the CHANGE procedure described below to ensure all parameters are set Only when S
301. ontrol over may parameters which are the subject of either personal or company preference A single menu choice DEFAULT ALL resets these to the Paradise Defaults which are listed in the following paragraphs along with each parameter P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 101 6 10 3 Change User Opt Operation ACTIONS Menu Actions 1 Buffer auto centre 2 BER 3 AIS 4 Back Alarm BUFFER AUTOCENTRE BER ACTION AIS ACTION BACKALARM P300H Change User Opt Operation Actions Menu This selects if the receive buffer is automatically centred when the Rx traffic returns to OK from the fail state This takes advantage of any outage and ensures the buffer is centred every time normal operation begins This option can be disabled as for minor outages the errors or sync losses caused by centering the buffer may be larger than those caused by the outage itself Default ENABLED This option controls how a high BER indication is handled INTELSAT specify that when the BER exceeds 1 x 10 the following actions are required the Rx prompt alarm should be raised AIS should be forced and the backward alarm sent This option can disable the forcing of AIS and the backward alarm to maintain the traffic as best as possible Note the Rx Prompt alarm is still raised even if this option is set to NO ACTION to disable the AIS and Backward Alarm Default ACTION This option is similar to BER action above except it s
302. op Mux contain all ones AIS This is different to the Tx Boot Fault Data input is all ones AIS message described earlier which refers to the whole PCM bearer being AIS In the case it is only the specific timeslots which contain AIS This is normally used to indicate an upstream equipment fault it is not a modem fault See note 4 A opt Tx Fault Input BER gt 1E 3 AIS forced The Bit Error Rate at the Tx input measured on the PCM Frame Alignment Words is worse than 1x10 This can only be due to a very poor error rate on the PCM input signal AIS Forced is only shown if the user option of what action to take when the BER is bad is not set to Ignore Change User Opt Operation Actions BER Action The fault is always displayed although the actions can be cancelled by selecting Ignore Check the line code setting AMI B8ZS HDB3 matches the input signal on any G 703 cards in use see note 3 Bos Aon OM TF Tx Fault Clock loop fail Tx muted The Tx clock generation loop which generates the timing over the satellite link has failed and the Tx carrier is muted as a result If the Tx Clocking Change Tx Clocking is set to Tx Clock In then check the Tx Clock frequency matches the data rate Change Tx Baseband Continuous Tx Fault BUC DC current outside limits The Modem is configured to operate with a BUC and the operator has activated the BUC current monitor but the current drawn by the BUC is outsi
303. or 30 seconds from a cold start as the Tx carrier is muted while the frequency D reference temperature stabilises If a power outage is less than 30 seconds then the mute is for the same period as the power outage The Modem is configured to operate with a Paradise BUC and to supply a 10MHz reference up the coax From a cold start the modem will switch of the BUC Tx output for 2 minutes until the internal reference has settled to avoid bringing up carriers off frequency After 2 minutes the BUC On Off status is returned to it s previous setting If a power outage is less than 2 minutes then the mute if for the same period as the power outage This is different to the Tx Carrier mute above as it mutes the BUC itself and will therefor mute any number of carriers transmitted through a single BUC m The Modem is configured to operate with a Paradise BUC and communicate by FSK The modem has read the measured power at the BUC output and it exceeds its P1dB point of this BUC This means the BUC is approaching or is into compression and as such may be degrading the transmitted spectrum Either back off the power or monitor the Tx spectrum very carefully ES The Modem is configured to operate with a Paradise BUC communicate with the BUC by FSK and the Modem BUC are set in Terminal mode where the modem maintains the power at the BUC flange by adjusting both the Tx Carrier Level and where available the BUC attenuator Cu
304. or 56 kbps x 16 15 or less if Minimum overhead mode is selected Change Tx Rx Baseband DROP INSERT Menu These screens are only shown if the Drop Insert feature is available standard on the P300 IBS and above Drop Insert selects the baseband mode where the Tx data is removed dropped from a T1 or E1 PCM bearer and the Rx data is placed inserted into a similar bearer The modem is capable of operating in Drop Insert with any terrestrial interface although in practise it is rarely used without a G 703 DS1 interface The first step is to specify to the modem which format of PCM bearer it is working with Select bearer 1 G 732 2 T1 D4 3zT1 ESF Change Tx Rx Baseband Drop Insert Bearer Menu Following the bearer type selection the timeslots from which the Tx data is to be Dropped or in the Rx case where the Rx data is to be inserted must be specified Drop TS 1 3 5 17 15 23 Toggle YES t Help Change Tx Rx Baseband Drop Insert Timeslot Menu The screen above shows groups of eight timeslots selected 1 3 4 5 17 16 15 23 although any combination is possible The selection system works by toggling timeslots or groups of timeslots into or out of the selection In G 732 mode timeslots are labelled 0 31 In 77 D4 and T T ESF modes timeslots are labelled 1 24 Timeslots already in the selection are toggled out from any position of the selection when the timeslot number is entered Tim
305. or a loopback if the modem is still on satellite Contd P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 122 Options displayed on the second screen include all of the above plus D I L FRM L RS L The data is looped back after the Drop mux through the Doppler buffer back into the Insert mux providing a local loop only The Tx data continues to be transmitted and the Rx data from the satellite is ignored If Drop Insert baseband processing is not active this loops the data at the output of the baseband block ie it works even if Drop Insert is not active ESC amp Aux channel data is NOT looped The data is looped after the Framer back into the Deframer providing a local loop only The Tx data continues to be transmitted and the Rx data from the satellite is ignored ESC amp Aux channel data which is present in the data stream at the Framer output is also looped The data is looped after the Reed Solomon Encoder interleaver back into the RS Deinterleaver decoder providing a local loop only The Tx data continues to be transmitted and the Rx data from the satellite is ignored ESC amp Aux channel data which is present in the data stream at the RS codec is also looped From the terrestrial port towards the IF ports the loopbacks in the following order test more and more circuitry Interface Drop Insert Framer Reed Solomon FEC IF REMOTE R P300H This provides a loop of the Rx dat
306. or the period are logged at the end of the period The automatic logging of local distant Eb No and various BER s coupled with a centralised log accumulation by a M amp C package eg Alphawave CAM provides a very convenient way to be able to monitor the performance of any link and have recorded data verifying the performance should anyone query if there was a fade Please note that each data type logged uses up one log entry every Autolog period ie the log capacity can be consumed quickly with multiple events logged at very regular intervals P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 121 6 16 6 16 1 TEST MENU The test menu is as shown below and leads on to the menu s described in the following few paragraphs When either a loopback or test mode are active the TEST LED on the front of the equipment illuminates Test 1 Loopbacks Off 2 RF amp FEC Off 3 PSU Temp 4 Int BERT ESC Test Menu Each of these options is now discussed in turn Test LOOPBACKS Menu Loop now Intfc 1 Off 2 Interface L R FEC L 4 I F L 1 More Test Loopbacks Menu This screen show the most common loopbacks but by pressing the down arrow further options are provided The loopback options are OFF Normal operation is selected INTERFACE L R An interface loop Local and Remote is selected providing both a terrestrial loop and a loop to the data from the remote end of t
307. ort P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 187 Backward Alarms Pin Number Description 1 BA 1 4 Common 2 1 N O 18 1 3 BA2 N O 19 BA2 N C 4 BA3 N O 5 4 N O 21 BA4 N C 22 BA1 Input 23 BA2 Input 24 Input 25 BA4 Input TU 20 7 Rx Summary fault output link to BA in 6 Ground N O indicates normal open in the normal non alarm state amp N C normally closed in the non alarm state Unlike the modem fault relays the backward alarms are not normally energised and fall back to the Normal state when modem power is removed The modem deferred alarm acts as a summary backward alarm and activates when any backward alarm is received this does fall back to the Fail state when power is removed Backward alarm inputs float to the Good state high 5V and indicate Fail when connected to OV The Rx summary fault is an open collector output OV Fail open collector OK From the front panel the backward alarm inputs BA x can be set as follows E Ext A Auto Rx fail O OK Menu Opt BA1 BA2 BA3 BA4 Mode 1 EEEE Ext patch Extpatch Extpatch Ext patch Mode 2 AEEE Rx Fail Ext patch Extpatch Ext patch Mode 3 AOOO Rx Fail Good Good Good Mode 4 AAAA Rx Fail Rx Fail Rx Fail Rx Fail If external patching is required connect the Rx summary fault to the required BA input and any other modem fail outputs to the appropriate other BA inputs Le
308. ot assume an upgrade is not available To determine the hardware capability of any P300 Series Modem see Features Hardware in Appendix C2 which follows immediately Any feature for which the modem Hardware is already present can be added by a simple Feature Code upgrade from the front panel APPENDIX C2 FEATURE SCREENS Under Info the modem shows a Features option This details features by assigning each feature a letter and then displaying the letters for which features are available or which may be added by entering a Feature Code The available features are controlled by the following hardware and software mechanism Needless to say for any specific feature to be used the equipment needs both the hardware to be fitted and the software to have that feature enabled Hardware The equipment determines what boards and assemblies are fitted when it powers up and generates an internal list of its hardware capabilities This can be displayed see Features Hardware below Software Some features are permanently software enabled Standard features This list can be displayed see Features Standard below and can be changed by entering a feature code issued by Paradise Some features are enabled for a temporary period only Temporary features Again the temporary feature list and its duration can be displayed see Features Temporary below and changed by entering a feature code issued by Paradise The Temporary features
309. ot shown but rather a warning Cannot select 1 Min Manual mode while AUTOLOG of PRBS results is active YES is displayed To be able to manually select the BERT mode auto logging of the BER result must be disabled by either setting the Autolog period to zero Main Log Autolog or by clearing the flag requesting it to log the BERT results on the subsequent Autolog Screen One Minute sliding window mode displays the average BER over the last 1 minute It does this by storing the error results second by second in a circular table 60 entries long and recalculating the average BER each second For any seconds where the BERT is out of sync a zero entry is made in the table The average BER over the one minute period is calculated based on only the non zero entries when sync is recovered Manual mode allows the operator to manually start stop amp restart tests which may run for up to 27 hours 99 999 seconds at which point the results are frozen P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 128 6 16 8 Test Int BERT RESULTS Menu BERT Sync OK Loss 0 Rate 32000bps Errors 328 Time 1 0min BER 1 7E 04 Test Internal BERT Results Menu Note in this screen the following keys are active Press 1 Inject single error buffered for up to 10 rapid key presses Press 2 Start a test Restart the current test manual mode only Press 3 Stop the current test manual mode only The fields on this screen are as foll
310. ot sit comfortably on first reading but you are probably happy with the concept that a PRBS multiplexed in with the main data channel at say 5 of the main data rate will provide the same BER reading as for the main data channel itself You would probably agree that the result would be no different if the PRBS content was dropped to say 4 of the main data channel implying that reducing the bits available to measure the BER by 20 will have no effect on the validity of the BER reading The argument for the Internal BERT is no different gt 99 9 of the bits available for BER measurement are used with the other lt 0 1 lost as the processor reads the hardware registers SETUP MENU See Setup Initial Configuration Menu on page 53 ACTION MENU Action 1 Buffer Centre 2 Slip counter reset 3 1 1 Give away control Action Menu The options on this menu are fairly self explanatory however for completeness BUFFER CENTRE Forces the Rx buffer to re centre and will cause a burst of errors This is automatically performed when the Rx traffic goes from fail to OK if the option under CHANGE USER OPT OPERATION ACTIONS BUFFER AUTO CENTREis enabled SLIP COUNT RESET This resets the counts of underflows and overflows on the Status status screens 1 1 GIVE AWAY When two Modem s are configured as a 1 1 pair this can be selected on the on line unit to handover control to the off line unit P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operati
311. ows BERT Sync OK The test is running and the tester is in sync NO SYNC The test is running but the tester is out of sync Reset No test has been run since the unit was re configured Stopped The test has been manually stopped results are frozen Loss A count to 99 sync losses and recoveries When the display reaches gt 99 the test is automatically stopped The sync loss threshold is fixed at gt 25 errors over 1024 bits equivalent to the Firebirds Normal threshold Rate The test data rate This accurately displays the rate at which the test is running whether it is in the Main ESC or Aux channels Errors The cumulative count of errors during the test If the count reaches 999 999 then the test will stop and the results will be frozen See Note 1 below Time The cumulative test time displayed as seconds to 1 minute then decimal minutes to 1 hour then decimal hours to a maximum of 27 7 hours BER The calculated BER over the entire duration of the test ie average over test period It is displayed as follows When there are more than 100 errors the exact BER is displayed When there are less than 100 errors a symbol prefixes the BER display approximately equal to as the result is statistically poor When there have been NO errors the modem does not know if the BER is perfect or simply if the test has not been running long enough to receive an error In such a case it prefixes the display with a
312. p RS232 software selectable For special requirements a customer specific interface card may be fitted User Data Rates Closed Network Resolution of 1 bps Rate Rate 3 Rate 76 Uncoded Rate 25 min 4 8k 7 2k 8 4k 9 6k BPSK max 1250k 1875k 2187k 2500k min 9 6k 14 4k 16 8k 19 2k QPSK OQPSK mix 2 5M 3 75M 4 375M 5 0M min 19 2k SPSK TCM Closed Net plus ESC As Closed Net above but limits include an overhead of approx 1 4 x ESC Baud rate Resolution of 1 bps ESC from 50Baud to 38 4kBaud IBS SMS Mode lt 9 6k to 2048k 6 7 overhead added Resolution of 1 bps IDR Mode 64k to gt 2048k 96k overhead added Resolution of 8k limitation of frame structure Note Maximum data rate is 512kbps in all modes before overheads unless the High Data Rate option is fitted Forward Error Turbo Product Codec TPC Preset rates inc rate 1 2 34 7 amp 0 789 Correction TCM rate 25 to IESS 310 P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 23 Reed Solomon outer FEC Reed Solomon Turbo TCM Viterbi rate s 34 or 7e 7 to IESS 308 309 3 bit soft decision decoding Sequential rate 12 34 or to IESS 312 2 bit soft decision decoding Concatenated Reed Solomon outer codec to IESS 308 310 Optional variable code rate Viterbi amp Sequential are independent FEC options all may be fitted simultaneously Scrambling IBS SMS IDR amp Closed Net
313. p Insert v Normal T1 E1 linear order Drop Insert excludes Odd values of N such as N 7 9 etc see opens feature D Ey IDR operation to IESS 308 Two audio ESC channels Sync 8kbps ESC Four form C o D P1348 emulation Emulation of P1348 P1448 cards popular in SNG applications Includes generation of 64kbps carrier from 2 x 32k ADPCM audio using IDR Audio ESC ports or 128kbps from 2 x Audio 64kbps data PRBS Tester PRBS tester Internal BERT can run through Main ESC and Aux channels in any o h modes 8PSK TCM 8PSK with rate Trellis Code Modulation TCM to IESS 310 Arbitrary Timeslot re ordering on Tx amp Rx paths Timeslot ID maintenance for the Odd values of N giving N 1 to 31 with IBS SMS or Closed Net plus ESC operation E1 CAS amp T1 RBS signalling support Rx Partial Insert for multi destinational working Extended D I Custom Features Arbitrary amp when using Reed Solomon Custom and Minimum Overhead framing modes Custom allocation of IBS o h between Async ESC amp Sync Aux ports Dual rate If data rate is fixed by feature P then fixed at Low Rate unless this feature enabled when choice of Low Rate or High Rate is available see below No effect if feature P enables Variable rate Dual Rate Turbo Codec inc rates 1 2 34 76 amp 0 789 Later model P300 only previously letter W was spare active v v v X Spare active Y Spare inactive Z
314. p to seven bytes within the 126 may be corrected no matter how many individual bits per byte are in error However when the error rate exceeds the correctable level unlike other FEC schemes which degrade gracefully Reed Solomon fails dramatically Once the error correction threshold is passed eg 8 errors in our example block the codec considers it uncorrectable and passes the block uncorrected ie the error rate goes from 0 to no error correction in one step There is a small transitional area where due to the distribution of the errors the errors in some blocks are just below the threshold and therefore fully correctable and for some blocks just above and therefore uncorrectable In practice this effect gives a RS satellite circuit a transition from error free to unserviceable in about a 1dB change in Eb No In addition to the n k t specification of the code rate there is an additional parameter of interleaving depth Interleaving is used to mix up the blocks so that a burst of errors affects a few bytes from several blocks rather than a lot of bytes from a single block Interleaving is usually of depth 4 or depth 8 The configuration menus are described in the following paragraphs See also the applications section para 8 4 Choosing Optimum Custom RS N amp k Values on page 144 P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 68 The Reed Solomon menu appears as follows Tx RS outer codec 1 Off 2 INTELSAT
315. pecifies how the modem is to handle the detection of AIS the Alarm Indication Signal all ones INTELSAT specify the required actions as the Prompt Traffic alarm should be raised AIS should be regenerated to prevent multiple noisy links building up enough errors to stop the all ones being detected and the backward alarm should be sent In continuous modes this option allows all three actions to be disabled In Drop Insert modes the Prompt Traffic alarm and the backward alarm are disabled but AIS is still regenerated if it is detected Default ACTION This option is only displayed if the Insert mux is active and set for Channel Associated Signalling CAS It controls the forcing of the abcd signalling bits passed to the terrestrial port to certain values when an incoming backward alarm is received Default Normal The options are Normal A backward alarm is sent out of the insert mux to the terrestrial network INTELSAT IESS 309 Sig AIS The abcd signalling nibbles for the inserted timeslots are forced to all ones b The b bit of the abcd signalling nibbles for the inserted timeslots are forced to a one Eutelsat EESS 501 SMS abzl1 The a and 6 bits of the abcd signalling nibbles for the inserted timeslots are forced to a one P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 102 6 10 4 Change User Opt Operation TERRESTRIAL Menu Terrestrial 1 PCM Bearer CRC BER monitors 2 Tx Drop mux 3 Insert mux
316. play of Eb No eg to track short duration interruptions such as a helicopter crossing the beam and this option disables the Eb No averaging providing a faster responding but rather jittery Eb No display 7 Severely Degraded Phase noise mode In response to a customer request to provide operation with a severely degraded receive phase noise in QPSK this mode can be enabled It allows operation with up to 20dB worse phase noise than the INTELSAT mask DC 1kHz although at the cost of a degraded BER in normal operating conditions BER is degraded by up to 1dB compared to Normal mode P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 202 8 Disable the Upper Temperature Limit The specified upper internal temperature limit of the modem is 60C Within three degrees of this the unit will raise a Unit Warning amp deferred alarm relay Warning Int temp 57C Tx CARRIER WILL MUTE outside operating range 0 60C Above an internal temperature of 60C the carrier mutes and a Unit Fault is raised amp Prompt Unit alarm relay Unit Fault Tx carrier muted unit temp 61C outside operating range 0 60C Setting Fault Mode to 8 disables both the carrier muting and the Unit Fault Prompt alarm above 60C however the warning deferred alarm above 57C is still activated Modem operation outside the specified internal temperature range is not guaranteed and so this option should not be used on satellite 9 Internal Test Mode Disable
317. played it takes over the whole of the Tx amp Rx Traffic Summary screen as it is important and likely to relate to both Tx amp Rx paths The three detailed screens are however still available by pressing the Down key from the Unit Fault Message On each successive press the screen cycles through the following three screens until on the fourth press it returns to whichever of the two Status Screens has been selected as the default DETAILED RECEIVE TRAFFIC STATUS Rx OK since 22 58 on 3 6 97 BER gt 1E 7 Buffer 2 0 53 Tx Detailed Receive Traffic Status This screen normally shows the time of the last traffic interruption the estimated user BER along with the Doppler buffer overflow amp underflow counts reset by ACTION RESET SLIP COUNTS and the current buffer fill status If the BER indication is followed by an asterisk then there have been less than 100 errors and the results are statistically weak If there is a receive traffic fault then a more detailed two line description of the fault warning replaces the status information as opposed to the one line message on the Status Traffic Summary Screen Pressing down again selects the Transmit Detailed Traffic Status P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 51 DETAILED TRANSMIT TRAFFIC STATUS Tx OK since 08 25 4 6 97 Carr Normal Demod Detailed Transmit Traffic Status As with the Rx screen this shows the date of the last interrupti
318. ppears below but some options may not be displayed depending on how the modem Service is defined ESC Aux 1 Define 2 Async ESC 3 Interfaces 4 Audio levels 5 Back alm Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Menu IBS SMS IDR In Closed Net Plus ESC mode a slightly different screen is displayed including the overhead percentage required to support the ESC rate as set ESC Channel overhead is 2 39 1 Async 2400 8 N 2 Interface RS485 3 Audio Change Tx Rx ESC Aux Menu Closed Net Plus ESC DEFINE ASYNC ESC INTERFACES AUDIO LEVELS BACK ALM P300H Enable amp Disable the ESC amp Aux ports specify the port usage eg IDR sync or async ESC and allocate different parts of the overhead to each port In Closed Net Plus ESC the ESC channel is already defined to use as much of the overhead as possible and the Aux channel is not available so the Define option is not required and is not offered When the ESC port is set for async operation this selection configures the async character format and Baud rate Set the electrical interfaces for each port for the ESC port control if it is directly internally linked to the M amp C port for distant end M amp C Set the levels or the Audio port both in when used for IDR ESC and when used directly to generate a 64kbps carrier 2 x Audio only or 128 kbps carrier 2 x Audio 64k data Configure the four Tx backward alarms to map to the external input ports or be directly conn
319. ps above the 8kbps channel capacity and so characters will be lost At 9600 Baud with 9 bits char ie 8 plus parity there are 872 async characters per second 9600 11 start 8 bits parity stop 872 async characters per second requires 9 x 872 sync bits per second to convey 7 85kbps and so no characters will be lost over the 8K ESC channel So when set for 8 bits No Parity or 7 bits with Parity the maximum standard Baud rate is 4800 Baud When set for 8 bits with Parity the maximum standard Baud rate is 9600 Baud This is followed by the Aux port definition screen Tx Aux Circuit 1 Off normal 2 64K in V1 amp 2 3 32K in V1 4 32K in V2 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Define IDR Aux Menu The Aux port can provide a 32kbps or 64kbps synchronous data circuit in place of one or both of the Audio ESC channels OFF NORMAL The Audio ESC channels operate as normal the Aux port is disabled 64K IN V1 V2 Both ESC Audio channels are disabled and the Aux port operates at 64kbps 32K IN V1 Audio ESC V2 operates as normal and the Aux port provides a 32kbps channel in V1 32K IN V2 Audio ESC V1 operates as normal and the Aux port provides a 32kbps channel in V2 P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 77 IBS MODE ESC amp AUX PORT DEFINITIONS 6 6 27 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA DEFINE IBS Menu When operating in IBS or Custom IBS modes the Define selection is as follows Tx Aux Port 1
320. put unless the attenuator early in the BUC gain profile is set suitably high IF IN DOUBT always start with the MINIMUM modem Tx Carrier level and the MAXIMUM BUC attenuator setting The second line of this screen reports the actual power measured by the BUC P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 112 6 12 7 Change BUC LNB Rx LNB Menu Rx LNB 1 LNB Type 2 DC amp References 3 SHF Frequencies Change BUC LNB Rx LNB Menu Options for LNB Type and DC amp References are only offered on L Band modems Each option is defined in the following paragraphs 6 12 8 Change BUC LNB Rx LNB LNB Type Menu LNB Attached 1 None 2 Other 3 3 625 4 2G 4 10 95 11 45G 5 10 95 11 7G 6 11 2 11 7 7 11 7 12 2 8 12 25 12 75 Change BUC LNB Rx LNB LNB Type Menu The table below specifies the parameters for the listed LNB types Description Low Frequency Limit High Frequency Limit Frequency Shift None Modem IF limits around user set SHF Frequency Shift Other Modem IF limits around user set SHF Frequency Shift Std C 3 635 GHz 4 200 GHz 5150 MHz Sta Ku 10 950 GHz 11 450 GHz 10000 MHz 10 95 11 79 10 950 GHz 11 700 GHz 10000 MHz 11 2 11 7G 11 200 GHz 11 700 GHz 10250 MHz 11 7 12 2G 11 700 GHz 12 200 GHz 10750 MHz 12 25 12 75G 12 250 GHz 12 750 GHz 11300 MHz As with the BUC s the difference between None and Ofher is that with Other the operator can configure the modem
321. quencies When the LNB Type has been set to a predefined type ie not None or Ofher then this setting is done automatically and the menu option to manually set the frequency shift is not presented Set downconverter freq shift to display amp edit Rx freq at antenna Yes 1 Yes 2 No Change BUC LNB Rx LNB SHF Frequency Menu 1 If Yes is selected then the following screen is displayed Freq shift of downconverter 13050 MHz 0 65535MHz 2 2 YES Change BUC LNB Rx LNB SHF Frequency Menu 2 Once set all Rx IF frequencies displayed or edited include the frequency shift of the LNB or downconverter chain Note this manual entry of SHF Frequency shift always assumes a low side Local Oscillator LO and therefore displays the SHF Frequency LO IF There is no means to enter a High Side LO where the SHF frequency received would be LO IF Frequency unlike the situation where the modem is told it has a Std C band LNB and knows that a high side LO is used P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 114 6 12 11 Change BUC LNB Tune Ref Menu This screen is only shown if a tuneable internal reference is fitted ie something other than the default 1PPM reference Tune Reference 50 to nudge YES to accept NO to cancel Change BUC LNB Tune Ref Menu This screen allows the internal reference oscillator to be calibrated up to about 1PPM the actual range depends on the exact osc
322. r BUC Menu This menu is only available on the P310 L Band modem It provides information on the current BUC connected BUC Type Std Ku Modem BUC Mode Terminal Monitor BUC Menu BUC Type This may be either None Other Std Ku Ext Ku Std C INSAT C or PALAPA C If the BUC is from Paradise Datacom and the modem is fitted with the FSK communication option then significantly more information is available on this and subsequent screens On this screen Modem BUC Mode This may be either Independent where the BUC may be controlled from the modem front panel or Terminal where the modem control the BUC and the modem RF output power to maintain a fixed power level at the BUC output taking out temperature induced variations in the cable etc Subsequent screens those marked only visible when the BUC is FSK capable include The BUC communications status amp Address Temperature amp PLL lock status The BUC Set power the Measured power set output status on off and attenuator range amp value The FSK generator receiver status true output status on off The DC amp 10MHz ref supply to the BUC on off setting measured current and current low high trip limits P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 118 6 14 INFO MENU Info 1 This unit 2 Supplier 3 View Config 4 Terr Intfc 5 Features 6 BUC LNB Info Menu The options are as follows THIS UNIT This screen displays the mod
323. r comprising just of two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels or a 128kbps carrier comprising 64kbps data from the main data interface of the modem plus two 32kbps ADPCM audio channels These modes are effectively an emulation of and are compatible with the popular P1348 P1448 voice data mux card used often in SNG applications The choice between which mode is made on the following menu Voice Data mux P1348 P1448 emulation 1 Audio 2 Audio 64k Data Change Tx Rx Baseband Other Menu AUDIO A 64kbps data stream is generated from the two 32kbps ADPCM audio ports normally used for the IDR Audio ESC function Closed Net Plus ESC IBS or Custom IBS overhead is required in order to maintain the octet alignment part of timeslot ID maintenance in order for this to function On the Tx path the clock mode is forced to internal and on the Rx mode the clock mode is forced to satellite as the terrestrial interface is audio only there are no clocking issues AUDIO DATA A 128kbps data stream is generated 64kbps from the two 32kbps ADPCM audio ports normally used for the IDR Audio ESC function plus 64kbps from the main data port Closed Net Plus ESC IBS or Custom IBS overhead is required in order to maintain the timeslot ID and hence keep the channels separate in order for this to function Normal clocking selections are available P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 62 6 6 7 Change Tx CLOCKING Menu Paradise
324. r not Control over such parameters is provided here Change Terr intfc ELECTRICAL With the standard P1440 RS422 V 35 RS232 and optional G 703 interface the following menu is shown it may vary if other interfaces are used The G 703 option on this screen is only shown if a T1 or E1 G 703 option is fitted Set electrical interface 1 V 35 2zRS422 3 RS232 4 G 703 Change Terr Intfc Electrical Menu Interface The selection is self explanatory Note that the 25 pin EIA 530 connector and 37 pin RS449 connectors on the rear of the equipment are connected in parallel and both should not be used simultaneously All electrical interfaces are available on both connectors including G 703 unless it is an E1 G 703 option where the switch on the option card is set for 75Q in which case the interface is on the BNC connectors fitted as part of this option P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 96 For the first three options the dialogue terminates here for G 703 it proceeds to the line code selection Set G 703 line code 1 AMI 2 HDB3 Normal Change Terr Intfc Electrical Menu Line Code if G 703 For E1 G 703 the line code selection is as shown above AMI Alternate Mark Inversion or HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3 For T1 G 703 the line code selection is between AMI and B8ZS Binary 8 Zero Substitution In both cases the NON AMI option is most common so select this if in any doubt The NON
325. ral dB away from either the upper or lower modem power end stop to provide future fine adjustment range Initial power adjustments must be made off satellite The measured BUC power can be viewed using Monitor BUC P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 109 TERMINAL The Modem takes control of the BUC to act as an integrated terminal and the two together respond as follows modem IF output level screens are replaced by a screen allowing the operator to set the output power at the BUC flange Modem continuously reads the monitored power output from the BUC and automatically varies the modem IF level and BUC attenuator to maintain the set power at the BUC flange ie compensates for temperature changes in cable equipment etc The BUC Tx On Off output is maintained as On the Tx carrier can still be muted on Change Tx Modulator Carrier menu The modem automatically reads the frequency shift from the BUC and configures the modem for display entry of the final SHF frequencies instead of IF frequencies Terminal mode can only be used with a single carrier through the BUC as the modem will try and compensate for the combined measured power by adjusting the single carrier from the modem controlling the BUC Terminal mode where the Tx power is varied to maintain a steady level at the BUC flange is NOT compatible with AUPC which requires the Tx power to vary to meet receive c
326. raph title Custom Overhead Allocation which follows If the Aux port is also set to Sync Channel then this one screen allocates the overhead between the Aux and ESC ports All the available overhead is assigned to the ESC channel if the Aux port is defined as Sync Channel then the selection reads All Avail after Aux and when the operator has defined the overhead allocated to the Aux port any remaining is allocated to the ESC port If using the Custom IBS Minimum overhead mode where the overhead rate varies to accommodate the ESC Baud rate defined then setting the ESC to All Avail maximises the proportion of the overhead available to the ESC and lowers the overhead addition to the minimum possible P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 79 6 6 28 Custom IBS Overhead Allocation Several of the above paths lead to the following screen where the available overhead can be allocated between the Aux port if set to Sync Channel and the ESC port if set to Custom This option is only available of the Custom Features feature is available standard P300 TCM This sophisticated facility allows the operator for example to Onhigh rate links specify a low proportion of the overhead to be assigned to the ESC channel still enough to provide the require async Baud rate but then allocate the remaining overhead to the Aux port configured for a Sync Channel allowing external access to the rest of the overhead for example o
327. rder Re order Rx TS if Tx TS Tx TS re order frame aligned End of Dialogue BASEBAND Continuous data Insert mux _ gt INSERT BEARER DATA FOR THIS TOTAL DATA FROM SAT DATA FOR THIS DESTINATION Other function Loop terrestrial Option Extended D I Interactive entry of full dala Interactive selection of Timeslots Generate Partial rate from satellite from satelite for this destination All normal ie to be inserted VOICE DATA MUX Option IDR K Audio 2 x 32k ADPCM Audio 64k data 6 732 CHAN ASSOCIATED SIG Option Extended D I Normal ignore Transfer via overhead Spon is TS IDENTITY MAINTAINED tege BY TS32 MULTIFRAME INSERT BEARER Yes to acknowledge Option Drop Insert INSERT TIMESLOTS Interactive selection of NP Timeslots 6732 TS IDENTITY OVER SAT Pon Sheek mote Option Extended D I CHANGE T1 RBS OVER SATELLITE Normal maintain RX Option Extended D I Don t care Normal or no RBS Maintain RBS TS IDENTITY MAINTAINED BY TS32 CAS RBS MULTIFRAME implied by CAS RBS not displayed CHANGE RX Service Baseband Buffer Clocking BUF FER CLOCKING STATION CLOCK STATION CLOCK FREQ 3 IF SYNTH REFERENCE Demod Station clock input None Entry of station clock frequency Only if Station Clock is specified Rx clock source 1kHz to 10MHz 1kHz resolution as 10MHz Buffer size RS422 Normal synths use inter
328. rhead can reduce to less than 196 whilst still maintaining the IBS SMS benefits namely a factor of P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 134 7 1 3 three error rate improvement due to using the IBS SMS scrambler instead of the V 35 scrambler the ESC channel and the backward alarm facility gt The operator can set the ESC channel Baud rate to 9600 Baud even at low data rates For example at 64kbps the high rate ESC would normally provide a 2400 Baud channel but if 9600 Baud is set in Minimum overhead mode the overhead will scale to provide it The practical ESC rate limit is 70 of the data rate ie you can have a 9600 Baud ESC channel down to a data rate of 11kbps The final satellite data rate including overhead can be displayed on the INFO VIEW CONFIG TX RX screens NOTE This is obvious but it is stated here as a reminder As the exact overhead format is calculated based on your ESC requirement for two Modems to calculate the same overhead usage and therefore interwork the following parameters must be the same at both ends of the link Main Data Rate ESC async character format bits parity amp Baud rate Proportion of overhead assigned to ESC Baseband mode ie continuous or Drop Insert Change Tx Rx Service Custom IDR Menu If IDR is select from the menu Tx Rx Service Custom screen this leads to the following question Framing based on 1 Low rate format T1 E1 2 H
329. rial error rate based on CRC T1 ESF and G 732 or Frame Alignment Word errors all bearer types The IBS SMS or Closed Net plus ESC overhead maintains the identity of individual timeslots for 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15 16 20 24 30 see Extended D I Feature below Extended Drop Insert Feature Timeslot Re ordering Timeslot ID Maintenance Multi destinational working Signalling Selected timeslots may be independently re ordered on both Tx and Rx paths The IBS SMS or Closed Net plus ESC overhead is extended to maintain the identity of individual timeslots for all values of N from 1 to 31 including the previously unavailable values N 7 9 11 13 14 17 19 21 23 25 29 and 31 All or only a subset of the received data may be inserted into the terrestrial bearer on the receive path for multi destinational working Both Channel Associated Signalling CAS and Robbed Bit Signalling RBS are fully supported For E1 G 732 Drop Insert CAS signalling is extracted from terrestrial TS16 and carried over the satellite in IBS SMS TS16 and TS48 before re inserting into the distant terrestrial TS16 For T1 D4 and T1 ESF RBS the IBS or Closed Net plus ESC overheads maintain the identity of the in band signalling and it is re inserted into the terrestrial multiframe in the correct positions to maintain the RBS Async ESC Feature amp Aux Data Channel P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operat
330. riteria 6 12 3 Change BUC LNB Tx BUC DC amp REFERENCES Menu This screen is only available on P310 L Band modems where the BUC Type has been set to other than None DC SUPPLY 10M REF CURRENT MONITOR P300H Tx BUC 1 DC Supply On 2 10M Ref Off 3 Current Monitor 2400 2800mA Change BUC LNB Tx BUC DC amp References Menu If fitted with the P315 BUC DC supply option then the modem may source 100W of 24V or 48V factory option to the BUC up the coax or line powered The only option available here is On or Off CAUTION Needless to say severe damage may occur if a DC supply is fed to a BUC not configured for being Line powered The internal 10MHz reference may similarly be sourced from the modem up the coax to the BUC The only option available here again is On or Off If the modem is sourcing the DC supply to the BUC then it may be set to monitor the current drawn by the BUC and to raise an alarm Tx Fault if it goes outside a user defined window Two subsequent screens allow the user to independently set the low and high current alarm thresholds The current being drawn by the BUC can be monitored from the Monitor BUC menu s P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 110 6 12 4 6 12 5 Change BUC LNB Tx BUC SHF FREQUENCY Menu This screen is available on both 7OMHz 140MHz P300 modems and P310 L Band modems and allows the modem to be set to display and edit the final SHF
331. rk equipment from other vendors Closed Net Plus ESC adds the lowest possible overhead to the satellite data to provide whatever ESC rate is selected When this mode is selected there is also the option to provide a Backward Alarm facility Closed Net Plus ESC also has the advantage that at rates above 32kbps a synchronous scrambler is used in place of the error multiplying V 35 scrambler used on normal closed network links and if used with Drop Insert the Timeslot Identity is maintained If you want the backward alarm synchronous scrambler or Timeslot ID Maintenance advantages of Closed Net Plus ESC but don t want an ESC channel simply select the ESC to the lowest Baud rate available 50 Baud and the rest of the features will be provided within less than 0 5 overhead The Tx Rx path operates IBS SMS Open Network mode where a 1 15th framing overhead is added to the data In this mode the Modem is compatible with other Open network equipment such as the P230 2300 OEM modems used with a P1300 framing unit or other Open Network equipment from other vendors Refer to the section IBS SMS Service Features in Appendix F on page 207 for a full description of IBS SMS features The Tx path operates in IDR mode where a 96kbps framing overhead is added to the data In this mode the equipment is compatible with OEM modems used with a P1300 framing unit or other IDR equipment from other vendors Refer to section
332. rn Transmit FIFO slip The FIFO which interfaces the Drop Mux to the Framer has slipped full or empty This should never occur in operation contact factory Tx Warn Backward alarm at Tx input A Frame Backward Alarm is detected at the Tx Input This indicates that equipment downstream of D SB the RECEIVE path has failed and is returning an alarm This may be due to any receive downstream equipment but could be due to the modem Rx output failing Check the modem Rx path indicates OK Check the Rx data output from the modem is connected to the downstream equipment Tx Warn TS16 MF Back alarm at Tx input A Multiframe Backward Alarm is detected at the Tx Input this indicates that equipment downstream D SB SD of the RECEIVE path has failed to find multiframe sync and is returning an alarm The Modem only Note 2 detects this alarm when the Tx baseband is set to use the Drop mux in a G 732 mode and CAS signalling has been selected or 2048k IBS G 732 0 overhead mode with CAS is enabled On the Rx path if the Insert Mux bearer is set to Generate then check the Rx path is also utilising CAS otherwise it will generate a bearer without a TS16 Multiframe Tx Warn Tx input BER User threshold The Bit Error Rate at the Tx input measured on the PCM Frame Alignment Words is worse than D the user set threshold for a deferred alarm Change User Opt Thresholds User BER This warning will be replaced with a Fault message at 1x10 Check the line code set
333. rnal BER measurments amp the source for those when the source is variable The alarm status of the unit Separate Unit Tx traffic amp Rx traffic faults amp warnings well as Errors Warnings or Info relating to the pending configuration pm status in one bit per subject format The test configuration of the unit loopbacks PRBS tester configuration test functions CW alt 1 0 RS decoder disable Page 198 RxCalcQry V1 v1 49 to unit unit RxCalcRa lae Calculated Rx parameters eg intermediate data rates ie with each overhead as RxCalcRd V1 49 from unit I L Rex Config added Min overhead frame lengths ESC rates available current config only V1 49 to unit 29 0 TxCalcRd Query Calculated Tx parameters eg intermediate data rates ie with each overhead as TxCalcRd V149 unit 30 TxCalcQry Config added Min overhead frame lengths ESC rates available current config only GoLocal V1 37 to unit 0 ack Command ContModeQry V1 37 Unit 0 gt ContModeRd Query Local remote config parameters ContModeRd V1 37 from unit he 2 ContModeQry Contig ContModeWr V1 37 to unit 33 2 Change 0 6 0 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 gt ack 6 ShortDeviceQry V1 49 to unit gt ShortDeviceRd Query The device model number amp software version two most significant digits only 6 ShortDeviceRd V1 37 unit ShortDeviceQ
334. ro controller provides all M amp C functions Revised embedded software may be downloaded to FLASH memory with modem still in equipment racks No EPROMs no opening of the case Up to 10 different configurations can be stored amp recalled from the front panel or remote M amp C Clear amp intuitive operator interface with plain English dialogue allows fast and efficient configuration of modem 80 Character backlit high contrast wide angle LCD 15 Key tactile full keyboard For multi drop applications RS485 interface for direct to PC applications RS232 interface front panel selectable M amp C port may be directly internally linked to ESC port for distant end over the satellite M amp C without cabling 1 1 redundancy controller built in Y cables passively split data maintaining impedances L Band inputs outputs are passively split combined outside the units Offline unit tri states data outputs amp mutes Tx carrier Stability See Internal Reference Station Reference clocking section Switchable from front panel remote M amp C Tx at rear N Type to BUC 7dBm 2dB Rx at rear N Type to LNB 0dBm 0 2dB Switchable from front panel remote M amp C Tx 24V or 48V factory option 100W Rx 15V or 24V at 500mA P310 Option for duplex FSK Communication with Paradise BUCs P314 Provides control of BUC from modem front panel or by remote M amp C via normal modem M amp C ports Includes control and monitoring of a
335. roduct Code FEC if the Turbo option is available Pressing YESaccepts the current FEC type and where there is a choice of FEC rates leads onto the FEC Code Rate selection screen Note that 8PSK and TCM must be used together and that for TCM only rate is available For a review of the processing delay associated with the Sequential decoder and how this is minimised please refer to FaultMode 3 in Appendix E If interworking with other manufacturers equipment it is worth reading the notes in the section Interworking different manufacturers equipment on page 153 which covers primarily scrambling but also the requirements for Spectrum Invert with Viterbi Sequential in BPSK and QPSK If specifically interworking with Comstream equipment with sequential FEC see also Appendix E for Fault Mode 11 Comstream compatible sequential mode For Viterbi and Sequential FEC the FEC rate selection screen is as follows Select FEC Rate 1 1 2 Rate 2 3 4 Rate 3 7 8 Rate Change Tx Rx Mod Demod FEC Rate Menu Vit Seq The FEC code rate may be select as 1 2 34 or Rate again pressing YESwill accept the current FEC rate and return to the Change Tx Modulator menu Most INTELSAT services use the more powerful 1 2 rate or 34 rate FEC increasing the data rate by factors of 2 and 4 3 respectively The operator is warned of unusual combinations of Modulation and FEC type code rate when SETUP CHECK is requested P300H P300 S
336. rrently both of these adjustments are at an end stop and the modem cannot adjust the levels any further in order to try and maintain the set flange power E P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 220 RX TRAFFIC FAULTS Bottom line of disp Rx Traffic Faults Rx OK LED Off and Rx Traffic prompt relay Rx Fault Demod unlocked at lt nn nnnn gt MHz The Demod cannot find a carrier to lock to at the specified frequency Check the frequency check T TA TC SB RF the Data rate and FEC settings use Info View Config Rx Perhaps check the demod itself by enabling a IF Loopback Test Loopback IF Rx Fault FEC sync lost demod locked The Demod can lock to the carrier but the inner FEC decoder Turbo Vit or Seg cannot lock to the T TA TC SB RF demodulated data Check you have the correct FEC settings ie Turbo Vit or Seq as appropriate use Info View Config Rx The most common other cause is Spectrum Inversion you can check this by temporarily turning on the Rx Spectrum Inversion Change Rx Demod Spect Inv Rx Fault De interleaver sync lost The Demod can lock to the carrier and the inner FEC decoder to the demodulated data However the T TA TC SB RF Reed Solomon De interleaver cannot find sync with the decoded data Check the RS de interleaving depth then the values of and K use Info View Config Rx On Non Paradise Tx modems check the V 35 scrambler is not enabled in addition to the Reed Solomon s
337. ry Status 6 UnitInfoQry 0 61 unit 37 gt UnitInfoRd Query The model number version numbers amp ID s of the internal cards amp software 6 7 7 7 8 9 9 9 UnitInfoRd V0 61 from unit 18 UnitInfoQry Status SAFChgWr V1 76 to unit 51 14 ack Change Enter an unpgrade code there is no direct corresponding read other than SAF Stat SAFStatQry V1 49 Ho unit 50 0 SAFStatRd Query Query the hardware amp software feature capability SAFStatRd V1 49 unit 58 SAFStatQQry Config ActionWr V1 18 to unit 4 ack Action Front panel actions eg buffer centre clear slip counters etc TxPwrQry VO 61 to unit 26 0 TxPwrRd Query Short message for Tx power or carrier on off without rest of Txmod To allow TxPwrRd 0 61 from unit 2 TxPwrQry Contig changes to Tx power without risk of anything else being reconfigured amp hence TxPwrWr V0O 61 to unit 2 ack Change traffic disturbed current config only 10 Logi6EventQry VO0 71 to unit 34 1 gt Logi6EventRd Query log To read the traffic log 10 Logi6EventRd V0 71 from unit 178 Log16EventQry Log events Log4EventQry VO 71 to unit 35 1 Log4EventRd Query log 10 Log4EventRd 0 71 unit 46 Log4EventQry Log events 10 LogDoneMsgWr VO 71 unit 36 2 ack End log query 11 RemoteKbaWr TBD to unit 6 RemoteLCDRd Keyboard Remote operation of unit as if from keyboard Initial RemoteKbdWr message with
338. s a pluggable equipment class A for connection to the mains supply As such it is provided with a mains inlet cord suitable for use in the country of operation In normal circumstances this will be of an adequate length for installation in the rack If the mains cable proves to be too short then any replacement must have a similar type fuse if fitted and be manufactured to a similar specification For example look for HAR BASEC or HOXXX X ratings on the cable and the connector ends marked with BS1636A UK free plug 13 amp BSI VDE NF USE UL CSA OVE CEBEC NEMKO DEMKO SETI IMQ SEV and KEMA KEUR for the IEC 6 amp free socket Schuko and North American free plugs must have similar markings The installation of the equipment and the connection to the mains supply must be made in compliance to local or national wiring regulations for a category Il impulse over voltage installation The positioning of the equipment must be such that the mains supply socket outlet for the equipment should be near the equipment and easily accessible or that there should be another suitable means of disconnection from the mains supply The equipment is designed to operate from a TN type power supply system as specified in EN 60950 This means a system that has separate earth line and neutral conductors The equipment is not designed to operate with an IT power system which has no direct connection to earth CAUTION This unit has DOUBLE POLE NEUTRAL FUSING P
339. s described above using the Custom Service options is identical with the Closed Net Plus ESC facility which may be directly activated in software V1 50 or greater from the Service Closed Net ESC menu ESC channel with mis match configurations at Absolute Minimum Overhead 0 39 Summary fairly technical In Closed Net Plus ESC mode or Custom IBS modes with minimum overhead selected the modem adds the minimum possible overhead to accommodate the required ESC channel The overhead is variable from 1 1 100 to 1 256 0 39 which covers a large range of requirements however for very high bit rates with very low ESC requirements 0 3996 may still provide an ESC channel capable of more than the required Baud rate For example with a 2048kbps closed network link with a 2400Baud ESC channel selected the minimum 0 3996 overhead could actually support an ESC of 6135Baud This is not normally an issue as the ESC UART is set to the 2400Baud the user has specified and the fact that the channel could provide more is masked by the throughput limitation of the 2400Baud async link outside the modem However under certain scenarios discovered recently Nov 2002 it is possible in this absolute minimum overhead mode to get the ESC channel operate strangely Specifically it is possible to get the ESC channel to cause a delay in transmission of up to characters as if they were stuck the pipe which only appear out of the ESC channel when pushe
340. s emptied and automatically slipped to position itself back in mid position Half the buffer capacity will have been repeated but for framed data eg T1 E1 only frame sync will not be lost if the user option Change User Opt Operation Terr Sat Buffer MF Slip is set to Adjust to ensure buffer slips are an integer multiple of the multiframe length After a break in the Rx signal the Insert Mux is bit slipping data in the Doppler Buffer to bring the data taken out of the Buffer by the Insert Mux into step with the terrestrial bearer frame timing Rx Warn Ins mux slipping sig to sync See above text but this time with regard to CAS signalling data not the main data path The FIFO which interfaces the RS Decoder to the Deframer has slipped full or empty This should never occur in operation contact factory The FIFO which carries the CAS signalling from the Doppler Buffer to the Insert Mux has slipped full or empty This should never occur in operation contact factory P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook a a E Page 226 Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Other Rx Warn DISTANT Eb No below threshold The DISTANT modems Receive Eb No ie this local modems TX CARRIER is worse than the user threshold set for a deferred alarm Change User Opt Thresholds Distant Eb No This may be used as an advance warning of service degradation This function is only available
341. s in appendix A for line names Should this clock input fail the Modem will switch to an internal backup clock as used when INTERNAL is selected to maintain the carrier distant demodulator lock and if a framing overhead is active the Backward Alarm Aux and ESC channels INTERNAL The Modem outputs a clock on the Int Tx clock line see interface card details in appendix A for line names for use by the external equipment Unlike the previous Paradise products there is no requirementto loop this clock back into the Clock line on the P300 Modem it is routed internally The clock is normally generated from the internal frequency reference of 1 PPM However if a Station Clock of 10MHz only is applied to the unit then under the Rx Clocking screens it is possible to force the modem to replace the internal 1PPM reference with the 10MHz Station Clock as the reference for all clocks and IF synthesizers which normally use the internal reference If this is the case then the nfernal Clock would be generated from the 10MHz station clock RX REF As INTERNAL except the Tx clock is generated from the Rx output clock Ref shows the current Rx clock setting from which the Rx output clock is itself being generated This option is only of any practical use when the Rx Clocking is set to Safellite or Station Clock When the Rx Clocking Satellite this is commonly called Loop Timing Note it uses the Rx output clock not
342. s screen is not available on the L Band modem with FSK when the Tx BUC Type has been set to a known Paradise BUC and the modem BUC configured to operate as a Terminal as here the modem BUC work in a closed loop mode and compensate for whatever the system gain varies to be in order to keep the power measured at the BUC constant P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 111 6 12 6 Change BUC LNB Tx BUC BUC CONTROL Menu This screen is only available on the P310 L Band modem if the BUC Type has been set to a known Paradise BUC the modem has the FSK communications option and the Modem BUC are set in Independent mode In the alternative Terminal mode with Closed loop power control to the BUC flange the BUC is kept On and the BUC attenuator automatically controlled 1 BUC On Off On 2 BUC Attenuator 7dB Power at BUC reads 32 7dBm Change BUC LNB Tx BUC BUC Control Menu BUC ON OFF This switches the BUC Tx on and off independently of the modems Tx Carrier On Off control This may be useful where one BUC carries several carriers passively combined but with one modem providing DC 10MHz Ref FSK and you wish to mute all the carriers BUC ATTENUATOR This allows the user to vary the attenuator in the BUC Typically this is used when there is a short run from the modem to the BUC made with reasonable quality cable and where with such a low loss the minimum output from the modem could saturate the BUC in
343. see Internal Reference below for stability DCE External timing clock DTE interface only Station reference see below P300 1PPM P310 Default as per P300 Options 7x10 7 per year P313B 1x10 7 per year P313C 7 5x10 8 per year P313D 75Q BNC female transformer isolated 1MHz to 10MHz in 1kHz steps accepts sinusoid gt OdBm or squarewave eg G 703 10 1200 RS422 compatible input 1kHz to 10MHz in 1kHz steps When set to 10MHZ the station reference may replace internal reference to all internal circuitry eg IF synths The unit automatically switches back to the internal reference if the station reference fails Selectable in 1 ms increments from 0 to 99 ms Automatically adjusted to slip an integer multiple of terrestrial multiframe length for framed rates T1 E1 Buffer storage is 32kBytes so above 2 6 Mbps max buffer size reduces linearly from 99 ms to 52ms at 5 0Mbps P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 26 Framing amp Deframing Formats Poor BER performance Closed Network unframed Closed Net plus ESC Async ESC Feature provides variable rate async ESC optional synchronous scrambler above 32kbps to replace error multiplying V 35 scrambler optional backward alarm facility and optional Timeslot ID Maintenance when used with Drop Insert all in minimum possible overhead down to lt 0 5 INTELSAT IBS amp Eutelsat SMS IBS SMS Feature Framing to IESS 309 amp
344. sert Menu Insert Mux operation generated bearer This selects the source of the clock for the PCM BEARER onto which the Rx data is inserted Rx output bearer clock source 1 Sat 2 Tx 3 Internal 4 Station Change Rx Buffer Clocking Rx Clock Insert Loop Menu Insert Mux operation looped bearer This selects the source of the clock for the BACKUP PCM BEARER which is only used if the normal bearer looped from the Drop Mux fails and the unit auto generates a backup bearer onto which to insert the Rx data Note that this screen does not display a 7x option as it is the failure of the Tx bearer input which causes this backup clock to be used in the first place Rx o p bearer backup clk 1 Sat 2 Internal 3 Station Change Rx Buffer Clocking Rx Clock Insert Loop Menu All the options available on any of these menus for the Rx output clock are as follows SATELLITE The clock from the satellite This provides Buffer Disable operation the buffer size is set to zero and the buffer size menu is no longer available This is the same as Rx Rx clock options found on some other equipment The Rx PLL converts the satellite clock which may include framing and or Reed Solomon overheads back to the rate required at the terrestrial port If the demodulator cannot lock onto a carrier ie no clock from satellite then the PLL switches to the internal frequency reference to provide a steady clock towards the terrestrial por
345. sert and possibly the Extended Drop Insert features can provide all the Drop Insert functions of competing equipment such as the SDM300 If you are familiar with the modes the SDM300 offers then here is a cross reference along with the menu entries to configure the P300 similarly unlike the SDM300 however you don t have learn what the cryptic abbreviations mean you just answer the questions E1 CCS 2048kbps G 732 with common Channel Signalling 1 Select Change Tx Service IBS SMS 2 Select Change Tx Baseband Drop Mux G 732 3 Select the number of timeslots to drop and include the Common Channel Signalling CCS timeslot probably TS16 4 Select Leave or Replace with Idle code as required 5 When 9 732 Channel Associated Signalling 12 Normal ignore 22 Transfer is asked select Normal ignore 6 If the number of timeslots chosen is not an Odd values of N eg N 7 or 9 then the unit will prompt TS Identity will be maintained by TS32 multiframe YES and the setup is complete 7 f you have selected an Odd value of N the unit will prompt TS Identity over satellite 1 Normal maintain 2 Don t maintain If you select Normal maintain the unit will provide TS identity maintenance for any value of N by using a CAS multiframe Paradise proprietary If you select Don t Maintain then the Modem will not use a CAS multiframe and will be compatible with other manufacturer equipment with the same number of timeslots se
346. set the ESC interface to RS485 The external RS485 port will be disabled and the AUPC will use 100 of the ESC channel capacity at whatever Baud rate you have defined the ESC channel If the ESC channel is to be used for AUPC and distant end remote M amp C set the ESC interface to either Link Local or Link Remote Local at the controlling PC end remote at the end farthest away from the PC Note This is contrary to expectations When using AUPC with either Link Local and Link Remote selected as the ESC interface to internally connect the Remote M amp C port to the ESC channel it is not required to have the ESC channel at the same Baud rate as the M amp C system For example the station M amp C could be running at 9600 Baud and the ESC channel set for 2400 Baud The AUPC software will buffer and rate convert the M amp C messages whilst interleaving the AUPC data M amp C messages will of course take longer to get across a 2400 Baud ESC than a 9600 Baud ESC but if the bandwidth has to be paid for ie it s not withing the IBS SMS or IDR overheads then it s worth the saving Alternatively if the station M amp C is at say 2400 Baud but the station is transmitting a 512kbps IBS SMS link that would support a 19200 Baud ESC within the IBS SMS overhead Setting the ESC for 19200 Baud will provide a very high update rate for the Eb No monitoring by having enough bandwidth so that the maximum 33 it uses in this mode can provide at least a 1H
347. splitters combiners already present in the system Connection details are given in Appendix B and an overview of 1 for 1 operation is provided in section 9 starting on page 163 Remote M amp C connector This is a 9 pin female D type connector whose pinout and interface levels are SA bus compliant The Modem can be set to operate with either Paradise FDC or SA bus protocols The electrical interface can be selected between RS232 for direct to PC applications amp RS485 for multidrop applications The Remote M amp C port may be internally linked ie no cables to the Async ESC port for over the satellite distant end Remote M amp C control Pinout details are in Appendix B P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 18 Rx IF input This connector is BNC female and be used as either a 500 750 input The allowable signal level of the desired carrier at the input of the modem is from 60dBm to 30dBm P310 70dBm to 20dBm A level of 45dBm is recommended The maxinum composite power level that should be applied to this port is 30dB above the desired carrier up to a maximum of 0dBm P310 Composite 35dBc to max of 10dBm Alarms and AGC connector This is a 15 pin male D type connector that provides access to the three form C relay contacts that indicate alarm conditions Also provided on this port if the Monitor AGC option is fitted is an uncommitted analog output which by default provides an AGC
348. sponds to the EIA RS 422A balanced generators Type 3 New terminated voltage generator for gt 10Mbps Strictly the P300 Series is compliant with the Type 2 interface defined for use from 100kbps to 10Mbps however in the P300 Series this interface will also operate down to 4800bps The low offset voltage Type 1 generator is not supported but as specified for use with older equipment in 1985 should not be an issue today The Type 3 is for data rates beyond the P300 Series operating range and also is not supported A few notes from MIL STD 188 114A Connectors pin assignments and communication protocols are not standardised in this MIL STD document FED STD 1030A may be considered equivalent to EIA RS423A and CCITT V 10 FED STD 1020A may be considered equivalent to EIA RS422A and CCITT V 11 P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 175 P1451 EUROCOM D 1 D amp G PLUS MULTI STANDARD INTERFACE The P1451 interface provides support for the Eurocom D 1 interface often used in military or government applications it includes both the Eurocom D and G interfaces as defined for the Eurocom Tactical Communications systems In addition to the Eurocom modes it also provides all the features of the standard P1440 interface including RS422 V 35 RS232 and optional G 703 operation The single exception to this is that the P1451 omits the RS449 pinout 37 pin D type female connector leaving only the EIA 530 pin
349. sted There is a Unit Warning There is a configuration warning from Setup Check There is a Config Info message from Setup Check A Traffic Fault exists A Traffic Warning exists Remote M amp C mode no warnings or test modes active Local mode no warnings or test modes active P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 50 TRAFFIC SUMMARY SCREEN Tx Fault Data input is all ones AIS Rx path OK for 36 8 hrs BER lt 1 E12 Info Traffic Summary Screen Tx top line Rx bottom line When there are no faults this screen shows how long since the last interruption for both paths as for the lower line of the example shown together with the carrier status for the transmit path and the Eb No discussed later for the receive path If either path has a traffic fault warning active then the status is replaced by an abbreviated 40 character fault message on the top or the bottom line for Tx amp Rx respectively A more descriptive message is available on the Info screens accessed with the Down Arrow key These display a more descriptive 80 character messages for the Detailed Rx Traffic status the Detailed Tx Traffic Status and a Detailed Demodulator Status Any Unit Faults override Tx amp Rx Traffic Summary and displays the fault message such as Unit Fault Tx IF synth failure Tx carrier muted Unit Fault overrides Traffic or Configuration Summary screens When a unit fault is dis
350. sweep 2 Preferably adjust the Rx IF Frequency to account for the true Rx carrier frequency including offsets then adjust the sweep range to 50 of the Normal value This will allow the Demod to re acquire the carrier even with further minor variations in Rx carrier frequency without it sweeping into a false lock If you are attempting to do this when you have the Demod correctly locked you can read the current value of offset frequency from the Demodulator Detailed Status screen in order to adjust the Rx IF frequency Change Rx Demod AUPC Menu This screen provides the option to enable or disable the Remote Reporting facility used with AUPC to enable a distant end modem to report it s Eb No and BER back to the other end of the satellite link The facility can be either On or Off See AUPC in section 8 11 1 on page 154 Change Rx ESC AUX BA Menu See Change Tx Rx Modulator ESC Aux BA Menu on page 76 Change Rx RX TX Menu This is described in detail under the initial note on the Rx Tx function in para 6 7 on page 86 Set Rx Tx so most Rx parameters track Tx 1 Off 2 On Change Rx Rx Tx Menu OFF The receive path operates fully independently from the Tx path ON Many of the Rx parameters follow the Tx which greatly simplifies the configuration for duplex links When enabled only the Insert Mux timeslot selection Rx Clocking amp Buffer Size and IF Frequency amp Sweep control require setting indepen
351. t Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA C g Async Menu BAUD RATE Allows the ESC Baud rate to be set see below the current Baud rate setting is displayed FORMAT Allow the async character format for the ESC port to be set see below the current async character format is displayed SET AS M amp C When selected this copies the remote M amp C async settings to the ESC port to simplify using the ESC port for remote M amp C This is a one time copy and the ESC port configuration will not track changes to the remote M amp C configuration When the ESC port is configured as the remote M amp C port 2 appears when not equal appears P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 81 6 6 30 6 6 31 6 6 32 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Config Async BAUD RATE Menu ESC Baud rate 2400 YES Max continuous rate is 2962 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Cfg Async Baud Rate Menu This menu allows the Baud rate for the external interface to the ESC channel to be set Any rate can be set although the maximum continuous rate supported is stated calculated from the terrestrial rate and async character format Refer to section 8 6 Determining exact maximum ESC Baud rates on page 146 Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Config Async FORMAT Menu Async Format 7 bits No parity 1 7 bits 2 8 bits Parity 3 None 4 Even 5 Odd Yes Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Cfg Async Format Menu The ESC async charact
352. t TX CLK IN The Tx path input clock is turned around to drive the Rx data back to the terrestrial This is normal Plesiochronous Mode and the buffer should be set large enough to accommodate both the difference in the clocks at each end of the link PLUS the Doppler shift whilst providing the required interval between slips If the Tx amp Rx rates are equal then the Tx clock is used directly to clock out the Rx data should the Tx input clock fail the clock is switched to a PLL using as first backup the Station Clock if defined as available or if the Station Clock is defined as not available then recovered Satellite Clock while demodulator remains locked Should this first backup fail it finally falls back to the internal 1PPM P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 90 INTERNAL STATION DCE CLK P300H reference in order to maintain the Rx traffic If the modem is operating with asymmetric data rates then the Rx PLL converts the Tx clock to the correct rate for the Rx data Should the Tx clock input fail the PLL switches to the internal reference as backup in order to maintain the Rx traffic The internal 1PPM frequency reference is used to source the clock towards the terrestrial Again the buffer should be set large enough to accommodate the difference between the internal reference and the incoming satellite clock PLUS the Doppler shift whilst providing the required interval between slips If th
353. t Address Instruction Checksum ETX idle 02H 06H FFH 1 255 0 3FH 03H eas Count The message length including STX and ETX characters 06H for zero Body The fixed character 02H length Address Slave address range 1 255 Zero is reserved for the Global address to which all devices respond Instruction Range 0 3FH Add 40H 64 to request a standard ACK add 80H 128 to request an extended ACK to this message PUE MUNI RE a Body 1 Body Body I Asterisk 1st char other chars B n if Body Body From 0 to 248 characters resulting in a maximum message length of 255 characters Asterisk An ASCII character if there is a body ie if the length of the body of the message lt gt 0 Checksum The Modulo 256 sum of all the characters inclusive from the Address to the end of the Body up to and including the asterisk ETX The fixed character 03H The Paradise FDC protocol supported by the P4xx series of Modems is a slightly enhanced version which is backwards compatible with the previous version The enhancement is to add an extended ACK message which the Master specifically requests instead of the original that includes the instruction code of the message it is ACKing This allows multiple messages to be in transit to the same Slave on the M amp C bus with the returned ACK s identifying which messages were received correctly and more importantly which are u
354. t can automatically add several measured parameters to the log at operator set intervals including average amp worst case Eb No average amp worst case estimated user BER average amp worst case estimated uncorrected BER and the buffer fill state The logged performance monitoring allows investigation into customer reports of poor link performance and can provide a useful correlation against weather conditions etc FAULT PHILOSOPHY Faults are split into two categories a UNIT FAULTS Equipment failures such as a synthesiser lock failure b TRAFFIC FAULTS Data path failures such as a lack of input clock A full description of every detected fault its category unit or traffic and the corresponding action taken is provided in Appendix G Fault Messages and Action Table The response of the front panel LED indicators and external fault relays respond is described in the following sections ELECTRICAL DESCRIPTION The P300 modem comprises of a single main modem Printed Circuit Board PCB with four optional additional boards Optional G 703 interface two different boards for T1 or E1 operation Optional IDR ESC board which provides for all the IDR ESC requirements gt Optional Monitor AGC board which provides a user scalable AGC output and a constellation monitor point Optional Turbo FEC daughtercard For the P310 an L Band daughterboard is also fitted internally above the main modem board and further three int
355. t from 1 satellite hop on current INTELSAT satellites For 2 x Doppler shift 4ms is required Set the Tx amp Rx Clock modes as follows to use the clock listed Clock from the interface terrestrial network Tx Clock Tx Clk In Rx Clock Tx Clk in Modem internal clock Rx Clock Internal and feeds the clock to the terrestrial equipment If the Rx output clock is externally looped by equipment or in cable then set Tx Clock Tx In If the Rx output clock is not returned to the modem Tx input by the equipment or the cable then set Tx Clock Rx Station clock Rx Clock Station Tx Clock as for Modem Internal Clock above Satellite Not possible with clock loop at distant end Rx satellite clock is already a copy of our Tx clock we cannot loop it again No Clock Loop If there is no clock loop then both ends need the Buffer active to cope with the normal Doppler effect plus the plesiochronous effect ie the difference between the clocks at each end Apply the following rules to both ends Clock from the interface terrestrial network If the modem has a station clock which also drives the network which the Rx output feeds then select Rx Clock Station If there is no station clock then set Rx Clock 7 In which as the Tx clock comes from the network is presumably derived from the same master clock which clocks the network Set the Tx Clock 7x In Other clock modes P300H P300 Series Modem
356. t on Display Description Cause Notes Relays UNIT FAULTS lines of display Unit Faults Status LED Red amp Unit Fault prompt relay Software Initialising please wait Unit executing power up sequence lt 5 secs U T D TA TC TA TC Other Unit Fault Tx carrier muted unit temp This message refers to the internal unit temperature Check the modem vent slots are clear and the nn C outside operating range 0 60C rear fan has not failed This may be disabled see Fault Mode 8 in Appendix E CM TF Unit Fault PSU fault on The failed PSU line is shown together with its current value in of nominal The unit has a linear line now lt nnn gt supply and will fail if the mains input is below the specified minimum level Check the mains voltage Check the internal PCB mounted Low Voltage fuses Unit Fault Internal LCA programming Internal hardware has failed to initialise disconnect the mains wait 5 seconds and then connect it TA TC CM TF error cycle power supply again If the fault persists see note 8 Unit Fault Internal fault consult factory See note 8 TA TC CM TF CM TF Unit Fault Tx IF synth failure The synthesiser which generates the Tx IF carrier has failed The unit has muted the Tx IF output to Tx carrier muted prevent transmitting an incorrect signal An external 10MHz station reference may be used as the synthesizer reference
357. teps either by direct entry of the required power or by using the up down keys to adjust the current value up or down in 0 1dB steps Pressing the Up Down keys rapidly causes the level to change in 0 5dB increments If AUPC is active refer to AUPC in section 8 11 1 on page 154 then the delta power added by the AUPC is also displayed on the top line When the P310 is operating in Terminal Mode ie with a Paradise BUC and with the FSK option fitted to the modem and the Modem BUC mode set to Terminal the power level at the BUC is under closed loop control The operator now enters the desired power at the BUC directly and the modem operates in conjunction with the BUC varying the Tx Carrier level and BUC attenuator to provide the desired power Power from BUC 13 33 now 31 dBm 1 Set new power 2 Nudge up down Change Tx Modulator Power Menu Terminal with BUC If a Paradise BUC amp FSK are fitted but the modem BUC are set in independent mode then a third screen is displayed similar to the 1st from which the setting of the BUC attenuator may also be accessed by pressing the down key from the power level menu P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 71 6 6 16 6 6 17 Change Tx Rx Modulator SPECTRUM INVERT Menu Spectrum Invert 1 Normal 2 Invert Change Tx Rx Spectrum Invert Menu This menu allows the Tx Spectrum to be inverted to cope with satellites or frequency conversion equ
358. ters you have set Logging the AUPC delta power allow you to if questioned be able to specify to the satellite operator the exact power you were transmitting throughout the day or at a specific time in question P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 158 8 12 8 12 1 8 12 2 TUTORIAL ON CARRIER NOISE amp Eb No MEASUREMENTS Introduction This is the source of much confusion and This brief tutorial explains what the terms mean and how to measure and interpret the figures you see The diagram on the following page attempts to summarise this as clearly as possible visually with the text below adding detail for which there is no room on the diagram Finally a table provides a quick look up reference to convert values measured on a spectrum analyser to a real Eb No Derivation of Eb No from C N N It is possible to describe the Carrier Noise ratio within the Rx system at an arbitrary reference point eg at the input to the demodulator at the input to the Forward Error Correction decoder FEC at the input outer Reed Solomon FEC decoder or even at the terrestrial data interface Many of the terms you come across represent this Rx Carrier Noise ratio at these different reference points It is common to measure Carrier Noise Noise at the demodulator input on a spectrum analyser Ideally we are after the Carrier Noise ratio but as we cannot turn off the atmospheric noise we have
359. the facility on P420 s and P440 s which are fitted with an ASIC IFU IFU 2 see Appendix C1 which previously could not provide the facility as they had no Custom option on the service menu The Custom Menu however has always been available on P460 s and P480 s If you do wish to use the Custom menus to define Closed Net Plus ESC operation the table below specifies the parameters to enter at each menu which follows the Custom option from the Tx Rx Service selection screen Main Data Rate Based On TS32 MF Backward Alarm No of Back Alm Overhead Mode gt 32kbps Normal User choice Min eae lt 32kbps No TS 32 MF User choice N A no TS32 MF Min In both cases under the ESC DEFINE dialogue set the proportion of the overhead assigned to the async ESC as Maximum all remaining and set the Aux channel to Off so that as much as possible of the overhead is used for the ESC reducing the total overhead added to the data The final satellite data rate including overhead can be displayed on the INFO VIEW CONFIG TX RX screens Note As the overhead used relates directly to the data rate ESC amp backward alarm settings then for two modems to interwork the following parameters must match on both modems Main data rate Async ESC Baud Rate and Character length Parity Backward Alarm option ie both enabled or both disabled Baseband modes ie both Continuous Data or both Drop Insert A Closed Net Plus ESC facility a
360. ther data or BER testing internal or external When using Custom IBS Min overhead allocate the overhead between ESC amp Aux ports The overhead will scale to provide the set ESC Baud rate however much of the overhead is assigned to it and increase reduce the total overhead as appropriate The remainder of the overhead can be allocated to the Aux channel again for extra data of BER testing internal or external This effectively allows the sync channel rate to be varied by changing the ESC rate amp overhead ESC assignment which the overhead then adjusts to provide The screens are as follows O h use 1 TS16 XXX 2 TS32b5 amp 6 XXX YES 3zTS32b7 amp 8zXXX 4 TS48 XXX More Help Change Tx Rx ESC AuxBA Define IBS ESC Aux Custom 1 O h use 1 TSOb1 XXX 2 TS32b1 XXX 3 TS32b3 XXX 4zTS32b4zXXX Back Help Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Define IBS ESC Aux Custom 2 Each of the XXX fields can display the following uses for that part of the overhead and be toggled between the different uses by pressing the appropriate numbered key The overhead locations are unused ESC Defined for use by the ESC port Aux Defined for use by Aux port CAS In use for Channel Associated Signalling B A In use for the Backward Alarm MFW In use for the TS32 Multi Frame Word TS16 and TS48 are both bytes of the overhead structure which are free when CAS is not in use they are each equivalent to 8 32nd of the total overhead and can
361. timeslot number is entered Timeslots not already in the selection are toggled on and placed on the end of the selection Enter any single timeslot as a single or dual digit eg 0 5 05 23 31 Enter groups of timeslots as two pairs eg 02 5 two through five 11 17 12 2 NOTE Timeslots can be arbitrarily re ordered and so group selections be down as well as eg 11 17 means send in order 11 12 13 17 whereas 17 11 means send in order 17 16 15 11 Note that TSO must remain the first selection in IBS G 732 modes and for CAS TS16 must also remain in position The Modem hardware is capable of duplication and omission of timeslots although for simplicity the operator interface described above does not allow such selections If this is a requirement please contact the factory to discuss your needs P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 138 7 3 CUSTOM IDR OPERATION WITH 2048KBPS CONTINUOUS DATA 7 3 1 Change Tx Rx Baseband Continuous 2048k Menu IDR If Custom IDR operation based on the Low T1 E1 IDR format has been selected and the continuous data rate is 2048kbps then the Modem can offer Timeslot Identity Maintenance and Timeslot Re ordering features see the section on Timeslot Identity Maintenance in Appendix F on page 208 These features are only available if the Extended feature is available standard on P300 TCM Note that this is only offered under Custom IDR to si
362. ting AMI B8ZS HDB3 matches the input signal on any G 703 cards in use See note 3 Tx Warn Framer slipping data to sync After a break in the Tx input data the framer is bit slipping data in the Transmit FIFO to bring the data taken out of the FIFO by the framer into step with the satellite frame timing It bit slips rather than force the frame timing into step with the data to prevent causing a frame sync loss in the distant end equipment Tx Warn Framer slipping sig to sync See above text but this time with regard to CAS signalling data not the main data path Tx Warn Framer Sig FIFO slip The FIFO which carries the CAS signalling from the Drop Mux to the Framer has slipped full or empty This should never occur in operation contact factory P300H P300 Series Installation and Operating Handbook Page 219 Text on Display Description Cause Notes Relays ToTerr Sat Other Tx Warn RS Encoder FIFO slip Tx Warn Turbo encoder status Tx Warn Carrier muted as Ref settles Tx Warn BUC Mute as Ref settles lt 2Min Tx Warn BUC Power exceeds 1 point Tx Warn Cannot hold power set at BUC P300H The FIFO which interfaces the Framer to the Reed Solomon encoder has slipped full or empty This should never occur in operation contact factory This is a warning used in the engineering debugging process it should not occur in the field If it does please consult the factory This is displayed f
363. tion Signal Ground 7 19 20 21 Ground v Shield Protective ground 1 1 Screen Line Code Line Length For both T1 and E1 G 703 cards the line code is set from the front panel after the electrical interface is selected For T1 either AMI or B8ZS is available for E1 cards AMI or HDB3 In coded ie non AMI modes the modem will display a Data Marginal warning whenever a line code violation is detected For T1 cards a choice of line lengths is also given to allow the card to pre compensate the T1 signal for line losses If you are in doubt select the 133 feet option no pre compensation Switch Link Settings For T1 G 703 cards set SW2 to Position 2 For E1 G 703 cards SW2 selects either 750 G 703 on the BNC connectors or 1200 G 703 on the D type connectors Sw2 position 1 750 via BNC connectors Sw2 position 2 1200 via either D type connector or T1 G 703 operation NOTE With 1200 selected the EMC suppression capacitors soldered to the 750 BNC connectors may degrade operation with low amplitude G 703 signals If you are in a 1200 only environment simply unplug the twisted pairs connecting the BNC connectors to the G 703 interface card When the 750 BNC interface is selected the screen of the output connector is always connected to ground The screen of the input connector may be selected as follows LK1 pos 1 2 Input screen grounded recommended LK1 pos 2 3 Input screen floating LK1
364. tivated then the following Rx parameters automatically track the Tx parameters Service All modes Baseband Continuous data rate Drop Insert all selections excluding the timeslots Mod demod Modulation Inner FEC type amp FEC Rate Outer RS FEC Scrambler Spectral Invert ESC AuxBA All parameters Rx parameters which specifically remain independent are Baseband Insert timeslot selection only if Drop Insert active Buff Clk Rx Buffer size amp clocking mode Demod IF Frequency amp Sweep control Note that setting Rx Tx even momentarily copies the Rx parameters which track the Tx to the Rx configuration Toggling this option on then off again provides a convenient way to copy the Tx config to the Rx except the IF frequency should this be required at any point The Change Rx menu then will have different options showing depending on whether Rx Tx mode is active Rx Tx Disabled Rx 1 Service 2 Baseband 3 Buffer Clocking 4 Demod 5 ESC Aux 6 Rx Tx Off Change Rx Menu Rx not set to follow Tx Note that options 2 5 on the top menu are only displayed when the SERVICE option is set to something other then Off and so initially the screen may only show the SERVICE and Rx Tx options Rx Tx Enabled Rx 1 Baseband 2 Buffer Clocking 3 Demod 4 Rx Tx On Change Rx Menu Rx set to follow Tx In this mode The Baseband option is only shown if the Tx baseband mode is set to Drop Mux and hence the Rx Insert Mux will
365. to operate 1544kbps G 703 1544kbps G 703 interface in addition to RS422 V 35 RS232 interface software selectable 2048kbps G 703 2048kbps G 703 interface in addition to RS422 V 35 RS232 interface software selectable Options marked with an asterisk will require boards or single IC s to be added to the unit in order to add the option at a later date Features without an asterisk can be added by entering a Feature Code into the front panel of the equipment P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 11 2 4 FEATURE HIGHLIGHT This list highlights some of the notable features about the P300 Series Modems All P300 Series Modems ie base modem features lt SS 8 SN S amp SSS 46464454546 SSS P300H Variable data rate in 1 bps steps with fast acquisition even at low data rates BPSK QPSK and Offset QPSK OQPSK Viterbi FEC to IESS 308 309 rate 1 2 3 4 amp 7 8 in BPSK QPSK and OQPSK 100Hz IF resolution RS422 V 35 and RS232 DCE interface on both EIA 530 25 pin and RS449 37 pin connectors Can accommodate Viterbi amp Sequential FEC simultaneously Built in 1 FOR 1 Redundancy Controller requires only cables passive IF splitter combiner amp second modem for complete 1 1 in just 2U 0 99ms Doppler plesiochronous buffer Full remote M amp C 1000 event traffic log with facility to continuously log circuit performance at regular intervals logs average
366. to raise an alarm if either the Sig Valid In line switches to the inactive state As there is no X 21 equivalent of the RS422 Device DTE Ready In line TR set this to Ignore It is also possible to configure the Tx carrier to be switched on and off by the Sig Valid In line by selecting Change Tx Modulator Carrier RTS Controlled P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 173 X 21 DTE OPERATION This only has a clock to the modem from the terrestrial equipment Configure a cable with a 15 pin D male at one end X 21 DTE and either a 25 pin or 37 pin D male not both at the other end as follows X 21 DTE 3 _ 15 pin D male Signal RS422 Circuit 25 pin 37 pin Electrical Req Description Name Number Name A B DATA CIRCUIT FROM MODEM RX pe 7 e mos s s 2 rse 10 svat ou s so rs as Clocking IMPORTANT The interface will not work as X 21 unless you set the clocking correctly The Tx Clocking menu should be set take the single clock from the terrestrial by selecting Tx Clock In The Rx Clock menu should also be set to return Rx data in time with the single Tx Clock by also selecting 7x Clock In NO OTHER COMBINATIONS WILL WORK The maximum data rate is 10Mbps over good quality twisted pair screened cable but this rate is reduced as the connecting cables extend beyond 10m As an estimate assume the maximum r
367. to supply a 10MHz reference and a DC PSU to the LNB With None these options are not available Note the Std C LNB uses a high side Local Oscillator LO and the received SHF Frequency is LO IF Frequency not LO IF as with most other bands This is somewhat academic as from V3 85 onwards this is handled automatically and the modem displays the correct SHF frequency Note however that with the LNB Type set to None or Other there is no way to manually enter a SHF offset which uses a High Side LO P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 113 6 12 9 Change BUC LNB Rx LNB DC amp REFERENCES Menu Rx LNB 1 DC Supply 15V 2 10M Ref Off Change BUC LNB Rx LNB DC amp References Menu DC SUPPLY The P310 L Band modem can supply either 15V or 24V at 500mA to the LNB up the coax or line powered The option available here are Off 15V or 24V CAUTION Needless to say severe damage may occur if a DC supply or the wrong voltage DC supply is fed to a LNB not configured for being Line powered 10M REF The internal 10MHz reference may similarly be sourced from the modem up the coax to the LNB The only option available here is On or Off 6 12 10 Change BUC LNB Rx LNB SHF FREQUENCIES Menu Similar to the BUC option this screen is available on both 70MHz 140MHz P300 modems and P310 L Band modems and allows the modem to be set to display and edit the final SHF frequencies instead of the IF fre
368. ts of the overhead unused for frame alignment and also not borrowed by IBS SMS features may be set to be either Transparent or Fixed High This is controlled under Change User Opf Operation Terr Sat G 732 Spares If C 732 mode is selected the operator is then prompted with Channel Assoc Sig CAS in TS16 1 Normal No CAS 2 CAS Change Tx Rx Baseband Cont 2048k IBS G 732 CAS Menu Channel Associated Signalling CAS is described in para 10 2 Signalling Systems Introduction CCS CAS amp RBS on page 210 if required NORMAL NO CAS CAS P300H TS16 does not contain CAS ie a terrestrial CAS multiframe and abcd signalling nibbles for each timeslot It is treated as a normal data timeslot and this corresponds to modes defined as 1984kbps in the service definitions This feature is only available if the Extended feature is available standard on P300 TCM TS16 contains CAS and by implication a terrestrial multiframe in order to carry the CAS this corresponds to modes defined as 1920kbps in the service definitions If selected the terrestrial multiframe will be acquired and CAS removed from replaced into the Drop Insert bearer The CAS will be conveyed transparently from end to end of the link within IBS or Custom IBS overheads P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 137 Whether CAS or NO CASis selected the following prompt appears Timeslot re order option
369. ud at 64kbps This option is only available of the Custom Features feature is available standard P300 TCM The overhead can be operator assigned to the Aux port varying the overhead as defined in the paragraph title Custom Overhead Allocation a few paragraphs further on If the ESC port is defined as Custom then this one screen allocates overhead between the Aux and ESC ports If the ESC port is set to High Rate Async and the Aux port is set to Sync Channel then the following menu allows the overhead assigned to the ESC port to be determined P230 COMP CUSTOM ALL AVAIL P300H Async ESC 1 P230 compatible 2 Custom 3 All avail o h after Aux Change Tx Rx ESC Aux BA Define IBS ESC usage Menu The standard 20 32nds of the overhead is allocated to the ESC and this is compatible with earlier products such as the P230 P230D I and P1300 P1361 combination The overhead allocated to the ESC is TS16 TS32 bits 5 8 and TS48 TS32 bit 1 is not used as this is reserved for the INTELSAT low rate ESC on the Aux port if so configured The ESC port provides an async channel with maximum Baud rate approximately the terrestrial rate 23 eg usable rates of 2400 Baud at 64 kbps and 9600 Baud at 256 kbps This option is only available of the Custom Features feature is available standard P300 TCM A subsequent screen allows the operator to assign the overhead to the ESC port varying the overhead as defined in the parag
370. ugh the entire SETUP process If however you make a major change to the service such as switching from Closed Net to IBS you might decide a quick run through SETUP INITIAL CONFIG again accepting the current values with the YESkey will highlight any new parameters with sensible defaults that are relevant to this major change of service Make use of the Rx Tx option it s great it cuts down configuration errors and generally makes life easy At least read the note on Rx Tx in section 6 7 on page 86 so you know what you are missing P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 40 6 2 TO COMPLETELY SETUP INITIALLY 4 y gt 1 Status 2 Change 3 Monitor Main Menu 4 Info 5 Log 6 Test 7 Setup 8 Action gt 1 Initial config 2 Config check f 7 Setup Memories 3 Store 4 Recall 5 Erase Full Keyboard Detail gt Tx Service 1 lnitial config 1 Off 2 Closed Network 3 IBS SMS Modem prompts for Set Tx terrestrial rate 00000006 TO CHANGE PARMETERS eg Tx CLOCKING every parameter in turn 2400 4920000 YES gt 1 Status 2 Change 3 Monitor Operator continues to enter selection wal Act until modem completely configured Main Menu 4 Info 5 Log 6 Test 7 Setup 8 Action d Change 1 Tx 2 Rx 3 Terr Intfc 2 B 4 Rem M amp C 5 User Opt 6 Time Date Tx 1 Service 2 Baseband 3 Clocking 1 0 4 Modulator 5 ESC Aux
371. uld not be used with cascaded Drop Insert where AIS from the second modem in a cascade would cause the inserted data from the first in the cascade to be lost Options are Spoof or Off Default Off In standard IBS operation 48 amp 56kbps are X 50 bit stuffed up to 64kbps prior to framing It is not clear how AIS is intended to be transferred in these cases and so AIS can remain at 48 or 56kbps and still be X 50 stuffed or AIS can be set at 64kbps Options are 64k AIS normal or 48 56k AIS Default 64k AIS Normal When the terrestrial data rate is 2048kbps in IBS SMS mode the operator can select Normal or G 732 mode of operation corresponding to INTELSATs confusing definition of 2048kbps and 1920 1984kbps operation This option allows the spare bits of the TSO of the terrestrial G 732 frame to be either transparent across the link or forced to all ones Refer to section 7 2 1 Change Tx Rx Baseband Continuous 2048k Menu IBS on page 137 for further information on operation in this mode Options are Transparent or Fix High Default Fix High P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 105 6 10 8 Change User Opt Operation ALARMS Menu 6 10 9 Customer specific requirements 1 Relay mode 0 2 Fault mode 0 Change User Opt Operation Alarms Menu The two options under this menu are to enable Paradise to add customer specific features to the standard software and avoid having special versions of s
372. ult ie Rx summary alarm Deferred Fault Function unchanged from normal Tx Carrier On Off indication Software gt V2 12 This feature provides a form C relay contact to indicate the Tx carrier On Off state It may be used to indicate which one of a 1 1 pair is on line and which off line When active the Deferred Alarm output becomes instead a Tx carrier On Off indication mimicking the operation of the Standby LED on the front panel Carrier On corresponds to the no alarm condition and Carrier Off corresponds to the alarm condition When used to indicate which one of a 1 1 pair is on line should both Tx carriers mute eg an external inhibit applied to both modems in a 1 1 pair then the deferred relays of both units would indicate the off condition P300 Clock mode selection P300i P310i modem router only Software gt 3 41 Normally the P300i P310i data input is internally coupled directly to the output of the internal Linux router In this mode the Tx amp Rx clocking modes for the modem are fixed as the Ethernet port or the router has no concept of clock direction However under certain circumstances the internal link from modem to router is broken and routed through a new rear connector eg to insert a Crypto In such modes it is again useful to have manual selection of the clocking modes for the modem and activating Relay Mode 3 re instates the clock mode questions on the modem front panel dialogue L Band 1 1 Switchi
373. urations HELP Emergency Tx Carrier Off EMERGENCY CARRIER OFF Menu Operation Tx Carrier OFF 9 1 1 LOCK KBD Glossary Locks the keyboard USER PARAMETERS CLR CFG SERVICE E Clears the current configuration ser Parameters Cir Alf Reset CLR ALL RESET Factory parameters Pec Fan Auto Clears the entire non volatile memory FACTORY PARAMETERS AUTO Serial On Debu j REMCONT Watchdog Takeaway Giveaway M amp C Timeout P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 44 Full Menu Structure Sheet 4 7 Main Change User Opt Operation DEFAULT ALL Sets all user options to factory defaults ACTIONS Buffer auto centre BER gt 1E 3 detected AIS detected Backward Alarm from Sat BEM bearer CRE earer From sheet 1 Tx Drop Mux BER monitor MAIN Insert Mux BER monitor CHANGE OPERATION OPERATION Default all Actions Terrestrial atellite Terr Sat Alarms SATELLITE BER Estimate IBS MF Period Carrier ID s Backward Alarm map 50 75Ohm IF A ASS TERR SAT Buffer multiframe slip Thin route spoof X 50 AIS G 732 Spare bits ALARMS Relay mode Fault mode P300H ch cit P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook BUFFER AUTO CENTRE o Yes gt 1 3 ACTION Ignore Force AIS raise prompt alarm and backward alarm AIS ACTION No action Force AIS raise prompt alarm and backward alarm BACK ALARM ACTION Normal Signa
374. usting T gt selection including enabling Intelsat compatible is to tolerate before adjusting Tx power TX CARRIER multiple scramblars compatible to bring Eb No back to target value Off Control of Linkabit compatible On ue up Synchronous BS scr uted after power breal Synchronous RS scr COMMS LOSS ACTION Interface RTS controlled Poll sync V 35 scr Reset to nominal power amp wait urbo scr Freeze power at current value Slew to maximum delia plus power POWER LEVEL Interactive power adjustment or direct power level entry SPECTRUM INVERT Normal Invert spectrum CHANNEL 8K IDR ESC AUX CIRCUIT Display of oy IDR Off send all ones Off normal V1 amp V2 audio iced Het FU cach IMS ee Synchronous V1 amp V2 no audio ESC Audio levels Asynchronous 32k n V1 z audio lype IBS AUX PORT SYNC AUX O H USE RATE DISPLAY IBS or IDR Maximum Display of rates available with Intelsat low rate Custom the assigned averhead Max async ESC rate Synchronous channel Aux circuit synchronous rate Bate Sean Ghorsarpled Aux aij rate ESC PORT ASYNe ESC MODE Audio levels Off 230 Compatible Back atarmal High rate async channel Custom CUSTOM O H ALLOCATION M All available after Aux Manual assignment of parts of overhead between ESC and Aux circuits Assignment of TS16 25 of of when not CAS ESC BAUD RATE 532 bits 586 6 25 of o h Scroll sel
375. value of N or if RBS signalling is active then only 7 out of 8 of every TS16 are available for ESC as TS16 has to carry the CAS MF unique word or pack byte every 8th frame In this case simply consider TS16 as providing 7 bits of overhead not 8 For Custom IBS modes this is unchanged unless Minimum Overhead mode is selected in which case the overhead will vary up or down from the standard 1 15th to accommodate whatever Baud rate is set on the ESC Rate screen In all IDR modes the ESC channel is an 8kbps synchronous channel and if the ESC port is set to provide an async interface the exact maximum continuous async rate is Baud Rate 8000 x Bauds per Character 9 Where Bauds per Character is the number of Baud periods per character eg for async character format 8 N there are 10 Baud periods per character start 8 data bits stop 9 as 9 synchronous bits are always used for each character This results in a maximum of 9777Baud with 11 Baud periods per character eg start 8 parity stop and 8888Baud with 10 Baud periods per character eg start 8 stop as used with Paradise amp SA bus M amp C protocols SA bus is start 7 parity stop 10 Baud periods per character So when set for 8 bits No Parity or 7 bits with Parity the maximum standard Baud rate is 4800 Baud When set for 8 bits with Parity the maximum standard Baud rate is 9600 Baud P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 146
376. verhead Two 32 kbps ADPCM channels 4 wire 6000 7dBm to 16dBm software programmable in 0 1dB steps Outputs Four form C relays Inputs Four protected inputs short to O V to send alarm with matching summary Rx fail output Alarm inputs software configurable for a all external patch b 1 Rx fail amp 2 4 External Patch c 1 Rx Fail amp 2 4 OK d 1 4 Rx Fail When the IDR option is fitted independent ESC amp Aux ports on the IDR option replace the single shared ESC Aux port of the base unit RS232 RS422 or RS485 external interfaces or internal link to Remote M amp C port software selected No external cabling required between the ESC and M amp C ports for M amp C via ESC channel within overhead Other devices externally wired in parallel with M amp C port can also be accessed remotely Provides Clock Data amp Sync Octet timing lines Synchronous access to 8 kbps IDR ESC With the Async ESC feature standard on P300 IBS and above async ESC access to the 8kbps IDR ESC is provided giving up to a 9600 Baud async channel Page 29 Others Aux Port IDR IBS P1348 Emulation PRBS Tester Feature BER Channel Test Patterns Results Autolog Monitor AGC Option Facilities Provided Traffic Log Capacity IBS amp Closed Net plus ESC facilities as before installation of IDR option but now on ESC port on IDR card not shared ESC Aux port of base unit RS232 or RS422 software selecte
377. whatever part of the overhead you have assigned to it with the rest of the scaled overhead for the Aux channel Based on IDR As well as the features described above in standard IDR it is possible to reduce the normal 96kbps overhead two audio ESC s to 64kbps one audio ESC or 32kbps Aux data or 32kbps no audio ESC s amp no Aux data It may also be configured to use 16kbps ADPCM instead of 32kbps allowing the full IDR features two audio ESC to be accommodated in 64kbps overhead More interestingly using the normal IDR overhead of 96kbps together with 16kbps ADPCM for the audio ESC s it may provide all the normal IDR features but with the second 32kbps audio slot free to configure as a 32kbps Aux channel for continuous BER testing P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 127 6 16 6 Test Int BERT PATTERN Menu BERT Pattern 2 15 1 1 2 11 1 2047 2 2 15 1 3 2 20 1 Test Internal BERT Pattern Menu The test pattern may be selected to be one of three standard patterns as 2 1 2047 2 1 or 220 1 6 16 7 Test Int BERT MODE Menu BER Test mode 1 Min 1 One minute sliding window 2 Manual Test Internal BERT Mode Menu The test mode may be one of the following AUTOLOG ONE MINUTE MANUAL P300H The BERT mode is fixed in Autolog because the unit is configured to Autolog the results of the BER test at the user defined Autolog period In Autolog mode the screen above is n
378. when a single Tx carrier is used to broadcast information to multiple Rx sites Provided the local modem Rx path is locked to this broadcast carrier then the local Eb No indicates any atmospheric changes on the local end satellite uplink and down link In this mode the AUPC controls the local Tx power by directly monitoring the local Eb No This is an imperfect system as it changes the local Tx power to compensate for local atmospheric changes which affect the local uplink and downlink it cannot however compensate for distant atmospheric changes affecting the multiple distant downlinks Self Mon mode requires ESC channel as the AUPC software can directly read the local Eb No as well as control the local Tx power If AUPC is active in normal Maint ED NO or self monitor Self Mon modes then the status of the AUPC can be displayed Monitor AUPC also the AUPC delta power can be recorded regularly in the traffic log using the Autolog feature Change Log Autolog The AUPC delta power can also be output on the uncommitted analog DAC output if the Monitor AGC option is fitted again see uncommitted analog DAC output value 5 in Appendix E starting on page 201 The speed of reaction of the AUPC depends primarily on two factors The user specified slew rate specifically to limit the rate of change of Tx power when a power adjustment is deemed necessary and the ESC channel Baud rate which affects how regularly the distant Eb No is read by
379. x amp Rx faults Tx 68 5734M 64k Rx 73 4256M 64kf Configuration Tx 68 5734M 64k Rx 73 4256M 64k f Carr On Eb No 16 3dB Local 1 Summary Carr On Eb No Unlocked ALARM User selection of YN default screen when J 1 J 1 Status selected E YY YY Tx path OK for 3 7days 1 Traffic Status Tx Fault No clock from interface t Rx path OK for 2 1days BER lt 1E12 J Summary Rx Fault Demod unlocked at 73 4256MHz Other status screens aw es e by pressing Up or Down 4 t uU u from 1st Status screen Rx path OK since 15 13 44 on 05 07 97 1 Rx Status Rx Fault Demod unlocked at 1 User 1 0e 12 Buffer 00 00 53 J detailed 73 4256MHz with sweep width of 10KHz 4 4 t 4 t Tx path OK since 17 10 25 on 05 07 97 1 Tx Status Tx Fault No input clock from 1 4 detailed interface line TT 4 4 t 4 t Demod Eb No 16 3dB User BER 1 0e 12f Demod status Demod Unlocked 1 Offset 3 4KHz Carrier Level 38dBm 4 detailed 4 The operator has the option to display either the Configuration Summary Screen shown first above or the Traffic Status Summary Screen shown second above when Status is selected from the main menu The selection between screens is made under Change User Opt Disolay These screens are now each discussed in turn P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 49 CONFIGURATION SUMMARY
380. x paths may be selected as Off muting appropriate alarms in Tx or Rx only applications Three form relays providing prompt Tx Rx Traffic faults as well as a prompt unit equipment fault and a deferred alarm P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 12 P300 P310 IBS Additional Features v P300H INTELSAT Reed Solomon Feature A fully INTELSAT compliant Reed Solomon Codec providing Automatic selection of appropriate INTELSAT values of n k amp t and interleaving depth for data rate amp service selected n k t 126 112 7 by default switching to 225 205 10 or 219 201 9 with 4 8 deep interleaving as required for IDR amp TCM IDR Provides improved low Eb No performance in framed mode due to use of extended threshold frame sync algorithms Enhanced capabilities with the Custom Features feature see later Wideband IF Feature The extension of the 50MHz 90MHz IF range up to 50MHz 180MHz High Date Rate Feature The extension of the data rate range to include rates above 512kbps up to 5 0Mbps depending on modulation and FEC modes Async ESC Feature The addition of a high rate async ESC channel which may be internally linked to the M amp C port to provide control of distant end equipment in all overhead modes without additional cabling The Async ESC feature provides as follows Support for any async ESC rate in Closed Net Plus ESC mode providing a scalable overhead which a
381. y in use by the ESC channel This can provide a channel of up to 4 4 of the main data rate If the Custom Features feature is available standard on P300 TCM then the overhead may be user assigned between the ESC amp Aux channels allowing the desired Async ESC rate to be achieved for distant end M amp C but not massively exceeded leaving any spare overhead to maximise the Aux channel data rate for BER testing IDR mode is only available if the IDR Option is fitted standard on P300 IDR and above The ESC channel is the 8kbps synchronous ESC channel standard on IDR Services which may also be used for Asynchronous ESC data if the Async ESC feature is available The Aux channel may be selected to be either 32kbps in place of one 32kbps ADPCM audio ESC channel or 64kbps in place of both audio ESC s This provides a very useful channel rate for BER testing Custom Framing mode is only available if the Custom Features feature is available standard on P300 TCM Custom framing is based on either IBS or IDR formats and custom framing provides the following advantages Based on IBS A variable overhead may be added allowing both ESC amp Aux channels to be scaled to virtually any rate This is achieved by setting the ESC channel to the required Async ESC Baud rate and changing the split of the allocation of the overhead between ESC amp Aux channels The total overhead then scales to provide the required ESC Baud rate in
382. y on P310 L Band modems Change Screen Remote M amp C Change limited as Remote M amp C active Change 1 Rem M amp C 2 Time Date Change Menu remote M amp C Each of these options will be described in the following sections P300H P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 53 6 6 6 6 1 CHANGE TX MENU The Change Tx menu is shown below Note that options 2 5 are only displayed when the SERVICE option is set to something other than Off and so initially the screen may only show the SERVICE option Tx 1 Service 2 Baseband 3 Clocking 4 Modulator 5 ESC Aux BA Change Tx Menu Taking each of these possible selections in turn Change Tx Rx SERVICE Menu Tx Service IDR 1 Off 2 Closed Network 3 IBS SMS 4 IDR 5 Custom Change Tx Rx Service Menu The options are OFF CLOSED NET IBS SMS IDR This disables the path completely for Tx or Rx only operation All alarms for that path are muted and traffic faults ignored For the Tx path the Tx carrier is also muted The Tx Rx path operates a Closed Network mode If the Async ESC feature is available standard P300 IBS and above then a subsequent screen described in the next section asks if it is normal Closed Network or whether Closed Net Plus ESC is required Normal Closed Network adds no overhead to the data and is compatible with other closed network equipment such as the Paradise P200 and closed netwo
383. z 6 725 GHz 7 025 GHz 5775 MHz 6 425 GHz 6 725 GHz 5475 MHz The difference between None and Other is that with Other the operator can configure the modem to supply a 10MHz reference and a DC PSU to the BUC if the internal BUC PSU option is fitted With None these options are not available If a Paradise BUC is fitted then the following screen is displayed Modem BUC control mode 1 Independent 2 Terminal Closed Loop Change BUC LNB Tx BUC BUC Type Menu 2 INDEPENDENT P300H The modem and BUC are both manually controlled from the modem front panel the modem as normal and the BUC with Change BUC LNB Tx BUC The operator maintains control of the BUC Tx on off status and any BUC attenuator available The modem does however automatically report the IF frequency to the BUC so the BUC may select the correct power calibration table for the monitored power reported back to the modem viewable under Monitor BUC It is advisable to keep the BUC attenuator at maximum attenuation to avoid overdriving the BUC input stages unless there is considerable cross site cable loss Fine 0 1dB power control is done with the modem Change Ix Mod Power whereas the BUC attenuator provides 1dB adjustment steps If the desired carrier power cannot be achieved with maximum BUC attenuation then there must be considerable cross site loss and so it is safe to reduce the BUC attenuation It is advisable to keep the modem carrier power seve
384. z update rate P300 Series Modem Installation and Operating Handbook Page 157 Start the AUPC in a passive mode distant end monitoring only mode to ensure the system is working gt gt Switch on REMOTE REPORTING Change Rx Demod AUPC to respond to the Eb No requests at the distant modem Set the local AUPC for Mon Dist to determine if it is working correctly If it is then the distant Eb No should be available on the Monitor Distant screens If the Eb No or BER figures say Unavail then the ESC is not correctly configured If it does not work in this mode don t start changing the AUPC sort out the ESC channel When the distant Eb No is displayed record the distant Eb No under clear sky conditions Then change the AUPC mode to Maint Eb No in order to get access to the other AUPC settings Review the proportion of ESC bandwidth and more importantly the distant Eb No update rate using Info View Config Tx down down etc Determine the parameters for the AUPC gt Determine the way the AUPC will operate will it try to 1 Maintain a minimum Eb No but take advantage of a better Eb No when atmospheric conditions are favourable normal 2 Maintain a fixed Eb No reducing Tx power when atmospheric conditions are favourable unlikely To maintain a minimum Eb No set this as the Target Eb No set the Max power to the maximum increase you are allowed and set Min power to Zero This will prevent the Tx power d

Paradise P300 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents